INSTRUCTION MANUAL
MODEL 360E
CARBON DIOXIDE ANALYZER
© TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS
ADVANCED POLLUTION INSTRUMENTATION DIVISION
9480 CARROLL PARK DRIVE
SAN DIEGO, CA 92121-5201
USA
Toll-free Phone: 800-324-5190
Phone: 858-657-9800
Fax: 858-657-9816
Email: api-sales@teledyne.com
Website: http://www.teledyne-api.com/
04584 REV. C8
Copyright 2008 Teledyne Advanced Pollution
Instrumentation
DCN 5341
06 March 2009
PRINT DATE: 06 March 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
M360E Documentation
SAFETY MESSAGES
Your safety and the safety of others is very important. We have provided many important safety messages in
this manual. Please read these messages carefully.
A safety message alerts you to potential hazards that could hurt you or others. Each safety message is
associated with a safety alert symbol. These symbols are found in the manual and inside the instrument. The
definition of these symbols is described below:
GENERAL SAFETY HAZARD: Refer to the instructions for
details on the specific hazard.
CAUTION: Hot Surface Warning
CAUTION: Electrical Shock Hazard
TECHNICIAN SYMBOL: All operations marked with this
symbol are to be performed by qualified maintenance
personnel only.
CAUTION
The analyzer should only be used for the purpose and in the manner described in this
manual. If you use the analyzer in a manner other than that for which it was intended,
unpredictable behavior could ensue with possible hazardous consequences.
05232 Rev B3
i
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
M360E Documentation
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. M360E DOCUMENTATION.....................................................................................................................................................1
1.1. Using This Manual............................................................................................................................................................1
2. SPECIFICATIONS, APPROVALS AND WARRANTY ............................................................................................................3
2.1. Specifications ...................................................................................................................................................................3
2.2. CE Mark Compliance........................................................................................................................................................4
2.3. Warranty...........................................................................................................................................................................4
3. GETTING STARTED ...............................................................................................................................................................7
3.1. Unpacking and Initial Set Up ............................................................................................................................................7
3.1.1. M360 Layout.............................................................................................................................................................9
3.1.2. Electrical Connections ............................................................................................................................................12
3.1.2.1. Power Connection...........................................................................................................................................12
3.1.2.2. Output Connections ........................................................................................................................................13
3.1.2.3. Connecting the Status Outputs .......................................................................................................................14
3.1.2.4. Connecting the Control Inputs.........................................................................................................................15
3.1.2.5. Connecting the Serial Ports ............................................................................................................................16
3.1.2.6. Connecting to a LAN or the Internet................................................................................................................16
3.1.2.7. Connecting to a Multidrop Network.................................................................................................................16
3.1.3. Pneumatic Connections:.........................................................................................................................................16
3.1.3.1. Basic Pneumatic Connections ........................................................................................................................16
3.1.3.2. Connections with Internal Valve Options Installed ..........................................................................................20
3.1.3.3. Pneumatic Connections to M360E in Multipoint Calibration Applications .......................................................22
3.1.4. Setting the internal Purge Air Pressure...................................................................................................................22
3.2. Initial Operation ..............................................................................................................................................................23
3.2.1. Startup....................................................................................................................................................................23
3.2.2. Warm Up ................................................................................................................................................................24
3.2.3. Warning Messages.................................................................................................................................................24
3.2.4. Functional Check....................................................................................................................................................26
3.3. Initial Calibration Procedure ...........................................................................................................................................27
3.3.1. Initial O2 Sensor Calibration Procedure ..................................................................................................................30
3.3.1.1. O2 Calibration Setup .......................................................................................................................................30
3.3.1.2. O2 Calibration Method.....................................................................................................................................30
4. FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS ...................................................................................................................................35
4.1. FAQ’s .............................................................................................................................................................................35
4.2. Glossary .........................................................................................................................................................................36
5. OPTIONAL HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE ........................................................................................................................39
5.1. Rack Mount Kits (Options 20a, 20b & 21) ......................................................................................................................39
5.2. Current Loop Analog Outputs (Option 41)......................................................................................................................39
5.2.1. Converting Current Loop Analog Outputs to Standard Voltage Outputs.................................................................40
5.3. Expendable Kits (Options 42C, 42D and 43)..................................................................................................................40
5.4. Calibration Valves Options .............................................................................................................................................41
5.4.1. Zero/Span/Shutoff Valve (Option 50)......................................................................................................................41
5.4.2. Zero/Span/Shutoff with External CO2 Scrubber (Option 51) ..................................................................................42
5.4.3. Zero/Span Valve (Option 52) ..................................................................................................................................42
5.4.4. Zero/Span Valve with External CO2 Scrubber (Option 53)......................................................................................44
5.5. Communication Options .................................................................................................................................................44
5.5.1. RS232 Modem Cable (Option 60)...........................................................................................................................44
5.5.2. RS-232 Multidrop (Option 62).................................................................................................................................44
5.5.3. Ethernet (Option 63) ...............................................................................................................................................45
5.6. Oxygen Sensor (OPT 65)...............................................................................................................................................46
5.6.1. Theory of Operation................................................................................................................................................46
5.6.1.1. Paramagnetic measurement of O2..................................................................................................................46
5.6.1.2. Operation within the M360E Analyzer.............................................................................................................46
5.6.1.3. Pneumatic Operation of the O2 Sensor...........................................................................................................47
5.7. Additional Manuals .........................................................................................................................................................48
5.7.1. Printed Manuals (Option 70)...................................................................................................................................48
5.7.2. Manual on CD (Part number 045840200)...............................................................................................................48
5.8. Extended Warranty (Options 92 & 93)............................................................................................................................48
5.9. Special Software Features .............................................................................................................................................48
5.9.1. Dilution Ratio Option...............................................................................................................................................48
5.9.2. Maintenance Mode Switch......................................................................................................................................49
5.9.3. Second Language Switch.......................................................................................................................................49
05232 Rev B3
iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M360E Documentation
Model 360E Instruction Manual
6. OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS..............................................................................................................................................51
6.1. Overview of Operating modes........................................................................................................................................51
6.2. Sample Mode .................................................................................................................................................................52
6.2.1. Test Functions ........................................................................................................................................................52
6.2.2. Warning Messages.................................................................................................................................................55
6.3. Calibration Mode ............................................................................................................................................................56
6.4. SETUP MODE................................................................................................................................................................57
6.5. SETUP CFG: Viewing the Analyzer’s Configuration Information ...............................................................................58
6.6. SETUP ACAL: Automatic Calibration.........................................................................................................................58
6.7. SETUP DAS: Using the Data Acquisition System (iDAS) ..........................................................................................59
6.7.1. iDAS Structure........................................................................................................................................................59
6.7.1.1. iDAS Channels................................................................................................................................................60
6.7.1.2. iDAS Parameters ............................................................................................................................................61
6.7.1.3. iDAS Triggering Events...................................................................................................................................62
6.7.2. Default iDAS Channels...........................................................................................................................................62
6.7.2.1. Viewing iDAS Data and Settings.....................................................................................................................65
6.7.2.2. Editing iDAS Data Channels ...........................................................................................................................66
6.7.2.3. Trigger Events.................................................................................................................................................67
6.7.2.4. Editing iDAS Parameters ................................................................................................................................68
6.7.2.5. Sample Period and Report Period ..................................................................................................................70
6.7.2.6. Number of Records.........................................................................................................................................72
6.7.2.7. RS-232 Report Function .................................................................................................................................73
6.7.2.8. Compact Report..............................................................................................................................................73
6.7.2.9. Starting Date...................................................................................................................................................73
6.7.2.10. Disabling/Enabling Data Channels................................................................................................................74
6.7.2.11. HOLDOFF Feature .......................................................................................................................................74
6.7.3. Remote iDAS Configuration....................................................................................................................................75
6.8. SETUP RNGE: Analog Output Reporting Range Configuration.................................................................................77
6.8.1. Physical Range versus Analog Output Reporting Ranges......................................................................................77
6.8.2. Reporting Range Modes.........................................................................................................................................78
6.8.3. Single Range mode (SNGL) ...................................................................................................................................79
6.8.4. Dual Range Mode (DUAL)......................................................................................................................................80
6.8.5. Auto Range Mode (AUTO) .....................................................................................................................................81
6.8.6. Range Units............................................................................................................................................................82
6.8.7. Dilution Ratio ..........................................................................................................................................................83
6.9. SETUP PASS: Password Feature .............................................................................................................................84
6.10. SETUP CLK: Setting the Internal Time-of-Day Clock ..............................................................................................85
6.11. SETUP MORE COMM: Using the Analyser’s Communication Ports....................................................................86
6.11.1. Analyzer ID...........................................................................................................................................................86
6.11.2. COMM Port Default Settings.................................................................................................................................87
6.11.3. RS-485 Configuration of COM2............................................................................................................................89
6.11.4. DTE and DCE Communication .............................................................................................................................90
6.11.5. COMM Port Communication Modes .....................................................................................................................91
6.11.6. Ethernet Card Configuration .................................................................................................................................93
6.11.6.1. Ethernet Card COM2 Communication Modes and Baud Rate......................................................................93
6.11.6.2. Configuring the Ethernet Interface Option using DHCP................................................................................93
6.11.6.3. Manually Configuring the Network IP Addresses..........................................................................................96
6.11.6.4. Changing the Analyzer’s HOSTNAME..........................................................................................................98
6.11.7. Multidrop RS-232 Set Up......................................................................................................................................99
6.11.8. COM Port Baud Rate..........................................................................................................................................101
6.11.9. COM Port Testing...............................................................................................................................................102
6.12. SETUP MORE VARS: Internal Variables (VARS) .............................................................................................103
6.13. SETUP MORE DIAG: Using the Diagnostics Functions...................................................................................105
6.13.1. Accessing the Diagnostic Features.....................................................................................................................106
6.13.2. Signal I/O............................................................................................................................................................106
6.13.3. Analog Output Step Test ....................................................................................................................................107
6.13.4. Analog I/O Configuration ....................................................................................................................................108
6.13.4.1. Analog Output Signal Type and Range Span Selection..............................................................................110
6.13.4.2. Analog Output Calibration Mode.................................................................................................................110
6.13.4.3. Manual Analog Output Calibration and Voltage Adjustment .......................................................................112
6.13.4.4. Current Loop Output Adjustment ................................................................................................................114
6.13.4.5. AIN Calibration............................................................................................................................................116
6.13.5. Electric Test........................................................................................................................................................117
6.13.6. Dark Calibration Test..........................................................................................................................................118
6.13.7. Pressure Calibration ...........................................................................................................................................119
iv
05232 Rev B3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
M360E Documentation
6.13.8. Flow Calibration..................................................................................................................................................120
6.13.9. Test Channel Output...........................................................................................................................................121
6.14. SETUP MORE ALRM: Using the Gas Concentration Alarms.............................................................................122
6.14.1. Setting the Concentration Alarm Limits...............................................................................................................122
6.15. Remote Operation of the Analyzer .............................................................................................................................123
6.15.1. Remote Operation Using the External Digital I/O................................................................................................123
6.15.1.1. Status Outputs ............................................................................................................................................123
6.15.1.2. Control Inputs..............................................................................................................................................125
6.15.2. Remote Operation Using the External Serial I/O ................................................................................................126
6.15.2.1. Terminal Operating Modes..........................................................................................................................126
6.15.2.2. Help Commands in Terminal Mode.............................................................................................................126
6.15.2.3. Command Syntax .......................................................................................................................................127
6.15.2.4. Data Types..................................................................................................................................................127
6.15.2.5. Status Reporting .........................................................................................................................................128
6.15.2.6. Remote Access by Modem .........................................................................................................................129
6.15.2.7. COM Port Password Security .....................................................................................................................130
6.15.2.8. APICOM Remote Control Program.............................................................................................................131
6.15.3. Additional Communications Documentation .......................................................................................................131
6.15.4. Using the M360E with a Hessen Protocol Network.............................................................................................132
6.15.4.1. General Overview of Hessen Protocol ........................................................................................................132
6.15.4.2. Hessen COMM Port Configuration..............................................................................................................132
6.15.4.3. Activating Hessen Protocol .........................................................................................................................133
6.15.4.4. Selecting a Hessen Protocol Type..............................................................................................................133
6.15.4.5. Setting The Hessen Protocol Response Mode ...........................................................................................134
6.15.4.6. Hessen Protocol Gas ID..............................................................................................................................134
6.15.4.7. Setting Hessen Protocol Status Flags.........................................................................................................135
6.15.4.8. Instrument ID Code.....................................................................................................................................136
7. CALIBRATION PROCEDURES ..........................................................................................................................................137
7.1. Before Calibration.........................................................................................................................................................137
7.1.1. Zero Air and Span Gas.........................................................................................................................................137
7.1.2. Calibration Gas Traceability..................................................................................................................................138
7.1.3. Data Recording Devices.......................................................................................................................................138
7.2. Manual Calibration without Zero/Span Valves..............................................................................................................138
7.3. Manual Calibration Checks...........................................................................................................................................141
7.4. Manual Calibration with Zero/Span Valves...................................................................................................................141
7.5. Manual Calibration Checks with Zero/Span Valves......................................................................................................146
7.5.1. Zero/Span Calibration on Auto Range or Dual Ranges ........................................................................................147
7.5.2. Use of Zero/Span Valves with Remote Contact Closure ......................................................................................148
7.6. Automatic Zero/Span Cal/Check (AutoCal) ..................................................................................................................148
7.6.1. AutoCal with Auto or Dual Reporting Ranges Modes Selected ............................................................................151
7.7. Calibration Quality ........................................................................................................................................................151
8. EPA PROTOCOL CALIBRATION.......................................................................................................................................153
9. MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE & PROCEDURES ................................................................................................................155
9.1. Maintenance Schedule.................................................................................................................................................155
9.2. Predicting Failures Using the Test Functions ...............................................................................................................158
9.3. Maintenance Procedures..............................................................................................................................................159
9.3.1. Replacing the Sample Particulate Filter................................................................................................................159
9.3.2. Rebuilding the Sample Pump ...............................................................................................................................159
9.3.3. Performing Leak Checks ......................................................................................................................................160
9.3.3.1. Vacuum Leak Check and Pump Check ........................................................................................................160
9.3.3.2. Pressure Leak Check....................................................................................................................................160
9.3.4. Performing a Sample Flow Check ........................................................................................................................161
9.3.5. Cleaning the Optical Bench ..................................................................................................................................161
9.3.6. Cleaning Exterior Surfaces of the M360E.............................................................................................................161
10. THEORY OF OPERATION................................................................................................................................................163
10.1. Measurement Method.................................................................................................................................................163
10.1.1. Beer’s Law..........................................................................................................................................................163
10.1.2. Measurement Fundamentals ..............................................................................................................................163
10.1.3. Gas Filter Correlation..........................................................................................................................................164
10.1.3.1. The GFC Wheel..........................................................................................................................................164
10.1.3.2. The Measure Reference Ratio....................................................................................................................165
10.1.4. Interference and Signal to Noise Rejection.........................................................................................................166
10.1.4.1. Ambient CO2 Interference Rejection ...........................................................................................................167
10.2. Pneumatic Operation..................................................................................................................................................168
05232 Rev B3
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M360E Documentation
Model 360E Instruction Manual
10.2.1. Sample Gas Flow ...............................................................................................................................................168
10.2.2. Flow Rate Control...............................................................................................................................................169
10.2.2.1. Critical Flow Orifice.....................................................................................................................................169
10.2.3. Purge Gas Pressure Control...............................................................................................................................170
10.2.4. Particulate Filter..................................................................................................................................................170
10.2.5. Pneumatic Sensors.............................................................................................................................................170
10.2.5.1. Sample Pressure Sensor ............................................................................................................................170
10.2.5.2. Sample Flow Sensor...................................................................................................................................170
10.3. Electronic Operation...................................................................................................................................................171
10.3.1. Overview.............................................................................................................................................................171
10.3.2. CPU....................................................................................................................................................................173
10.3.3. Optical Bench & GFC Wheel ..............................................................................................................................173
10.3.3.1. Temperature Control...................................................................................................................................173
10.3.3.2. IR Source....................................................................................................................................................173
10.3.3.3. GFC Wheel .................................................................................................................................................174
10.3.3.4. IR Photo-Detector .......................................................................................................................................175
10.3.4. Synchronous Demodulator (Sync/Demod) Assembly.........................................................................................175
10.3.4.1. Overview.....................................................................................................................................................175
10.3.4.2. Signal Synchronization and Demodulation..................................................................................................176
10.3.4.3. Sync/Demod Status LED’s..........................................................................................................................177
10.3.4.4. Photo-Detector Temperature Control..........................................................................................................178
10.3.4.5. Dark Calibration Switch...............................................................................................................................178
10.3.4.6. Electric Test Switch.....................................................................................................................................178
10.3.5. Relay Board........................................................................................................................................................178
10.3.5.1. Status LED’s ...............................................................................................................................................179
10.3.5.2. I2C Watch Dog Circuitry ..............................................................................................................................180
10.3.6. Mother Board......................................................................................................................................................180
10.3.6.1. A to D Conversion.......................................................................................................................................180
10.3.6.2. Sensor Inputs..............................................................................................................................................180
10.3.6.3. Thermistor Interface....................................................................................................................................181
10.3.6.4. Analog Outputs ...........................................................................................................................................181
10.3.6.5. Internal Digital I/O .......................................................................................................................................182
10.3.6.6. External Digital I/O......................................................................................................................................182
10.3.7. I2C Data Bus.......................................................................................................................................................182
10.3.8. Power Supply/ Circuit Breaker............................................................................................................................183
10.4. Interface .....................................................................................................................................................................184
10.4.1. Front Panel Interface ..........................................................................................................................................184
10.4.1.1. Analyzer Status LED’s ................................................................................................................................185
10.4.1.2. Keyboard.....................................................................................................................................................185
10.4.1.3. Display........................................................................................................................................................185
10.4.1.4. Keyboard/Display Interface Electronics.......................................................................................................186
10.5. Software Operation.....................................................................................................................................................188
10.5.1. Adaptive Filter.....................................................................................................................................................188
10.5.2. Calibration - Slope and Offset.............................................................................................................................189
10.5.3. Measurement Algorithm......................................................................................................................................189
10.5.4. Temperature and Pressure Compensation.........................................................................................................189
10.5.5. Internal Data Acquisition System (iDAS) ............................................................................................................190
11. TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR PROCEDURES...........................................................................................................191
11.1. General Troubleshooting Hints...................................................................................................................................191
11.1.1. Interpreting WARNING Messages......................................................................................................................192
11.1.2. Fault Diagnosis with TEST Functions.................................................................................................................194
11.1.3. Using the Diagnostic Signal I/O Function ...........................................................................................................196
11.1.4. Internal Electronic Status LED’s .........................................................................................................................197
11.1.4.1. CPU Status Indicator ..................................................................................................................................197
11.1.4.2. Sync Demodulator Status LED’s.................................................................................................................197
11.1.4.3. Relay Board Status LED’s...........................................................................................................................198
11.2. Gas Flow Problems ....................................................................................................................................................200
11.2.1. M360E Internal Gas Flow Diagrams...................................................................................................................200
11.2.2. Typical Sample Gas Flow Problems...................................................................................................................202
11.2.2.1. Flow is Zero ................................................................................................................................................202
11.2.2.2. Low Flow.....................................................................................................................................................203
11.2.2.3. High Flow....................................................................................................................................................203
11.2.2.4. Displayed Flow = “XXXX”............................................................................................................................203
11.2.2.5. Actual Flow Does Not Match Displayed Flow..............................................................................................203
11.2.2.6. Sample Pump .............................................................................................................................................204
vi
05232 Rev B3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
M360E Documentation
11.2.3. Poor or Stopped Flow of Purge Gas...................................................................................................................204
11.3. Calibration Problems ..................................................................................................................................................204
11.3.1. Miscalibrated.......................................................................................................................................................204
11.3.2. Non-Repeatable Zero and Span.........................................................................................................................205
11.3.3. Inability to Span – No SPAN Key........................................................................................................................205
11.3.4. Inability to Zero – No ZERO Key.........................................................................................................................205
11.4. Other Performance Problems.....................................................................................................................................206
11.4.1. Temperature Problems.......................................................................................................................................206
11.4.1.1. Box or Sample Temperature.......................................................................................................................206
11.4.1.2. Bench Temperature ....................................................................................................................................206
11.4.1.3. GFC Wheel Temperature............................................................................................................................207
11.4.1.4. IR Photo-Detector TEC Temperature..........................................................................................................207
11.4.2. Excessive Noise .................................................................................................................................................208
11.5. Subsystem Checkout..................................................................................................................................................209
11.5.1. AC Mains Configuration......................................................................................................................................209
11.5.2. DC Power Supply ...............................................................................................................................................209
11.5.3. I2C Bus................................................................................................................................................................210
11.5.4. Keyboard/Display Interface.................................................................................................................................210
11.5.5. Relay Board........................................................................................................................................................211
11.5.6. Sensor Assembly................................................................................................................................................211
11.5.6.1. Sync/Demodulator Assembly......................................................................................................................211
11.5.6.2. Opto Pickup Assembly................................................................................................................................212
11.5.6.3. GFC Wheel Drive........................................................................................................................................212
11.5.6.4. IR Source....................................................................................................................................................212
11.5.6.5. Pressure/Flow Sensor Assembly ................................................................................................................212
11.5.7. Motherboard .......................................................................................................................................................213
11.5.7.1. A/D Functions .............................................................................................................................................213
11.5.7.2. Analog Outputs: Voltage .............................................................................................................................213
11.5.7.3. Analog Outputs: Current Loop ....................................................................................................................214
11.5.7.4. Status Outputs ............................................................................................................................................215
11.5.7.5. Control Inputs – Remote Zero, Span ..........................................................................................................215
11.5.8. CPU....................................................................................................................................................................216
11.5.9. RS-232 Communications....................................................................................................................................216
11.5.9.1. General RS-232 Troubleshooting ...............................................................................................................216
11.5.9.2. Troubleshooting Analyzer/Modem or Terminal Operation...........................................................................217
11.6. Repair Procedures......................................................................................................................................................218
11.6.1. Repairing Sample Flow Control Assembly..........................................................................................................218
11.6.2. Removing/Replacing the GFC Wheel.................................................................................................................219
11.6.3. Disk-On-Chip Replacement Procedure...............................................................................................................220
12. A PRIMER ON ELECTRO-STATIC DISCHARGE.............................................................................................................221
12.1. How Static Charges are Created................................................................................................................................221
12.2. How Electro-Static Charges Cause Damage..............................................................................................................222
12.3. Common Myths About ESD Damage .........................................................................................................................223
12.4. Basic Principles of Static Control................................................................................................................................223
12.4.1. General Rules.....................................................................................................................................................223
12.4.2. Basic anti-ESD Procedures for Analyzer Repair and Maintenance ....................................................................225
12.4.2.1. Working at the Instrument Rack..................................................................................................................225
12.4.2.2. Working at an Anti-ESD Work Bench..........................................................................................................225
12.4.2.3. Transferring Components from Rack to Bench and Back ...........................................................................226
12.4.2.4. Opening Shipments from Teledyne Instruments Customer Service............................................................226
12.4.2.5. Packing Components for Return to Teledyne Instruments Customer Service. ...........................................227
05232 Rev B3
vii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M360E Documentation
Model 360E Instruction Manual
LIST OF APPENDICES
APPENDIX A - VERSION SPECIFIC SOFTWARE DOCUMENTATION
APPENDIX A-1: M360E Software Menu Trees, Revision G.4
APPENDIX A-2: Setup Variables For Serial I/O, Revision G.4
APPENDIX A-3: Warnings and Test Functions, Revision G.4
APPENDIX A-4: M360E Signal I/O Definitions, Revision G.4
APPENDIX A-5: M360E iDAS Functions, Revision G.4
APPENDIX A-6: Terminal Command Designators, Revision G.4
APPENDIX B - M360E SPARE PARTS LIST
APPENDIX C - REPAIR QUESTIONNAIRE - M360E
APPENDIX D - ELECTRONIC SCHEMATICS
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure 3-1: Front Panel Layout.............................................................................................................................. 9
Figure 3-2: Rear Panel Layout .............................................................................................................................. 9
Figure 3-3: Assembly Layout............................................................................................................................... 10
Figure 3-4: Optical Bench Layout........................................................................................................................ 11
Figure 3-5: M360E Internal Gas Flow.................................................................................................................. 11
Figure 3-6: Pneumatic Connections–Basic Configuration–Using Bottled Span Gas.......................................... 17
Figure 3-7: Pneumatic Connections–Basic Configuration–Using Gas Dilution Calibrator.................................. 18
Figure 3-8: Pneumatic Connections–M360E with Zero/Span/Shutoff Valves (OPT 50)..................................... 20
Figure 3-9: Pneumatic Connections–M360E with Zero/Span/Shutoff Valves and External Zero Air Scrubber
Figure 3-10: Pneumatic Connections–M360E with Zero/Span Valves (OPT 52) ................................................. 21
Figure 3-11: Pneumatic Connections–M360E with Zero/Span Valves with External Zero air Scrubber (OPT 53)21
Figure 3-12: Example of Pneumatic Set up for Multipoint Calibration of M360..................................................... 22
Figure 3-13: O2 Sensor Calibration Set Up ........................................................................................................... 30
Figure 5-1: Current Loop Option Installed on the Motherboard .......................................................................... 39
Figure 5-2: Internal Pneumatic Flow – Zero/Span/Shutoff Valves OPT 50 & 51 ................................................ 42
Figure 5-3: Internal Pneumatic Flow – Zero/Span OPT 52 & 53......................................................................... 43
Figure 5-4: M360E Multidrop Card ...................................................................................................................... 44
Figure 5-5: M360E Ethernet Card ....................................................................................................................... 45
Figure 5-6: M360E Rear Panel with Ethernet Installed ....................................................................................... 45
Figure 5-2: Oxygen Sensor - Principle of Operation ........................................................................................... 46
Figure 5-3: M360E – Internal Pneumatics with O2 Sensor Option 65................................................................. 47
Figure 6-1: Front Panel Display........................................................................................................................... 51
Figure 6-3: Viewing M360E TEST Functions ...................................................................................................... 54
Figure 6-4: Default iDAS Channels Setup........................................................................................................... 63
Figure 6-5: APICOM user interface for configuring the iDAS.............................................................................. 75
Figure 6-6: iDAS Configuration Through a Terminal Emulation Program........................................................... 76
Figure 6-7: Analog Output Connector Pin Out .................................................................................................... 77
Figure 6-8: Back Panel connector Pin-Outs for COM1 & COM2 in RS-232 mode. ............................................ 87
Figure 6-9: CPU connector Pin-Outs for COM1 & COM2 in RS-232 mode........................................................ 88
Figure 6-10: CPU card Locations of RS-232/486 Switches, Connectors and Jumpers...................................... 89
Figure 6-11: Back Panel connector Pin-Outs for COM2 in RS-485 mode. ......................................................... 90
Figure 6-12: CPU connector Pin-Outs for COM2 in RS-485 mode....................................................................... 90
Figure 6-13: Location of JP2 on RS232-Multidrop PCA (option 62) .................................................................... 99
Figure 6-14: RS232-Multidrop PCA Host/Analyzer Interconnect Diagram.......................................................... 100
Figure 6-15: Setup for Calibrating Analog Voltage Outputs............................................................................... 113
Figure 6-16: Setup for Calibrating Current Outputs............................................................................................ 114
Figure 6-17: Status Output Connector................................................................................................................. 123
Figure 6-18: Control Inputs.................................................................................................................................. 125
viii
05232 Rev B3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
M360E Documentation
Figure 6-19: APICOM Remote Control Program Interface.................................................................................. 131
Figure 7-1: Pneumatic Connections–Basic Configuration–Using Bottled Span Gas........................................ 138
Figure 7-2: Pneumatic Connections–Basic Configuration–Using Gas Dilution Calibrator................................ 139
Figure 7-3: Pneumatic Connections–M360E with Zero/Span/Shutoff Valves (OPT 50)................................... 142
Figure 7-5: Pneumatic Connections–M360E with Zero/Span Valves (OPT 52) ............................................... 143
Figure 7-6: Pneumatic Connections–M360E with Zero/Span Valves with External Zero air Scrubber (OPT 53)143
Figure 9-1: Sample Particulate Filter Assembly ................................................................................................ 159
Figure 10-1: Measurement Fundamentals .......................................................................................................... 164
Figure 10-2: GFC Wheel ..................................................................................................................................... 164
Figure 10-3: Measurement Fundamentals with GFC Wheel............................................................................... 165
Figure 10-4: Affect of CO2 in the Sample on CO2 MEAS & CO2 REF ............................................................... 166
Figure 10-5: Effects of Interfering Gas on CO2 MEAS & CO2 REF ................................................................... 166
Figure 10-6: Chopped IR Signal.......................................................................................................................... 167
Figure 10-7: Internal Pneumatic Flow – Basic Configuration.............................................................................. 168
Figure 10-8: Flow Control Assembly & Critical Flow Orifice................................................................................ 169
Figure 10-9: 360E Electronic Block Diagram ...................................................................................................... 172
Figure 11-1: Viewing and Clearing Warning Messages ...................................................................................... 192
Figure 11-2: Example of Signal I/O Function ...................................................................................................... 196
Figure 11-3: CPU Status Indicator....................................................................................................................... 197
Figure 11-4: Sync/Demod Board Status LED Locations ..................................................................................... 198
Figure 11-5: Relay Board Status LEDs ............................................................................................................... 198
Figure 11-7: M360E – Basic Internal Gas Flow................................................................................................... 200
Figure 11-6: Internal Pneumatic Flow OPT 50– Zero/Span/Shutoff Valves........................................................ 201
Figure 11-8: Internal Pneumatic Flow – Zero/Span OPT 52 & 53....................................................................... 201
Figure 11.9: M360E – Internal Pneumatics with O2 Sensor Option 65 ............................................................... 202
Figure 11-10: Critical Flow Restrictor Assembly Disassembly.............................................................................. 218
Figure 12-1: Triboelectric Charging....................................................................................................................... 221
LIST OF TABLES
Table 2-1: Model 360E Basic Unit Specifications.................................................................................................. 3
Table 3-1: M360E Analog Output Pin Outs......................................................................................................... 13
Table 3-2: M360E Status Output Pin Outs.......................................................................................................... 14
Table 3-3: M360E Control Input Pin Outs ........................................................................................................... 15
Table 3-4: Model 360E Rear Panel Pneumatic Connections.............................................................................. 17
Table 3-5: Front Panel Display During System Warm-Up................................................................................... 24
Table 3-6: Possible Warning Messages at Start-Up ........................................................................................... 25
Table 5-1: Zero/Span Valve Operating States for Options 50 & 51 .................................................................... 41
Table 5-2: Zero/Span Valve Operating States for Options 52 & 53 .................................................................... 43
Table 6-1: Analyzer Operating modes................................................................................................................. 52
Table 6-2: Test Functions Defined ...................................................................................................................... 53
05232 Rev B3
ix
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M360E Documentation
Model 360E Instruction Manual
Table 6-3: List of Warning Messages.................................................................................................................. 55
Table 6-4: Primary Setup Mode Features and Functions.................................................................................... 57
Table 6-5: Secondary Setup Mode Features and Functions............................................................................... 57
Table 6-6: Front Panel LED Status Indicators for iDAS ........................................................................................ 59
Table 6-7: iDAS Data Channel Properties........................................................................................................... 60
Table 6-8: iDAS Data Parameter Functions........................................................................................................ 61
Table 6-9: Password Levels ................................................................................................................................ 84
Table 6-10: COMM Port Communication modes......................................................................................... 91
Table 6-11: Ethernet Status Indicators.................................................................................................................. 93
Table 6-12: LAN/Internet Configuration Properties ............................................................................................... 94
Table 6-13: Internet Configuration Keypad Functions........................................................................................... 98
Table 6-14: Variable Names (VARS) Revision B.3 ............................................................................................. 103
Table 6-15: M360E Diagnostic (DIAG) Functions ............................................................................................... 105
Table 6-16: DIAG - Analog I/O Functions............................................................................................................ 108
Table 6-17: Analog Output Voltage Ranges....................................................................................................... 108
Table 6-18: Analog Output Current Loop Range................................................................................................. 109
Table 6-19: Analog Output Pin Assignments ...................................................................................................... 109
Table 6-20: Voltage Tolerances for Analog Output Calibration........................................................................... 112
Table 6-21: Current Loop Output Calibration with Resistor................................................................................. 115
Table 6-22: Test Parameters Available for Analog Output A4 ............................................................................ 121
Table 6-23: CO2 Concentration Alarm Default Settings ...................................................................................... 122
Table 6-24: Status Output Pin Assignments ....................................................................................................... 124
Table 6-25: Control Input Pin Assignments......................................................................................................... 125
Table 6-26: Terminal Mode Software Commands............................................................................................... 126
Table 6-27: Command Types.............................................................................................................................. 127
Table 6-28: Serial Interface Documents.............................................................................................................. 131
Table 6-29: RS-232 Communication Parameters for Hessen Protocol............................................................... 132
Table 6-30: Teledyne Instruments Hessen Protocol Response Modes.............................................................. 134
Table 6-31: Default Hessen Status Bit Assignments........................................................................................... 135
Table 7-1: AUTOCAL Modes............................................................................................................................. 148
Table 7-2: AutoCal ATTRIBUTE Setup Parameters ......................................................................................... 148
Table 7-3: Calibration Data Quality Evaluation ................................................................................................. 151
Table 9-1: M360E Maintenance Schedule ........................................................................................................ 156
Table 9-2: M360E Test Function Record .......................................................................................................... 157
Table 9-3: Predictive uses for Test Functions................................................................................................... 158
Table 10-1: Sync/Demod Status LED Activity..................................................................................................... 177
Table 10-2: Relay Board Status LED’s................................................................................................................ 179
Table 10-3: Front Panel Status LED’s................................................................................................................. 185
Table 11-1: Warning Messages - Indicated Failures........................................................................................... 193
Table 11-2: Test Functions - Indicated Failures.................................................................................................. 195
Table 11-3: Sync/Demod Board Status Failure Indications................................................................................. 197
Table 11-4: I2C Status LED Failure Indications................................................................................................... 198
Table 11-5: Relay Board Status LED Failure Indications.................................................................................... 199
Table 11-6: DC Power Test Point and Wiring Color Codes ................................................................................ 209
Table 11-7: DC Power Supply Acceptable Levels............................................................................................... 210
Table 11-8: Relay Board Control Devices ........................................................................................................... 211
Table 11-9: Opto Pickup Board Nominal Output Frequencies............................................................................ 212
Table 11-10: Analog Output Test Function - Nominal Values Voltage Outputs.................................................... 214
User Notes
x
05232 Rev B3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
M360E Documentation
1. M360E DOCUMENTATION
Thank you for purchasing the Model 300E Gas Filter Correlation Carbon monoxide Analyzer!
The documentation (part number 04584) for this instrument is available in several different formats:
Printed format, or;
Electronic format on a CD-ROM.
The electronic manual is in Adobe® Systems Inc. “Portable Document Format”. The Adobe® Acrobat Reader®
software, which is necessary to view these files, can be downloaded for free from the internet at
The electronic version of the manual has many advantages:
Keyword and phrase search feature
Figures, tables and internet addresses are linked so that clicking on the item will display the associated
feature or open the website.
A list of chapters as well as thumbnails of each page is displayed to the left of the text.
Entries in the table of contents are linked to the corresponding locations in the manual.
Ability to print s (or all) of the manual
Additional documentation for the Model 360E CO2 Analyzer is available from Teledyne Instruments’ website at
APICOM software manual, part number 03945
Multi-drop manual, part number 01842
DAS Manual, part number 02837.
1.1. Using This Manual
This manual has the following data structures:
1.0 TABLE OF CONTENTS:
Outlines the contents of the manual in the order the information is presented. This is a good overview of the
topics covered in the manual. There is also a list of tables, a list of figures and a list of appendices. In the
electronic version of the manual, clicking on any of these table entries automatically views that section.
2.0 SPECIFICATIONS AND WARRANTY
This section contains a list of the analyzer’s performance specifications, a description of the conditions and
configuration under which EPA equivalency was approved and Teledyne Instruments Incorporated’s warranty
statement.
3.0 GETTING STARTED:
A concise set of instructions for setting up, installing and running your analyzer for the first time.
4.0 FAQ:
Answers to the most frequently asked questions about operating the analyzer.
05232 Rev B3
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M360E Documentation
Model 360E Instruction Manual
5.0 OPTIONAL HARDWARE & SOFTWARE
A description of optional equipment to add functionality to your analyzer.
6.0 OPERATION INSTRUCTIONS
This section includes step-by-step instructions for operating the analyzer and using its various features and
functions.
7.0 CALIBRATION PROCEDURES
General information and step by step instructions for calibrating your analyzer.
8.0 EPA PROTOCOL CALIBRATION
Because CO2 is not declared a criteria air pollutant by the US EPA, EPA equivalency is not required for this type
of analyzer. Therefore no special calibration methods are needed to satisfy EPA requirements.
9.0 INSTRUMENT MAINTENANCE
Description of certain preventative maintenance procedures that should be regularly performed on you
instrument to keep it in good operating condition. This section also includes information on using the iDAS to
record diagnostic functions useful in predicting possible component failures before they happen.
10.0 THEORY OF OPERATION
An in-depth look at the various principals by which your analyzer operates as well as a description of how the
various electronic, mechanical and pneumatic components of the instrument work and interact with each other.
A close reading of this section is invaluable for understanding the instrument’s operation.
11.0 TROUBLESHOOTING:
This section includes pointers and instructions for diagnosing problems with the instrument, such as excessive
noise or drift, as well as instructions on performing repairs of the instrument’s major subsystems.
APPENDICES:
For easier access and better updating, some information has been separated out of the manual and placed in a
series of appendices at the end of this manual. These include: software menu trees, warning messages,
definitions of iDAS & serial I/O variables, spare parts list, repair questionnaire, interconnect listing and drawings,
and electronic schematics.
NOTE
Throughout this manual, words printed in capital, bold letters, such as SETUP or ENTR
represent messages as they appear on the analyzer’s front panel display.
NOTE
The flowcharts in this manual contain typical representations of the analyzer’s display
during the various operations being described. These representations are not intended
to be exact and may differ slightly from the actual display of your instrument.
User Notes
2
05232 Rev B3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
Specifications, Approvals and Warranty
2. SPECIFICATIONS, APPROVALS AND WARRANTY
2.1. Specifications
Table 2-1: Model 360E Basic Unit Specifications
Min/Max Range
In 1ppb increments from 50ppb to 2 000ppm, dual ranges or auto ranging
(Physical Analog Output)
Measurement Units
Zero Noise
ppb, ppm, µg/m3, mg/m3, %(user selectable)
< 0.1 ppm (RMS)
Span Noise
< 1% of reading (RMS)
< 0.2 ppm1
<0.25 ppm1
<0.5 ppm1
1% of reading above 50 PPM1
Lower Detectable Limit1
Zero Drift (24 hours)
Zero Drift (7 days)
Span Drift (7 Days)
Linearity
1% of full scale
Precision
0.5% of reading
Temperature Coefficient
Voltage Coefficient
Lag Time
< 0.1% of Full Scale per oC
< 0.05% of Full Scale per V
10 sec
Rise/Fall Time
95% in <60 sec
Sample Flow Rate
800cm3/min. ±10%
O2 Sensor option adds 120 cm³/min to total flow though when installed;
5-40oC
Temperature Range
Humidity Range
0 - 95% RH, non-condensing
7" x 17" x 23.5" (178 mm x 432 mm x 597 mm)
38 lbs. (17 kg); add 1 lbs (0.5 kg) for IZS
Dimensions H x W x D
Weight, Analyzer
AC Power Rating
100 V, 50/60 Hz (3.25A);
115 V, 60 Hz (3.0 A);
220 – 240 V, 50/60 Hz (2.5 A)
Environmental
Installation category (over-voltage category) II; Pollution degree 2
Three (3) Outputs
Analog Outputs
Analog Output Ranges
0.1V, 1 V, 5 V, 10 V, 2-20 or 4-20 mA isolated current loop.
All Ranges with 5% Under/Over Range
Analog Output Resolution
Status Outputs
Control Inputs
1 part in 4096 of selected full-scale voltage
8 Status outputs - opto-isolated; including 2 alarm outputs
6 Control Inputs, 3 defined, 3 spare
Serial I/O
One (1) RS-232; One (1) RS-485
Baud Rate : 300 – 115200: Optional Ethernet Interface
Alarm outputs
Certifications
2 opto-isolated alarms outputs with user settable alarm limits
CE: EN61010-1:90 + A1:92 + A2:95, EN61326 - Class A
1 At constant temperature and voltage.
05232 Rev B3
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications, Approvals and Warranty
Model 360E Instruction Manual
2.2. CE Mark Compliance
Emissions Compliance
The Teledyne Instruments Model 360E Gas Filter Correlation CO2 Analyzer was tested and found to be fully
compliant with:
EN61326 (1997 w/A1: 98) Class A, FCC Part 15 Subpart B section 15.107 Class A, ICES-003 Class A (ANSI
C63.4 1992) & AS/NZS 3548 (w/A1 & A2; 97) Class A.
Tested on 11-29-2001 at CKC Laboratories, Inc., Report Number CE01-249.
Safety Compliance
The Teledyne Instruments Model 360E Gas Filter Correlation CO2 Analyzer was tested and found to be fully
compliant with:
IEC 61010-1:90 + A1:92 + A2:95,
Tested on 02-06-2002 at Nemko, Report Number 2002-012219.
2.3. Warranty
WARRANTY POLICY (02024D)
Prior to shipment, T-API equipment is thoroughly inspected and tested. Should equipment failure occur, T-API
assures its customers that prompt service and support will be available.
COVERAGE
After the warranty period and throughout the equipment lifetime, T-API stands ready to provide on-site or in-plant
service at reasonable rates similar to those of other manufacturers in the industry. All maintenance and the first
level of field troubleshooting is to be performed by the customer.
NON-API MANUFACTURED EQUIPMENT
Equipment provided but not manufactured by T-API is warranted and will be repaired to the extent and according
to the current terms and conditions of the respective equipment manufacturer’s warranty.
GENERAL
During the warranty period, T-API warrants each Product manufactured by T-API to be free from defects in
material and workmanship under normal use and service. Expendable parts are excluded.
If a Product fails to conform to its specifications within the warranty period, API shall correct such defect by, in
API's discretion, repairing or replacing such defective Product or refunding the purchase price of such Product.
The warranties set forth in this section shall be of no force or effect with respect to any Product: (i) that has been
altered or subjected to misuse, negligence or accident, or (ii) that has been used in any manner other than in
accordance with the instruction provided by T-API, or (iii) not properly maintained.
4
05232 Rev B3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
Specifications, Approvals and Warranty
THE WARRANTIES SET FORTH IN THIS SECTION AND THE REMEDIES THEREFORE ARE EXCLUSIVE
AND IN LIEU OF ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR
PURPOSE OR OTHER WARRANTY OF QUALITY, WHETHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED. THE REMEDIES
SET FORTH IN THIS SECTION ARE THE EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES FOR BREACH OF ANY WARRANTY
CONTAINED HEREIN. API SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF OR RELATED TO THIS AGREEMENT OF T-API'S PERFORMANCE
HEREUNDER, WHETHER FOR BREACH OF WARRANTY OR OTHERWISE
Terms and Conditions
All units or components returned to Teledyne Instruments Incorporated should be properly packed for handling
and returned freight prepaid to the nearest designated Service Center. After the repair, the equipment will be
returned, freight prepaid.
User Notes
05232 Rev B3
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
Getting Started
3. GETTING STARTED
3.1. Unpacking and Initial Set Up
CAUTION
To avoid personal injury, always use two persons to lift and carry the Model 360E.
1. Verify that there is no apparent external shipping damage. If damage has occurred, please advise the
shipper first, then Teledyne Instruments.
2. Included with your analyzer is a printed record of the final performance characterization performed on
your instrument at the factory. This record, titled Final Test and Validation Data Sheet (P/N 04596) is an
important quality assurance and calibration record for this instrument. It should be placed in the quality
records file for this instrument.
3. Carefully remove the top cover of the analyzer and check for internal shipping damage.
Remove the set-screw located in the top, center of the Front panel.
Remove the 2 screws fastening the top cover to the unit (one per side towards the rear).
Slide the cover backwards until it clears the analyzer’s front bezel.
Lift the cover straight up.
NOTE
Some versions of the 360E CO2 Analyzer may have a spring loaded fastener at the top
center of the rear panel and as many as eight screws (four per side) fastening the top
cover to the chassis.
NOTE
Printed circuit assemblies (PCAs) are sensitive to electro-static discharges too small to
be felt by the human nervous system. Failure to use ESD protection when working with
electronic assemblies will void the instrument warranty.
See Chapter 12 for more information on preventing ESD damage.
CAUTION
Never disconnect PCAs, wiring harnesses or electronic subassemblies while under
power.
4. Inspect the interior of the instrument to make sure all circuit boards and other components are in good
shape and properly seated.
05232 Rev B3
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting Started
Model 360E Instruction Manual
5. Check the connectors of the various internal wiring harnesses and pneumatic hoses to make sure they
are firmly and properly seated.
6. Verify that all of the optional hardware ordered with the unit has been installed. These are listed on the
paperwork accompanying the analyzer.
7. VENTILATION CLEARANCE: Whether the analyzer is set up on a bench or installed into an instrument
rack, be sure to leave sufficient ventilation clearance.
AREA
MINIMUM REQUIRED CLEARANCE
Back of the instrument
4 in.
1 in.
1 in.
Sides of the instrument
Above and below the instrument
manual for more information.
8
05232 Rev B3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
Getting Started
3.1.1. M360 Layout
Figure 3-1 shows the front panel layout of the analyzer. Figure 3-2 shows the rear panel configuration with
optional zero-air scrubber mounted to it and two optional fittings for the IZS option.
Figure 3-3 shows a top-down view of the analyzer. The shown configuration includes the Ethernet board, IZS
option, zero-air scrubber and an additional sample dryer. See Chapter 5 for optional equipment.
MODE FIELD
MESSAGE FIELD
CONCENTRATION FIELD
STATUS LED’s
LOCKING SCREW
FASTENER
FASTENER
SAMPLE
CAL
CO2 =
RANGE = 500.0
<TST TST> CAL
SAMPLE A
SETUP
FAULT
POWER
GAS FILTER CORRELATION CO2 ANALYZER- MODEL 360E
KEY DEFINITIONS
KEYBOARD
ON / OFF SWITCH
Figure 3-1: Front Panel Layout
Figure 3-2: Rear Panel Layout
05232 Rev B3
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting Started
Model 360E Instruction Manual
Front Panel
IR Source
On/Off Switch &
Circuit Breaker
Particulate Filter
GFC Wheel Housing
Purge Gas Inlet &
Flow Control Orifice
Optical Bench Gas
Inlet
Optional
Sample/Cal
Valve
GFC Motor
GFC Wheel Housing &
IR Source Heat Sync
Sample Gas
Critical Flow
Orifice
Optional
Zero/Span
Valve
Gas Flow
Sensor Assy
Flow Sensor
Optional
Shutoff
Valve
Purge Gas
Pressure Control
Assy
Pump Assy
Sample Gas
Pressure Sensor
Optical Bench Gas
Outlet
Sample Gas
Temperature
Sensor
Optional
Ethernet Card
CPU Card
Mother
Board
Power
Receptacle
Rear Panel
Fan
10
05232 Rev B3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
Getting Started
Sample Gas Outlet
fitting
Sample Gas Flow
Sensor
Sample Chamber
Sync/Demod PCA
Housing
Pressure Sensor(s)
Bench
Temperature
Thermistor
Shock Absorbing
Mounting Bracket
Opto-Pickup
PCA
Purge Gas
Pressure Regulator
IR Source
GFC Wheel
Heat Sync
GFC Wheel Motor
GFC Temperature
Sensor
Purge Gas
Inlet
GFC Heater
Figure 3-4: Optical Bench Layout
Figure 3-5: M360E Internal Gas Flow
05232 Rev B3
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting Started
Model 360E Instruction Manual
3.1.2. Electrical Connections
3.1.2.1. Power Connection
Attach the power cord to the analyzer and plug it into a power outlet capable of carrying at least 10 A current at
your AC voltage and that it is equipped with a functioning earth ground.
CAUTION
Check the voltage and frequency label on the rear panel of the instrument
(See Figure 3-2 for compatibility with the local power before plugging the
M360E into line power.
Do not plug in the power cord if the voltage or
frequency is incorrect.
CAUTION
Power connection must have functioning ground connection.
Do not defeat the ground wire on power plug.
Turn off analyzer power before disconnecting or
connecting electrical subassemblies.
Do not operate with cover off.
The M360E analyzer can be configured for both 100-130 V and 210-240 V at either 50 or 60 Hz. To avoid
damage to your analyzer, make sure that the AC power voltage matches the voltage indicated on the rear panel
serial number label and that the frequency is between 47 and 63 Hz.
12
05232 Rev B3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
Getting Started
3.1.2.2. Output Connections
The M360E is equipped with several analog output channels accessible through a connector on the back panel
of the instrument. The standard configuration for these outputs is mVDC. An optional current loop output is
available for each.
When the instrument is in its default configuration, channels A1 and A2 output a signal that is proportional to the
CO2 concentration of the sample gas. Either can be used for connecting the analog output signal to a chart
recorder or for interfacing with a data logger.
Output A3 is only used on the Model 306E if the optional O2 sensor is installed.
Channel A4 is special. It can be set by the user (see Section 6.13.9) to output any one of the parameters
accessible through the <TST TST> keys of the units sample display.
To access these signals attach a strip chart recorder and/or data-logger to the appropriate analog output
connections on the rear panel of the analyzer.
ANALOG
A1
A2
A3
A4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Pin-outs for the analog output connector at the rear panel of the instrument are:
Table 3-1: M360E Analog Output Pin Outs
PIN
1
ANALOG OUTPUT
A1
VDC SIGNAL
V Out
MADC SIGNAL
I Out +
2
Ground
V Out
I Out -
3
I Out +
A2
4
Ground
V Out
I Out -
7
I Out +
A3
(Only used if O2 sensor
is installed)
8
Ground
I Out -
5
6
V Out
I Out +
I Out -
A4
Ground
The default analog output voltage setting of the 360E CO2 Analyzer is 0 – 5 VDC with a range of 0 –
500 ppm.
TO change these settings, see Sections 6.13.4 and 6.8 respectively.
05232 Rev B3
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting Started
Model 360E Instruction Manual
3.1.2.3. Connecting the Status Outputs
If you wish utilize the analyzer’s status outputs to interface with a device that accepts logic-level digital inputs,
such as programmable logic controllers (PLC’s) they are accessed via a 12-pin connector on the analyzer’s rear
panel labeled STATUS.
STATUS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
+
NOTE
Most PLC’s have internal provisions for limiting the current the input will draw. When
connecting to a unit that does not have this feature, external resistors must be used to
limit the current through the individual transistor outputs to ≤50mA (120 Ω for 5V
supply).
The pin assignments for the status outputs can be found in the table below:
Table 3-2: M360E Status Output Pin Outs
STATUS
DEFINITION
OUTPUT #
CONDITION
1
2
SYSTEM OK
On if no faults are present.
On if CO2 concentration measurement is valid.
CONC VALID
If the CO2 concentration measurement is invalid, this bit is OFF.
On if unit is in high range of DUAL or AUTO range modes.
On whenever the instruments ZERO point is being calibrated.
On whenever the instruments SPAN point is being calibrated.
On whenever the instrument is in DIAGNOSTIC mode.
3
4
5
6
HIGH RANGE
ZERO CAL
SPAN CAL
DIAG MODE
On whenever the measured CO2 concentration is above the set point for
ALM1
7
8
ALARM1
ALARM2
On whenever the measured CO2 concentration is above the set point for
ALM2
D
+
EMITTER BUSS
DC POWER
The emitters of the transistors on pins 1-8 are bussed together.
+ 5 VDC
Digital Ground
The ground level from the analyzer’s internal DC power supplies.
14
05232 Rev B3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
Getting Started
3.1.2.4. Connecting the Control Inputs
If you wish to use the analyzer to remotely activate the zero and span calibration modes, several digital control
inputs are provided through a 10-pin connector labeled CONTROL IN on the analyzer’s rear panel.
There are two methods for energizing the control inputs. The internal +5V available from the pin labeled “+” is
the most convenient method. However, if full isolation is required, an external 5 VDC power supply should be
used.
CONTROL IN
CONTROL IN
A
B
C
D
E
F
U
+
A
B
C
D
E
F
U
+
Z
E
R
O
S
P
A
N
Z
E
R
O
S
P
A
N
5 VDC Power
Supply
+
-
External Power Connections
Local Power Connections
The pin assignments for the digital control inputs can be found in the table below:
Table 3-3: M360E Control Input Pin Outs
STATUS
DEFINITION
INPUT #
ON CONDITION
REMOTE ZERO
CAL
The Analyzer is placed in Zero Calibration mode. The mode field of
the display will read ZERO CAL R.
A
B
REMOTE
SPAN CAL
The Analyzer is placed in Span Calibration mode. The mode field of
the display will read SPAN CAL R.
SPARE
SPARE
C
D
E
F
SPARE
SPARE
Digital Ground
May be connected to the ground of the data logger/recorder.
Input pin for +5 VDC required to activate pins A – F. This can be from
an external source or from the “+” pin of the instruments STATUS
connector.
Pull-up supply for
inputs
U
Internal +5V
Supply
Internal source of +5V which can be used to actuate control inputs
when connected to the U pin.
+
05232 Rev B3
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting Started
Model 360E Instruction Manual
3.1.2.5. Connecting the Serial Ports
If you wish to utilize either of the analyzer’s two serial interface COMM ports, refer to Section 6.11 of this manual
for instructions on their configuration and usage.
3.1.2.6. Connecting to a LAN or the Internet
If your unit has a Teledyne Instruments Ethernet card (Option 63), plug one end into the 7’ CAT5 cable supplied
with the option into the appropriate place on the back of the analyzer (see Figure 5-5 in Section 5.5.3) and the
other end into any nearby Ethernet access port.
NOTE:
The M360E firmware supports dynamic IP addressing or DHCP.
If your network also supports DHCP, the analyzer will automatically configure its LAN
connection appropriately,
If your network does not support DHCP, see Section 6.11.6.3 for instructions on
manually configuring the LAN connection.
3.1.2.7. Connecting to a Multidrop Network
If your unit has a Teledyne Instruments RS-232 multidrop card (Option 62), see Section 6.11.7 for instructions
on setting it up.
3.1.3. Pneumatic Connections:
3.1.3.1. Basic Pneumatic Connections
CAUTION
In order to prevent dust from getting into the gas flow channels of your analyzer, it was
shipped with small plugs inserted into each of the pneumatic fittings on the back panel.
Make sure that all of these dust plugs are removed before attaching
exhaust and supply gas lines.
Figures 3-3 and 3-4 illustrate the most common configurations for gas supply and exhaust lines to the Model
360E Analyzer. Figure 3-5 illustrates the internal gas flow of the instrument in its basic configuration.
Please refer to Figure 3-2 for pneumatic connections at the rear panel and Table 3-4 for nomenclature.
NOTE
Sample and calibration gases should only come into contact with PTFE (Teflon), FEP,
glass, stainless steel or brass.
16
05232 Rev B3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
Table 3-4: Model 360E Rear Panel Pneumatic Connections
Getting Started
REAR PANEL LABEL
SAMPLE
FUNCTION
Connect a gas line from the source of sample gas here.
Calibration gasses are also inlet here on units without zero/span/shutoff valve
or IZS options installed.
EXHAUST
Connect an exhaust gas line of not more than 10 meters long here.
On units with zero/span/shutoff valve options installed, connect a gas line to the
source of calibrated span gas here.
PRESSURE SPAN
Span gas vent outlet for units with zero/span/shutoff valve options installed.
Connect an exhaust gas line of not more than 10 meters long here.
VENT SPAN
IZS
Internal zero air scrubber.
On units with zero/span/shutoff valve options installed but NO internal zero
air scrubber, attach a gas line to the source of zero air here.
This inlet supplies purge air to the GFC wheel housing (see Section 10.2.3)
Connect a source of dried air that has been scrubbed of CO2.
PURGE IN
Figure 3-6: Pneumatic Connections–Basic Configuration–Using Bottled Span Gas
05232 Rev B3
17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting Started
Model 360E Instruction Manual
Figure 3-7: Pneumatic Connections–Basic Configuration–Using Gas Dilution Calibrator
1. Attach a sample inlet line to the sample inlet port. The SAMPLE input line should not be more than 2
meters long.
NOTE
Ideally, the pressure of the sample gas should be at ambient pressure (0 psig).
Maximum pressure of sample gas should not exceed 1.5 in-Hg over ambient.
In applications where the sample gas is received from a pressurized manifold, a vent
must be placed as shown to equalize the sample gas with ambient atmospheric
pressure before it enters the analyzer.
This vent line must be:
At least 0.2m long
No more than 2m long and vented outside the shelter or immediate area
surrounding the instrument.
2. Attach sources of zero air and span gas (see Figures 3-3 through 3-8 inclusive).
Span Gas is a gas specifically mixed to match the chemical composition of the type of gas being
measured at near full scale of the desired measurement range.
In the case of CO2 measurements made with the Teledyne Instruments Model 360E Analyzer it is
recommended that you use a gas calibrated to have a CO2 content equaling 80% of the range of
compositions being measured.
18
05232 Rev B3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
Getting Started
EXAMPLE: If the application is to measure between 0 ppm and 500 ppm, an appropriate Span Gas
would be 400 ppm. If the application is to measure between 0 ppm and 100 ppm, an appropriate Span
Gas would be 80 ppm.
Span Gas can be purchased in pressurized canisters or created using Dynamic Dilution Calibrator
such as the Teledyne Instruments Model 700 and a source of dried air scrubbed of CO2 such as a
Teledyne Instruments Model 701 Zero Air Generator in combination with a canister of indicating
soda lime (such as Teledyne Instruments P/N 037600000).
Zero Air is similar in chemical composition to the Earth’s atmosphere but scrubbed of all
components that might affect the analyzer’s readings.
In the case of CO2 measurements this means less than 0.1 ppm of CO2 and Water Vapor (when
dew point <-15˚C). Zero Air can be purchased in pressurized canisters or created using a Teledyne
Instruments Model 701 Zero Air Generator in combination with a canister of indicating soda lime
(such as Teledyne Instruments P/N 037600000).
3. Attach an exhaust line to the exhaust outlet port.
The exhaust from the pump and vent lines should be vented to atmospheric pressure using
maximum of 10 meters of ¼” PTEF tubing.
CAUTION
Venting should be outside the shelter or immediate area surrounding the instrument.
4. Attach a source of dried air scrubbed of CO2 to the purge inlet port.
NOTE
The minimum gas pressure of the source of purge air should be 7.5 psig.
If the source of the purge air is shared by a Teledyne Instruments M700 (as shown in
figure 3-7) the minimum gas pressure should be 25 psig and should not exceed 35 psig.
5. Once the appropriate pneumatic connections have been made, check all pneumatic fittings for leaks
using a procedure similar to that defined in Section 9.3.3.
05232 Rev B3
19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting Started
Model 360E Instruction Manual
3.1.3.2. Connections with Internal Valve Options Installed
Figures 3-8 through 3-11 show the proper pneumatic connections for M360E’s with various optional internal
valve sets installed.
Figure 3-8: Pneumatic Connections–M360E with Zero/Span/Shutoff Valves (OPT 50)
VENT here if input
is pressurized
Source of
SAMPLE GAS
Removed during
calibration
SAMPLE
EXHAUST
VENT
VENT SPAN
PRESSURE SPAN
IZS
MODEL
360E
Calibrated
CO2 Gas
at span gas
concentration
External
Zero Air
Scrubber
PURGE LINE
MODEL 701
Zero Gas
Indicating
Soda Lime
Generator
Figure 3-9: Pneumatic Connections–M360E with Zero/Span/Shutoff Valves and External Zero Air
Scrubber (OPT 51)
20
05232 Rev B3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
Getting Started
Figure 3-10: Pneumatic Connections–M360E with Zero/Span Valves (OPT 52)
VENT here if input
is pressurized
Source of
SAMPLE GAS
Removed during
calibration
Calibrated
CO2 Gas
at span gas
Model 700 gas
Dilution
concentration
Calibrator
SAMPLE
EXHAUST
VENT SPAN
PRESSURE SPAN
IZS
MODEL
X00E
External
Zero Air
Scrubber
PURGE LINE
MODEL 701
Zero Gas
Generator
Indicating
Soda Lime
Figure 3-11: Pneumatic Connections–M360E with Zero/Span Valves with External Zero air Scrubber
(OPT 53)
05232 Rev B3
21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting Started
Model 360E Instruction Manual
3.1.3.3. Pneumatic Connections to M360E in Multipoint Calibration Applications
Some applications may require multipoint calibration checks where span gas of several different concentrations
is needed. We recommend using high-concentration, certified, calibration gas supplied to the analyzer through a
Gas Dilution Calibrator such as a Teledyne Instruments Model 700. This type of calibrator precisely mixes Span
Gas and Zero Air to produce any concentration level between 0 ppm and the concentration of the calibrated gas.
Figure 3-12 depicts the pneumatic set up in this sort of application of a Model 360E CO2 Analyzer with
zero/span/shutoff valve option 50 installed (a common configuration for this type of application).
VENT here if input
is pressurized
Source of
SAMPLE GAS
Removed during
calibration
Calibrated
CO2 Gas
at span gas
Model 700 gas
Dilution
concentration
Calibrator
SAMPLE
EXHAUST
Gas Pressure
VENT SPAN
PRESSURE SPAN
IZS
MODEL
X00E
Should be
Regulated at
30 – 35 psig
External
Zero Air
Scrubber
PURGE LINE
MODEL 701
Zero Gas
Generator
Indicating
Soda Lime
Figure 3-12: Example of Pneumatic Set up for Multipoint Calibration of M360
3.1.4. Setting the internal Purge Air Pressure.
In order to maintain proper purge air flow though the GFC wheel hosing a manually adjustable pressure
regulator is provided (see Figures 3-3 and 3-5). This regulator includes two output ports. One is used to supply
purge air to the GFC wheel. The other may be used to attach a pressure gauge.
To adjust the internal purge air pressure of the M360E:
1. Turn off the instrument.
2. Remove the source of zero air attached to the purge line inlet port at the back of the analyzer.
3. Remove the analyzer’s the top cover.
4. Remove the cap from the second, unused, output port on the pressure regulator.
5. Attach a pressure gauge capable of measuring in the 5-10 psig range with 0.5 psig resolution to the port.
6. Turn the instrument on.
7. Make sure the zero air supply to the analyzer’s purge line inlet is supplying gas at a stable pressure
above 7.5 psig.
8. Adjust the M360E’s pressure regulator until the attached gauge reads 7.5 psig.
9. Turn off the instrument.
10. Remove the source of zero air attached to the purge line inlet port at the back of the analyzer.
11. Remove the pressure gauge and reattach the end cap removed in step 4 above.
12. Replace the analyzer’s top cover.
22
05232 Rev B3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
Getting Started
3.2. Initial Operation
If you are unfamiliar with the M360E theory of operation, we recommend that you read
Chapter 10. For information on navigating the analyzer’s software menus, see the menu trees described in
Appendix A.1.
NOTE
The analyzer’s cover must be installed to ensure that the temperatures of the GFC
wheel and absorption cell assemblies are properly controlled.
3.2.1. Startup
After electrical and pneumatic connections are made, turn on the instrument. The pump, exhaust fan and PMT
cooler fan should start immediately. The display should immediately display a single, horizontal dash in the
upper left corner of the display. This will last approximately 30 seconds while the CPU loads the operating
system.
Once the CPU has completed this activity it will begin loading the analyzer firmware and configuration data.
During this process, string of messages will appear on the analyzer’s front panel display:
System waits 3 seconds
then automatically begins its
initialization routine.
No action required.
SELECT START OR REMOTE
START
:
3
.
CHECKING FLASH STATUS
:
1
System is checking the format of
the instrument’s flash memory
chip.
If at this point,
STARTING INSTRUMENT CODE
STARTING INSTRUMENT W/FLASH
:
1
**FLASH FORMAT INVALID**
appears, contact T–API customer service
The instrument is loading
configuration and calibration
data from the flash chip
:
1
The instrument is loading
the analyzer firmware.
M360E CO2 ANALYZER
BOOT PROGRESS [XXXXX 50%_ _ _ _ _]
The revision level of the
firmware installed in your
analyzer is briefly displayed
SOFTWARE REVISION D.6
BOOT PROGRESS [XXXXXXXX 80% _ _]
SAMPLE
TEST
SYSTEM RESET
CO2=X.XXX
Firmware fully
booted
CAL
CLR SETUP
Press CLR to clear initial
warning messages.
(see Section 3.2.3)
The analyzer should automatically switch to SAMPLE mode after completing the boot-up sequence and start
monitoring CO2 gas.
05232 Rev B3
23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting Started
Model 360E Instruction Manual
3.2.2. Warm Up
The M360E requires about 30 minutes warm-up time before reliable CO2 measurements can be taken. During
that time, various portions of the instrument’s front panel will behave as follows. See Figure 3-1 for locations.
Table 3-5: Front Panel Display During System Warm-Up
Name
Color
Behavior
Significance
Concentration
Field
N/A
Displays current,
compensated CO2
Concentration
N/A
Mode Field
N/A
Displays blinking
“SAMPLE”
Instrument is in sample mode but is still in the process
of warming up.
STATUS LED’s
Sample
Green
On
Unit is operating in sample mode; front panel display
is being updated.
Flashes On/Off when adaptive filter is active
The instrument’s calibration is not enabled.
Cal
Yellow
Red
Off
Fault
Blinking
The analyzer is warming up and hence out of specification
for a fault-free reading. Various warning messages will
appear.
3.2.3. Warning Messages
Because internal temperatures and other conditions may be outside be specified limits during the analyzer’s
warm-up period, the software will suppress most warning conditions for 30 minutes after power up. If warning
messages persist after the 30 minutes warm up period is over, investigate their cause using the troubleshooting
guidelines in Chapter 11 of this manual.
To view and clear warning messages, press:
SAMPLE
HVPS WARNING
CAL MSG
CO2 = 0.00
TEST deactivates warning
TEST
CLR SETUP
messages
MSG activates warning
SAMPLE
RANGE=500.000 PPM
MSG
CO2 = 0.00
messages.
<TST TST> keys replaced with
< TST TST > CAL
CLR SETUP
TEST key
SAMPLE
HVPS WARNING
CO2 = 0.00
Press CLR to clear the current
message.
TEST
CAL
MSG
CLR SETUP
NOTE:
If more than one warning is active, the
next message will take its place
If the warning message persists
after several attempts to clear it,
the message may indicate a
real problem and not an artifact
of the warm-up period
Once the last warning has been
cleared, the analyzer returns to
SAMPLE mode
Make sure warning messages are
not due to real problems.
Table 3-6 lists brief descriptions of the warning messages that may occur during start up.
24
05232 Rev B3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
Table 3-6: Possible Warning Messages at Start-Up
Getting Started
MESSAGE
MEANING
The instrument’s A/D circuitry or one of its analog outputs is not calibrated.
The Temperature of the optical bench is outside the specified limits.
Remote span calibration failed while the dynamic span feature was set to turned on
Remote zero calibration failed while the dynamic zero feature was set to turned on
Configuration was reset to factory defaults or was erased.
Concentration alarm 1 is enabled and the measured CO2 level is ≥ the set point.
Concentration alarm 2 is enabled and the measured CO2 level is ≥ the set point.
Configuration storage was reset to factory configuration or erased.
iDAS data storage was erased.
ANALOG CAL WARNING
BENCH TEMP WARNING
BOX TEMP WARNING
CANNOT DYN SPAN
CANNOT DYN ZERO
CONC ALRM1 WARNING
CONC ALRM2 WARNING
CONFIG INITIALIZED
DATA INITIALIZED
O2 sensor cell temperature outside of warning limits.
O2 CELL TEMP WARN
PHOTO TEMP WARNING
REAR BOARD NOT DET
RELAY BOARD WARN
SAMPLE FLOW WARN
SAMPLE PRESS WARN
SAMPLE TEMP WARN
SOURCE WARNING
The temperature of the IR photometer is outside the specified limits.
The CPU is unable to communicate with the motherboard.
The firmware is unable to communicate with the relay board.
The flow rate of the sample gas is outside the specified limits.
Sample gas pressure outside of operational parameters.
The temperature of the sample gas is outside the specified limits.
The IR source may be faulty.
The computer was rebooted.
SYSTEM RESET
The Gas Filter Correlation wheel temperature is outside the specified limits.
WHEEL TEMP WARNING
05232 Rev B3
25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting Started
Model 360E Instruction Manual
3.2.4. Functional Check
1. After the analyzer’s components has warmed up for at least 30 minutes, verify that the software properly
supports any hardware options that were installed.
2. Check to make sure that the analyzer is functioning within allowable operating parameters. Appendix C
includes a list of test functions viewable from the analyzer’s front panel as well as their expected values.
These functions are also useful tools for diagnosing performance problems with your analyzer
(Section11.1.2). The enclosed Final Test and Validation Data sheet (part number 04307) lists these
values before the instrument left the factory.
To view the current values of these parameters press the following key sequence on the analyzer’s front
panel. Remember until the unit has completed its warm up these parameters may not have stabilized.
SAMPLE
RANGE = 500.000 PPM
CO2 = XXX.X
SETUP
< TST TST > CAL
RANGE
RANGE11
RANGE21
02 RANGE2
STABIL
Toggle <TST TST> keys to
scroll through list of functions
MEAS
REF
MR RATIO
PRES
Refer to
Table 6-2 for
definitions of
these test
SAMP FL
SAMP TEMP
BENCH TEMP
WHEEL TEMP
BOX TEMP
PHT DRIVE
SLOPE
functions.
1 Only appears instrument is set
for DUAL or AUTO reporting
range modes.
OFFSET
TEST
TIME
2 Only appears if 02 Sensor
Option is installed.
3. If your analyzer has an Ethernet card (Option 63) installed and your network is running a dynamic host
configuration protocol (DHCP) software package, the Ethernet option will automatically configure its
interface with your LAN. However, it is a good idea to check these settings to make sure that the DHCP
has successfully downloaded the appropriate network settings from your network server (See Section
6.11.6.2).
If your network is not running DHCP, you will have to configure the analyzer’s interface manually (See
Section 6.11.6.3).
26
05232 Rev B3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
Getting Started
3.3. Initial Calibration Procedure
The next task is to calibrate the analyzer.
To perform the following calibration you must have sources for zero air and span gas available for input into the
sample port on the back of the analyzer. See Section 3.1.3 for instructions for connecting these gas sources.
While it is possible to perform this procedure with any range setting we recommend that you perform this initial
checkout using the 500 ppm range.
NOTE
The following procedure assumes that the instrument does not have any of the available
Zero/Span Valve Options installed.
See Section 7.4 for instructions for calibrating instruments possessing Z/S valve options.
1. Set the Analog Output Range of the M360E
SAMPLE
RANGE = 500.000 PPM
CO2 =X.XXX
< TST TST > CAL
SETUP
SETUP X.X
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE
EXIT
EXIT
SETUP X.X
RANGE CONTROL MENU
MODE SET UNIT
Press this button to select the
concentration units of measure:
Press this button to set
the analyzer for SNGL
DUAL or AUTO ranges
PPB, PPM, UGM, MGM
SETUP X.X
RANGE: 500.000 CONC
0
0
5
0
0
.0
ENTR EXIT
EXIT ignores the new setting and
returns to the RANGE CONTROL
MENU.
To change the value of the
reporting range span, enter the
number by pressing the key under
each digit until the expected value
appears.
ENTR accepts the new setting and
SETUP X.X
RANGE: 500.000 Conc
.0
returns to the
RANGE CONTROL MENU.
0
0
0
5
0
ENTR EXIT
05232 Rev B3
27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting Started
Model 360E Instruction Manual
2. Set the expected CO2 span gas concentration
SAMPLE*
RANGE = 500.000 PPM
CO2 =X.XXX
SETUP
< TST TST > CAL
This sequence causes the
analyzer to prompt for the
expected CO2 span
concentration.
M-P CAL
RANGE = 500.000 PPM
CO2 =X.XXX
EXIT
< TST TST > ZERO
CONC
The CO2 span
concentration values
automatically default to
400.0 Conc.
EXIT ignores the new setting
and returns to the previous
display.
M-P CAL
CO2 SPAN CONC: 400.000 Conc
To change this value to
the actual concentration of
the span gas, enter the
number by pressing the
key under each digit until
the expected value
ENTR accepts the new setting
0
0
0
4
5
.0
ENTR EXIT
and returns to the
previous display..
appears.
NOTE
For this Initial Calibration it is important to independently verify the precise CO2
Concentration Value of the SPAN gas.
If the source of the Span Gas is from a Calibrated Bottle, use the exact concentration
value printed on the bottle.
28
05232 Rev B3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
Getting Started
3. Perform the Zero/Span Calibration Procedure
SAMPLE*
RANGE = 500.000 PPM
CO2 =XXX.X
SETUP
Set the Display to show the
STABIL test function.
This function calculates the
stability of the COx
< TST TST > CAL
measurement
SAMPLE
STABIL=XXX.X PPM
CO2 =XXX.X
SETUP
< TST TST > CAL
ACTION:
Allow zero gas to enter the sample port at the
rear of the instrument.
Wait until STABIL
falls below 1.0 ppm.
This may take several
minutes.
M-P CAL
STABIL=XXX.X PPM
CO2 =XXX.X
< TST TST > CAL
SETUP
M-P CAL
STABIL=XXX.X PPM
CONC
CO2 =XXX.X
EXIT
< TST TST > ZERO
Press ENTR to changes the
OFFSET & SLOPE values for the
CO2 measurements.
M-P CAL
STABIL=XXX.X PPM
CO2 =XXX.X
< TST TST > ENTR
CONC
EXIT
Press EXIT to leave the calibration
unchanged and return to the
previous menu.
ACTION:
Allow span gas to enter the sample port at the
rear of the instrument.
The value of
STABIL may jump
significantly.
Wait until it falls back
below 1.0 ppm
The SPAN key now
appears during the
transition from zero to
span.
This may take several
minutes.
M-P CAL
STABIL=XXX.X PPM
CO2 =XXX.X
EXIT
< TST TST >
M-P CAL
SPAN CONC
You may see both keys.
If either the ZERO or
SPAN buttons fail to
appear see Section 11
for troubleshooting tips.
Press ENTR to change the
OFFSET & SLOPE values for the
CO2 measurements.
RANGE = 500.000 PPM CO2 =XXX.X
EXIT
Press EXIT to leave the calibration
unchanged and return to the
previous menu.
< TST TST > ENTR SPAN CONC
M-P CAL
RANGE = 500.000 PPM CO2 =XXX.X
CONC EXIT
EXIT returns to the main
SAMPLE display
< TST TST > ENTR
05232 Rev B3
29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting Started
Model 360E Instruction Manual
3.3.1. Initial O2 Sensor Calibration Procedure
If your instrument has an O2 sensor option installed that should be calibrated as well.
3.3.1.1. O2 Calibration Setup
The pneumatic connections for calibrating are as follows:
Figure 3-13: O2 Sensor Calibration Set Up
O2 SENSOR ZERO GAS: Teledyne Instruments’ recommends using pure N2 when calibration the zero point of
your O2 sensor option.
O2 SENSOR SPAN GAS: Teledyne Instruments’ recommends using 21% O2 in N2 when calibration the span
point of your O2 sensor option.
3.3.1.2. O2 Calibration Method
STEP 1 – SET O2 SPAN GAS CONCENTRATION :
Set the expected O2 span gas concentration.
This should be equal to the percent concentration of the O2 span gas of the selected reporting range (default
factory setting = 20.8%; the approximate O2 content of ambient air).
SAMPLE
RANGE = 500.000 PPM
CAL
CO2 =XXX.X
< TST TST >
SETUP
SAMPLE
GAS TO CAL:CO2
GAS TO CAL:O2
CO2 O2
ENTR EXIT
M-P CAL
A1:NXCNC1 =100PPM
NOX=X.XXX
EXIT
<TST TST> ZERO SPAN CONC
SAMPLE
NOX O2
ENTR EXIT
M-P CAL
0
O2 SPAN CONC:20.8%
.8
EXIT ignores the new
setting and returns to
the previous display.
2
0
0
ENTR EXIT
ENTR accepts the new
setting and returns to
the previous menu.
The OX span concentration value automatically defaults to
20.8 %.
If this is not the the concentration of the span gas being
used, toggle these buttons to set the correct concentration
of the O2 calibration gases.
30
05232 Rev B3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
Getting Started
STEP 2 – ACTIVATE O2 SENSOR STABILITY FUNCTION
To change the stability test function from NOx concentration to the O2 sensor output, press:
SAMPLE
RANGE = 500.000 PPM
CO2 =XXX.X
SETUP X.X
0) DAS_HOLD_OFF=15.0 Minutes
< TST TST >
CAL
SETUP
<PREV NEXT> JUMP
EDIT PRNT EXIT
SETUP X.X
PRIMARY SETUP MENU
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE
EXIT
EXIT
Continue pressing NEXT until ...
SETUP X.X
SECONDARY SETUP MENU
SETUP X.X
2) STABIL_GAS=CO2
COMM VARS DIAG ALRM
<PREV NEXT> JUMP
EDIT PRNT EXIT
SETUP X.X
ENTER PASSWORD:818
SETUP X.X
STABIL_GAS:CO2
8
1
8
ENTR EXIT
CO
CO2 O2
ENTR EXIT
SETUP X.X
STABIL_GAS:O2
CO
CO2 O2 ENTR EXIT
Press EXIT 3
times to return
to SAMPLE
menu
NOTE
Use the same procedure to reset the STB test function to CO2 when the O2 calibration
procedure is complete.
05232 Rev B3
31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting Started
Model 360E Instruction Manual
STEP 4 – O2 Zero/Span Calibration:
To perform the zero/span calibration procedure:
32
05232 Rev B3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
Getting Started
The Model 360E Analyzer is now ready for operation
NOTE
Once you have completed the above set-up procedures, please fill out the Quality
Questionnaire that was shipped with your unit and return it to Teledyne Instruments.
This information is vital to our efforts in continuously improving our service and our
products.
THANK YOU.
User Notes
05232 Rev B3
33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
Frequently Asked Questions
4. FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
4.1. FAQ’s
The following is a list from the Teledyne Instruments’ Customer Service Department of the most commonly
asked questions relating to the Model CO2 Analyzer.
Q: How do I get the instrument to zero / Why is the zero key not displayed?
A: See Section 11.3.4 Inability to zero.
Q: How do I get the instrument to span / Why is the span key not displayed?
A: See Section 11.3.3 Inability to span.
Q: Why does the ENTR key sometimes disappear on the Front Panel Display?
A: During certain types of adjustments or configuration operations, the ENTR key will disappear if you select
a setting that is nonsensical (such as trying to set the 24-hour clock to 25:00:00) or out of the allowable range
for that parameter (such as selecting an iDAS Holdoff period of more than 20 minutes).
Once you adjust the setting in question to an allowable value, the ENTR key will re-appear.
Q: Is there an optional midpoint calibration?
A: There is an optional mid point linearity adjustment; however, midpoint adjustment is applicable only to
applications where CO2 measurements are expected above 100 ppm. Call Teledyne Instruments’ Service
Department for more information on this topic.
Q: How do I make the display and data logger analog input agree?
A: This most commonly occurs when an independent metering device is used besides the data
logger/recorded to determine gas concentration levels while calibrating the analyzer. These disagreements
result from the analyzer, the metering device and the data logger having slightly different ground levels.
Both the electronic scale and offset of the analog outputs can be adjusted (see Section 6.13.4.3). Alternately,
use the data logger itself as the metering device during calibrations procedures.
Q: How do I perform a leak check?
A: See Section 9.3.3.
Q: How do I measure the sample flow?
A: Sample flow is measured by attaching a calibrated rotameter, wet test meter, or other flow-measuring
device to the sample inlet port when the instrument is operating. The sample flow should be 800 cm3/min
10%. See Section 9.3.4.
Q: How long does the IR source last?
A: Typical lifetime is about 2-3 years.
Q: Where is the sintered filter/sample flow control orifice?
05232 Rev B3
35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Frequently Asked Questions
Model 360E Instruction Manual
A: These components are located inside the flow control assembly that is attached to the inlet side of the
sample pump, see Figure 3-3. See Section 11.6.1 for instructions on disassembly and replacement.
Q: How do I set up a SEQUENCE to run a nightly calibration check?
A: The setup of this option is located in Section 7.6.
Q: How do I set the analog output signal range and offset?
A: Instructions for this can be found in Section 6.13.4 which describes analog I/O configuration.
Q: What is the averaging time for an M360E?
A: The default averaging time, optimized for ambient pollution monitoring, is 150 seconds for stable
concentrations and 10 seconds for rapidly changing concentrations; See Section10.5.1 for more information.
However, it is adjustable over a range of 0.5 second to 200 seconds (please contact customer service for
more information).
4.2. Glossary
APICOM – Name of a remote control program offered by Teledyne-API to its customers
ASSY - acronym for Assembly
cm3 – metric abbreviation for cubic centimeter. Same as the obsolete abbreviation “cc”.
Chemical formulas used in this document:
CO2 – carbon dioxide
H2O – water vapor
O2 - molecular oxygen
O3 - ozone
DAS - acronym for data acquisition system, the old acronym of iDAS.
DIAG - acronym for diagnostics, the diagnostic settings of the analyzer
DHCP: acronym for dynamic host configuration protocol. A protocol used by LAN or Internet servers to
automatically set up the interface protocols between themselves and any other addressable device connected to
the network.
DOC - Disk On Chip, the analyzer’s central storage area for analyzer firmware, configuration settings and data.
This is a solid state device without mechanically moving parts that acts as a computer hard disk drive under
DOS with disk label “C”. DOC chips come with 8 Mb in the E-series analyzer standard configuration but are
available in larger sizes.
DOS - Disk Operating System. The E-series analyzers uses DR DOS
EEPROM - also referred to as a FLASH chip.
FLASH - flash memory is non-volatile, solid-state memory.
GFC – Acronym for Gas Filter Correlation.
I2C bus - a clocked, bi-directional, serial bus for communication between individual analyzer components
36
05232 Rev B3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
Frequently Asked Questions
IC – Acronym for Integrated Circuit, a modern, semi-conductor circuit that can contain many basic components
such as resistors, transistors, capacitors etc in a miniaturized package used in electronic assemblies.
iDAS - acronym for internal data acquisition system
IP – acronym for internet protocol
LAN - acronym for local area network
LED - acronym for light emitting diode
PCA - acronym for printed circuit assembly, the PCB with electronic components, ready to use.
PCB - acronym for printed circuit board, the bare board without electronic components
PLC – Acronym for programmable logic controller, a device that is used to control instruments based on a logic
level signal coming from the analyzer
PFA – Acronym for Per-Fluoro-Alkoxy, an inert polymer. One of the polymers that du Pont markets as Teflon®
(along with FEP and PTFE).
PTFE – Acronym for Poly-Tetra-Fluoro-Ethylene, a very inert polymer material used to handle gases that may
react on other surfaces. One of the polymers that du Pont markets as Teflon® (along with FEP and PFA).
PVC – Acronym for Poly Vinyl Chloride, a polymer used for downstream tubing in the M360E.
RS-232 - an electronic communications type of a serial communications port
RS-485 - an electronic communications type of a serial communications port
TCP/IP - acronym for transfer control protocol / internet protocol, the standard communications protocol for
Ethernet devices.
VARS - acronym for variables, the variables settings of the analyzer
User Notes
05232 Rev B3
37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
Optional Hardware and Software
5. OPTIONAL HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE
This includes a brief description of the hardware and software options available for the Model 360E Gas Filter
Correlation Carbon Dioxide Analyzer. For assistance with ordering these options please contact the Sales
department of Teledyne – Advanced Pollution Instruments at:
TOLL-FREE: 800-324-5190
FAX: 858-657-9816
TEL: 858-657-9800
E-MAIL: apisales@teledyne.com
WEB SITE: www.teledyne-api.com
5.1. Rack Mount Kits (Options 20a, 20b & 21)
OPTION NUMBER
OPT 20A
DESCRIPTION
Rack mount brackets with 26 in. chassis slides.
Rack mount brackets with 24 in. chassis slides.
Rack mount brackets only
OPT 20B
OPT 21
Each of these options permits the Analyzer to be mounted in a standard 19" x 30" RETMA rack.
5.2. Current Loop Analog Outputs (Option 41)
This option adds isolated, voltage-to-current conversion circuitry to the analyzer’s analog outputs. This option
may be ordered separately for any of the analog outputs; it can be installed at the factory or added later. Call T-
API sales for pricing and availability.
The current loop option can be configured for any output range between 0 and 20 mA. Information on calibrating
or adjusting these outputs can be found in Section 6.13.4.4.
J19
J 23
Voltage Output
Shunts installed
Voltage Output
Shunts installed
Current Loop Option
Installed on J21
(Analog Output A2)
Figure 5-1: Current Loop Option Installed on the Motherboard
05232 Rev B3
39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Optional Hardware and Software
Model 360E Instruction Manual
5.2.1. Converting Current Loop Analog Outputs to Standard Voltage
Outputs.
NOTE
Servicing or handling of circuit components requires electrostatic discharge protection,
i.e. ESD grounding straps, mats and containers. Failure to use ESD protection when
working with electronic assemblies will void the instrument warranty.
See Chapter 12 for more information on preventing ESD damage.
To convert an output configured for current loop operation to the standard 0 to 5 VDC output operation:
4. Turn off power to the analyzer.
5. If a recording device was connected to the output being modified, disconnect it.
6. Remove the top cover
Remove the set screw located in the top, center of the rear panel
Remove the screws fastening the top cover to the unit (four per side).
Lift the cover straight up.
7. Disconnect the current loop option PCA from the appropriate connector on the motherboard (see Figure
5-1).
8. Place a shunt between the leftmost two pins of the connector (see Figure 5-1).
6 spare shunts (P/N CN0000132) were shipped with the instrument attached to JP1 on the back of the
instruments keyboard and display PCA
9. Reattach the top case to the analyzer.
10. The analyzer is now ready to have a voltage-sensing, recording device attached to that output
5.3. Expendable Kits (Options 42C, 42D and 43)
OPTION NUMBER
OPT 42C
DESCRIPTION
1 year’s supply of replacement of 47mm dia. particulate filters
OPT 42D
1 full replacement’s volume of indicating soda-lime for the external CO2 scrubber
included with options 51 & 53 (approximate active lifetime: 1 year)
OPT 43
Options 42 C & 42D
40
05232 Rev B3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
Optional Hardware and Software
5.4. Calibration Valves Options
There are four available options involving Zero/Span/Shutoff valves. From an operational and software
standpoint, all of the options are the same, only the source of the span and zero gases are different.
5.4.1. Zero/Span/Shutoff Valve (Option 50)
This option requires that both zero air and span gas be supplied from external sources. It is specifically
designed for applications where span gas will be supplied from a pressurized bottle of calibrated CO2 gas. A
critical flow control orifice, internal to the instrument ensures that the proper flow rate is maintained. An internal
vent line, isolated by a shutoff valve ensures that the gas pressure of the span gas is reduced to ambient
atmospheric pressure. Normally zero air would be supplied from zero air modules such as a Teledyne
Instruments Model 701.
In order to ensure that span gas does not migrate backwards through the vent line and alter the concentration of
the span gas, a gas line not less than 2 meters in length should be attached to the vent span outlet on the rear
panel of the analyzer. To prevent the buildup of back pressure, this vent line should not be greater than 10
meters in length.
The following table describes the state of each valve during the analyzer’s various operational modes.
MODE
VALVE
CONDITION
Sample/Cal
Zero/Span
Open to SAMPLE inlet
Open to IZS inlet
Closed
SAMPLE
(Normal State)
Shutoff Valve
Sample/Cal
Zero/Span
Open to ZERO/SPAN valve
Open to IZS inlet
Closed
ZERO CAL
SPAN CAL
Shutoff Valve
Sample/Cal
Zero/Span
Open to ZERO/SPAN valve
Open to SHUTOFF valve
Shutoff Valve
Open to PRESSURE SPAN Inlet
The minimum span gas flow rate required for this option is 800 cm3/min.
The state of the zero/span valves can also be controlled:
Manually from the analyzer’s front panel by using the SIGNAL I/O controls located under the DIAG
Menu (Section 6.13.2),
By activating the instrument’s AutoCal feature (Section 7.6),
Remotely by using the external digital control inputs (Section 6.15.1.2 and Section 7.5.2), or;
Remotely through the RS-232/485 serial I/O ports (see Appendix A-6 for the appropriate commands).
05232 Rev B3
41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Optional Hardware and Software
Model 360E Instruction Manual
5.4.2. Zero/Span/Shutoff with External CO2 Scrubber
(Option 51)
Option 51 is operationally and pneumatically identical to Option 50 above (See Section5.4.1), except that the
zero air is generated by an externally mounted zero air scrubber filled with indicating soda-lime that changes
color from white to pink as it becomes saturated.
5.4.3. Zero/Span Valve (Option 52)
This valve option is intended for applications where zero air is supplied by a zero air generator like the Teledyne
Instruments Model 701 and span gas are being supplied by Gas Dilution Calibrator like the Teledyne
Instruments Model 700 or 702. Internal zero/span and sample/cal valves control the flow of gas through the
instrument, but because the calibrator limits the flow of span gas no shutoff valve is required.
In order to ensure that span gas does not migrate backwards through the vent line and alter the concentration of
the span gas, a gas line not less than 2 meters in length should be attached to the vent span outlet on the rear
panel of the analyzer. To prevent the buildup of back pressure, this vent line should not be greater than 10
meters in length.
The following table describes the state of each valve during the analyzer’s various operational modes.
42
05232 Rev B3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
Optional Hardware and Software
Mode
Valve
Condition
Sample/Cal
Zero/Span
Open to SAMPLE inlet
Open to IZS inlet
SAMPLE
(Normal State)
Sample/Cal
Zero/Span
Open to ZERO/SPAN valve
Open to IZS inlet
ZERO CAL
SPAN CAL
Sample/Cal
Zero/Span
Open to ZERO/SPAN valve
Open to PRESSURE SPAN inlet
The minimum span gas flow rate required for this option is 800 cm3/min.
The state of the zero/span valves can also be controlled:
Manually from the analyzer’s front panel by using the SIGNAL I/O controls located under the DIAG
Menu (Section 6.13.2),
By activating the instrument’s AutoCal feature (Section 7.6),
Remotely by using the external digital control inputs (Sections 6.15.1.2 and 7.5.2), or
Remotely through the RS-232/485 serial I/O ports (see Appendix A-6).
05232 Rev B3
43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Optional Hardware and Software
Model 360E Instruction Manual
5.4.4. Zero/Span Valve with External CO2 Scrubber (Option 53)
Option 53 is operationally and pneumatically identical to Option 52 above (See Section5.4.3), except that the
zero air is generated by an externally mounted zero air scrubber filled with indicating soda-lime that changes
color from white to pink as it becomes saturated.
5.5. Communication Options
5.5.1. RS232 Modem Cable (Option 60)
The analyzer can have come standard with a shielded, straight-through DB-9F to DB-9F cable of about 1.8 m
length, which should fit most computers of recent build. This cable can be ordered as Option 60.
Option 60A consists of a shielded, straight-through serial cable of about 1.8 m length to connect the analyzer’s
COM1 port to a computer, a code activated switch or any other communications device that is equipped with a
DB-25 female connector. The cable is terminated with one DB-9 female connector and one DB-25 male
connector. The DB-9 connector fits the analyzer’s COM1 port.
Some older computers or code activated switches with a DB-25 serial connector will need a different cable or an
appropriate adapter.
5.5.2. RS-232 Multidrop (Option 62)
The multidrop option is used with any of the RS-232 serial ports to enable communications of up to eight
analyzers with the host computer over a chain of RS-232 cables via the instruments COM1 Port. It is subject to
the distance limitations of the RS 232 standard.
The option consists of a small printed circuit assembly, which is plugs into to the analyzer’s CPU card (see
Figure 5-4) and is connected to the RS-232 and COM2 DB9 connectors on the instrument’s back panel via a
cable to the motherboard. One option 62 is required for each analyzer along with one 6’ straight-through, DB9
male DB9 Female cable (P/N WR0000101).
This option can be installed in conjunction with the Ethernet option (Option 63) allowing the instrument to
communicate on both types of networks simultaneously. For more information on using and setting up this
option (See Section 6.11.7)
CPU Card
Rear Panel
(as seen from inside)
Multidrop
Card
Figure 5-4: M360E Multidrop Card
44
05232 Rev B3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
Optional Hardware and Software
5.5.3. Ethernet (Option 63)
When installed, this option is electronically connected to the instrument’s COM2 serial port making that port no
longer available for RS-232/RS-485 communications through the COM2 connector on the rear panel. The
option consists of a Teledyne Instruments designed Ethernet card (see Figure 5-5), which is mechanically
attached to the instrument’s rear panel (see Figure 5-6). A 7-foot long CAT-5 network cable, terminated at both
ends with standard RJ-45 connectors, is included as well. Maximum communication speed is limited by the RS-
232 port to 115.2 kBaud.
Figure 5-5: M360E Ethernet Card
CPU
Card
Rear Panel
(as seen from inside)
Ethernet
Card
Female RJ-45
Connector
LNK LED
ACT LED
TxD LED
RxD LED
RE-232
Connector To
Motherboard
Interior View
Exterior View
Figure 5-6: M360E Rear Panel with Ethernet Installed
This option can be installed in conjunction with the RS-2323 multidrop (option 62) allowing the instrument to
communicate on both types of networks simultaneously. For more information on using and setting up this
option. See Section 6.11.6)
05232 Rev B3
45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Optional Hardware and Software
Model 360E Instruction Manual
5.6. Oxygen Sensor (OPT 65)
5.6.1. Theory of Operation
5.6.1.1. Paramagnetic measurement of O2
The oxygen sensor used in the M360E analyzer utilizes the fact that oxygen is attracted into strong magnetic
field; most other gases are not, to obtain fast, accurate oxygen measurements.
The sensor’s core is made up of two nitrogen filled glass spheres, which are mounted on a rotating suspension
within a magnetic field (Figure 5-7). A mirror is mounted centrally on the suspension and light is shone onto the
mirror that reflects the light onto a pair of photocells. The signal generated by the photocells is passed to a
feedback loop, which outputs a current to a wire winding (in effect, a small DC electric motor) mounted on the
suspended mirror.
Oxygen from the sample stream is attracted into the magnetic field displacing the nitrogen filled spheres and
causing the suspended mirror to rotate. This changes the amount of light reflected onto the photocells and
therefore the output levels of the photocells. The feedback loop increases the amount of current fed into the
winding in order to move the mirror back into its original position. The more O2 present, the more the mirror
moves and the more current is fed into the winding by the feedback control loop.
A sensor measures the amount of current generated by the feedback control loop which is directly proportional
to the concentration of oxygen within the sample gas mixture (see Figure 5-7).
Figure 5-2: Oxygen Sensor - Principle of Operation
5.6.1.2. Operation within the M360E Analyzer
The oxygen sensor option is transparently integrated into the core analyzer operation. All functions can be
viewed or accessed through the front panel, just like the functions for CO2
The O2 concentration is displayed in the upper right-hand corner, alternating with CO2 concentration.
Test functions for O2 slope and offset are viewable from the front panel along with the analyzer’s other
test functions.
O2 sensor calibration is performed via the front panel CAL function and is performed in a nearly identical
manner as the standard CO2 calibration. See Section 3.3.1 for more details.
Stability of the O2 sensor can be viewed via the front panel (see Section 3.3.2.1).
A signal representing the currently measured O2 concentration is available.
46
05232 Rev B3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
Optional Hardware and Software
The O2 concentration range is 0-100% (user selectable) with 0.1% precision and accuracy and is available to be
output via the instrument’s analog output channel A3 (See Section 6.13.4).
The temperature of the O2 sensor is maintained at a constant 50° C by means of a PID loop and can be viewed
on the front panel as test function O2 TEMP.
The O2 sensor assembly itself does not have any serviceable parts and is enclosed in an insulated canister.
5.6.1.3. Pneumatic Operation of the O2 Sensor
Pneumatically, the O2 sensor is connected to the bypass manifold and draws a flow of about 120
cm³/min in addition to the normal sample flow rate and is separately controlled with its own critical flow
orifice. Figure 5-8 shows the internal pneumatics of the M360E with the O2 Sensor installed.
Figure 5-3: M360E – Internal Pneumatics with O2 Sensor Option 65
05232 Rev B3
47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Optional Hardware and Software
Model 360E Instruction Manual
5.7. Additional Manuals
5.7.1. Printed Manuals (Option 70)
Additional printed copies of this manual are available from Teledyne Instruments
5.7.2. Manual on CD (Part number 045840200)
This operator’s manual is also available on CD. The electronic document is stored in Adobe Systems Inc.
Portable Document Format (PDF) and is viewable with Adobe Acrobat Reader® software, downloadable for free
at http://www.adobe.com/
The CD version of the manual has many advantages:
Fully searchable text.
Hypertext links for figures, tables, table of contents and embedded references for quick access of
individual manual portions.
A list of thumbnails, chapters and s displayed at the left of the text.
Internet links embedded in the manual will take you to the corresponding web site (requires an internet
connection).
5.8. Extended Warranty (Options 92 & 93)
Two options are available for extending Teledyne Instruments’ standard warranty (Section 2.3). Both options
have to be specified upon ordering the analyzer.
OPTION
DESCRIPTION
NUMBER
OPT 92
OPT 93
Extends warranty to cover a two (2) year period from the date of purchase.
Extends warranty to cover a five (5) year period from the date of purchase.
5.9. Special Software Features
5.9.1. Dilution Ratio Option
The Dilution Ration Option is a software option that is designed for applications where the Sample gas is diluted
before being analyzed by the Model 360E. Typically this occurs in Continuous Emission Monitoring (CEM)
applications where the quality of gas in a smoke stack is being tested and the sampling method used to remove
the gas from the stack dilutes the gas.
Once the degree of dilution is known, this feature allows the user to add an appropriate scaling factor to the
analyzer’s CO2 concentration calculation so that the Measurement Range and concentration values displayed on
the instrument’s Front Panel Display and reported via the Analog and Serial Outputs reflect the undiluted values.
Instructions for using the dilution ratio option can be found in Section 6.8.7.
48
05232 Rev B3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
Optional Hardware and Software
5.9.2. Maintenance Mode Switch
API’s instruments can be equipped with a switch that places the instrument in maintenance mode. When
present, the switch accessed by opening the hinged front panel and is located on the rearward facing side of the
display/keyboard driver PCA; on the left side; near the particulate filter.
When in maintenance mode the instrument ignores all commands received via the COMM ports that alter the
operation state of the instrument. This includes all calibration commands, diagnostic menu commands and the
reset instrument command. The instrument continues to measure concentration and send data when requested.
This option is of particular use for instruments connected to multidrop or Hessen protocol networks.
5.9.3. Second Language Switch
API’s instruments can be equipped with switch that activates an alternate set of display message in a language
other than the instruments default language. When present, the switch accessed by opening the hinged front
panel and is located on the rearward facing side of the display/keyboard driver PCA; on the right side.
To activate this feature, the instrument must also have a specially programmed Disk on Chip containing the
second language.
User Notes
05232 Rev B3
49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
Operating Instructions
6. OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
To assist in navigating the analyzer’s software, a series of menu trees can be found in Appendix A-1 of this
manual.
NOTES
The flow charts appearing in this contain typical representations of the analyzer’s
display during the various operations being described. These representations may
differ slightly from the actual display of your instrument.
The ENTR key may disappear if you select a setting that is invalid or out of the allowable
range for that parameter, such as trying to set the 24-hour clock to 25:00:00. Once you
adjust the setting to an allowable value, the ENTR key will re-appear.
6.1. Overview of Operating modes
The M360E software has a variety of operating modes. Most commonly, the analyzer will be operating in
SAMPLE mode. In this mode, a continuous read-out of the CO2 concentration is displayed on the front panel
and output as an analog voltage from rear panel terminals, calibrations can be performed, and TEST functions
and WARNING messages can be examined.
The second most important operating mode is SETUP mode. This mode is used for performing certain
configuration operations, such as for the iDAS system, the reporting ranges, or the serial (RS-232/RS-
485/Ethernet) communication channels. The SET UP mode is also used for performing various diagnostic tests
during troubleshooting.
Mode Field
SAMPLE A
RANGE = 500.00 PPM
CO2 400.00
SETUP
<TST TST> CAL
Figure 6-1: Front Panel Display
The mode field of the front panel display indicates to the user which operating mode the unit is currently running.
Besides SAMPLE and SETUP, other modes the analyzer can be operated in are:
05232 Rev B3
51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Instructions
Model 360E Instruction Manual
Table 6-1: Analyzer Operating modes
MEANING
MODE
DIAG
One of the analyzer’s diagnostic modes is being utilized (See Section 6.13).
M-P CAL
This is the basic, multi-point calibration mode of the instrument and is activated by pressing
the CAL key.
SAMPLE
SAMPLE A
SETUP1
Sampling normally, flashing indicates adaptive filter is on.
Indicates that unit is in SAMPLE Mode and AUTOCAL feature is activated.
SETUP mode is being used to configure the analyzer (CO2 sampling will continue during this
process).
SPAN CAL A
Unit is performing span cal procedure initiated automatically by the analyzer’s AUTOCAL
feature.
SPAN CAL M
SPAN CAL R
Unit is performing span cal procedure initiated manually by the user.
Unit is performing span cal procedure initiated remotely via the RS-232, RS-4485 or digital i/o
control inputs.
ZERO CAL A
Unit is performing zero cal procedure initiated automatically by the analyzer’s AUTOCAL
feature.
ZERO CAL M
ZERO CAL R
Unit is performing zero cal procedure initiated manually by the user.
Unit is performing zero cal procedure initiated remotely via the RS-232, RS-4485 or digital I/O
control inputs.
1 The revision of the Teledyne Instruments software installed in this analyzer will be displayed following the word
SETUP. E.g. “SETUP G.4”
Finally, the various CAL modes allow calibration of the analyzer. Because of its importance, this mode is
described separately in Chapter 7.
6.2. Sample Mode
This is the analyzer’s standard operating mode. In this mode the instrument is analyzing the gas in the sample
chamber, calculating CO2 concentration and reporting this information to the user via the front panel display, the
analog outputs and, if set up properly, the RS-232/485/Ethernet ports.
NOTE
A value of “XXXX” displayed in the CO2 Concentration field means that the M/R ratio is
invalid because CO2 REF is either too high (> 4950 mVDC) or too low (< 1250 VDC).
6.2.1. Test Functions
A series of test functions is available at the front panel while the analyzer is in SAMPLE mode. These
parameters provide information about the present operating status of the instrument and are useful during
troubleshooting (Section 11.1.2). They can also be recorded in one of the iDAS channels (Section 6.7) for data
analysis. To view the test functions, press one of the <TST TST> keys repeatedly in either direction.
52
05232 Rev B3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
Operating Instructions
Table 6-2: Test Functions Defined
UNITS
DISPLAY
PARAMETER
MEANING
TITLE
Range
RANGE
The full scale limit at which the reporting range of the analyzer is
currently set. THIS IS NOT the Physical Range of the instrument.
See Section 6.8.1 for more information.
PPB, PPM,
UGM, MGM
RANGE11
RANGE21
O2 Range
Stability
The range setting for the O2 Sensor
O2 RANGE
STABIL
%
PPB, PPM
UGM, MGM
Standard deviation of CO2 concentration readings. Data points are
recorded every ten seconds using the last 25 data points.
CO2 Measure
The demodulated, peak IR detector output during the measure
portion of the CFG Wheel cycle.
MEAS
REF
MV
MV
CO2 Reference
The demodulated, peak IR detector output during the reference
portion of the CFG wheel cycle.
Measurement /
Reference Ratio
The result of CO2 MEAS divided by CO2 REF. This ratio is the
primary value used to compute CO2 concentration. The value
displayed is not linearized.
MR Ratio
PRES
-
Sample Pressure
Sample Flow
The absolute pressure of the Sample gas as measured by a
pressure sensor located inside the sample chamber.
In-Hg-A
cc/min
Sample mass flow rate. This is computed from the differential
between the pressures measured up-stream and down-stream of the
sample critical flow orifice pressures.
SAMPLE FL
SAMP TEMP
Sample
Temperature
The temperature of the gas inside the sample chamber.
Optical bench temperature.
C
Bench
Temperature
BENCH
TEMP
C
Wheel
Temperature
WHEEL
TEMP
Filter wheel temperature.
C
C
C
Box Temperature
The temperature inside the analyzer chassis.
O2 sensor cell temperature.
BOX TEMP
O2 Cell
O2 CELL
TEMP2
Temperature2
Photo-detector
Temp. Control
Voltage
The drive voltage being supplied to the thermoelectric coolers of the
IR photo-detector by the sync/demod Board.
PHT DRIVE
SLOPE
mV
Slope
The sensitivity of the instrument as calculated during the last
calibration activity. The SLOPE parameter is used to set the span
calibration point of the analyzer.
-
-
Offset
The overall offset of the instrument as calculated during the last
calibration activity. The OFFSET parameter is used to set the zero
point of the analyzer response.
OFFSET
O2 Sensor Slope
O2 SLOPE
O2 OFFSET
TEST
O2 slope, computed during zero/span calibration.
O2 offset, computed during zero/span calibration.
-
2
O2 Sensor Offset
-
2
Test channel
output signal
Displays the signal level of the TEST analog output channel. Only
appears when the TEST channel has been activated.
mV, mA
Current Time
The current time. This is used to create a time stamp on iDAS
readings, and by the AUTOCAL feature to trigger calibration events.
TIME
-
1 Only appears when the instrument’s reporting range mode is set for DUAL or AUTO
2 Only appears when the optional O2 sensor is installed.
To view the TEST Functions press the following Key sequence:
05232 Rev B3
53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Instructions
Model 360E Instruction Manual
SAMPLE
RANGE = 500.000 PPM
CO2 = XXX.X
SETUP
< TST TST > CAL
RANGE
RANGE11
RANGE21
02 RANGE
STABIL
Toggle <TST TST> keys to
scroll through list of functions
MEAS
REF
MR RATIO
PRES
Refer to
Table 6-2 for
definitions of
these test
SAMP FL
SAMP TEMP
BENCH TEMP
WHEEL TEMP
BOX TEMP
PHT DRIVE
SLOPE
functions.
1 Only appears instrument is set
for DUAL or AUTO reporting
range modes.
OFFSET
TEST
TIME
2 Only appears if 02 Sensor
Option is installed.
Figure 6-3: Viewing M360E TEST Functions
NOTE
A value of “XXXX” displayed for any of the TEST functions indicates an out-of-range
reading or the analyzer’s inability to calculate it.
All pressure measurements are represented in terms of absolute pressure. Absolute,
atmospheric pressure is 29.92 in-Hg-A at sea level. It decreases about 1 in-Hg per 300
m gain in altitude. A variety of factors such as air conditioning and passing storms can
cause changes in the absolute atmospheric pressure.
54
05232 Rev B3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
Operating Instructions
6.2.2. Warning Messages
The most common instrument failures will be reported as a warning on the analyzer’s front panel and through
the COM ports. Section 11.1.1 explains how to use these messages to troubleshoot problems. Section 3.2.3
shows how to view and clear warning messages.
Table 6-3 lists all warning messages for the current version of software.
Table 6-3: List of Warning Messages
MESSAGE
MEANING
The instrument’s A/D circuitry or one of its analog outputs is not calibrated.
The Temperature of the optical bench is outside the specified limits.
Remote span calibration failed while the dynamic span feature was set to turned on
Remote zero calibration failed while the dynamic zero feature was set to turned on
Configuration was reset to factory defaults or was erased.
Concentration alarm 1 is enabled and the measured CO2 level is ≥ the set point.
Concentration alarm 2 is enabled and the measured CO2 level is ≥ the set point.
Configuration storage was reset to factory configuration or erased.
iDAS data storage was erased.
ANALOG CAL WARNING
BENCH TEMP WARNING
BOX TEMP WARNING
CANNOT DYN SPAN
CANNOT DYN ZERO
CONC ALRM1 WARNING
CONC ALRM2 WARNING
CONFIG INITIALIZED
DATA INITIALIZED
O2 sensor cell temperature outside of warning limits.
O2 CELL TEMP WARN
PHOTO TEMP WARNING
REAR BOARD NOT DET
RELAY BOARD WARN
SAMPLE FLOW WARN
SAMPLE PRESS WARN
SAMPLE TEMP WARN
SOURCE WARNING
The temperature of the IR photometer is outside the specified limits.
The CPU is unable to communicate with the motherboard.
The firmware is unable to communicate with the relay board.
The flow rate of the sample gas is outside the specified limits.
Sample gas pressure outside of operational parameters.
The temperature of the sample gas is outside the specified limits.
The IR source may be faulty.
The computer was rebooted.
SYSTEM RESET
The Gas Filter Correlation wheel temperature is outside the specified limits.
WHEEL TEMP WARNING
05232 Rev B3
55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Instructions
Model 360E Instruction Manual
To view and clear warning messages
SAMPLE
HVPS WARNING
CAL MSG
CO2 = 0.00
TEST deactivates warning
TEST
CLR SETUP
messages
MSG activates warning
SAMPLE
RANGE=500.000 PPM
MSG
CO2 = 0.00
messages.
<TST TST> keys replaced with
< TST TST > CAL
CLR SETUP
TEST key
SAMPLE
HVPS WARNING
CO2 = 0.00
Press CLR to clear the current
message.
TEST
CAL
MSG
CLR SETUP
NOTE:
If more than one warning is active, the
next message will take its place
If the warning message persists
after several attempts to clear it,
the message may indicate a
real problem and not an artifact
of the warm-up period
Once the last warning has been
cleared, the analyzer returns to
SAMPLE mode
Make sure warning messages are
not due to real problems.
Figure 6-3
Viewing and Clearing M360E WARNING Messages
6.3. Calibration Mode
Pressing the CAL key switches the M360E into multi-point calibration mode. In this mode, the user can calibrate
the instrument or check the instruments calibration with the use of calibrated zero or span gases.
If the instrument includes either the zero/span valve option or IZS option, the display will also include CALZ and
CALS keys. Pressing either of these keys also puts the instrument into multipoint calibration mode.
The CALZ key is used to initiate a calibration of the zero point.
The CALS key is used to calibrate the span point of the analyzer. It is recommended that this span
calibration is performed at 90% of full scale of the analyzer’s currently selected reporting range.
Because of their critical importance and complexity, calibration operations are described in detail in Chapter 7 of
this manual. For more information concerning the zero/span, zero/span/shutoff and IZS valve options, See
Section 5.4.
56
05232 Rev B3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
Operating Instructions
6.4. SETUP MODE
The SETUP mode contains a variety of choices that are used to configure the analyzer’s hardware and software
features, perform diagnostic procedures, gather information on the instruments performance and configure or
access data from the internal data acquisition system (iDAS). For a visual representation of the software menu
trees, refer to Appendix A-1.
The areas access under the Setup mode are:
Table 6-4: Primary Setup Mode Features and Functions
KEYPAD
LABEL
MANUAL
SECTION
MODE OR FEATURE
DESCRIPTION
Analyzer Configuration
CFG
Lists key hardware and software configuration information
Used to set up and operate the AutoCal feature.
6.5
Auto Cal Feature
ACAL
7.6
Only appears if the analyzer has one of the internal valve
options installed
Internal Data Acquisition
(iDAS)
DAS
Used to set up the iDAS system and view recorded data
6.7
6.8
Analog Output Reporting
Range Configuration
Used to configure the output signals generated by the
instruments Analog outputs.
RNGE
Calibration Password Security
Internal Clock Configuration
PASS
CLK
Turns the calibration password feature ON/OFF
Used to Set or adjust the instrument’s internal clock
6.9
6.10
See
Table 6-5
Advanced SETUP features
MORE
This button accesses the instruments secondary setup menu
Table 6-5: Secondary Setup Mode Features and Functions
KEYPAD
MANUAL
SECTION
MODE OR FEATURE
DESCRIPTION
LABEL
Used to set up and operate the analyzer’s various external I/O
channels including RS-232; RS 485, modem communication
and/or Ethernet access.
External Communication
Channel Configuration
6.11 &
6.15
COMM
VARS
DIAG
Used to view various variables related to the instruments current
operational status
System Status Variables
6.12
6.13
Used to access a variety of functions that are used to configure,
test or diagnose problems with a variety of the analyzer’s basic
systems
System Diagnostic Features
Used to activate the analyzer’s two gas concentration status
alarms and set the alarm limits
CO2 Concentration Alarms
ALRM
6.14
NOTE
Any changes made to a variable during one of the following procedures is not
acknowledged by the instrument until the ENTR Key is pressed
If the EXIT key is pressed before the ENTR key, the analyzer will beep alerting the user
that the newly entered value has been lost.
05232 Rev B3
57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Instructions
Model 360E Instruction Manual
6.5. SETUP CFG: Viewing the Analyzer’s Configuration
Information
Pressing the CFG key displays the instrument configuration information. This display lists the analyzer model,
serial number, firmware revision, software library revision, CPU type and other information. Use this information
to identify the software and hardware when contacting customer service. Special instrument or software
features or installed options may also be listed here.
SAMPLE*
RANGE = 500.000 PPB
CO2 =X.XXX
< TST TST > CAL
SETUP
Press NEXT of PREV to move back and
forth through the following list of
Configuration information:
MODEL NAME
SAMPLE
PRIMARY SETUP MENU
Press EXIT at any
time to return to the
SAMPLE display
SERIAL NUMBER
SOFTWARE REVISION
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE
EXIT
EXIT
LIBRARY REVISION
iCHIP SOFTWARE REVISION1
HESSEN PROTOCOL REVISION1
ACTIVE SPECIAL SOFTWARE
OPTIONS1
SAMPLE
M360E CO2 ANALYZER
Press EXIT at
any time to
return to SETUP
menu
CPU TYPE
DATE FACTORY CONFIGURATION
SAVED
NEXT PREV
1Only appears if relevant option of Feature is active.
6.6. SETUP ACAL: Automatic Calibration
Instruments with one of the internal valve options installed can be set to automatically run calibration procedures
and calibration checks. These automatic procedures are programmed using the submenus and functions found
under the ACAL menu.
A menu tree showing the ACAL menu’s entire structure can be found in Appendix A-1 of this manual.
Instructions for using the ACAL feature are located in the Section 7.6 of this manual along with all other
information related to calibrating the M360E analyzer.
58
05232 Rev B3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
Operating Instructions
6.7. SETUP DAS: Using the Data Acquisition System (iDAS)
The M360E analyzer contains a flexible and powerful, internal data acquisition system (iDAS) that enables the
analyzer to store concentration and calibration data as well as a host of diagnostic parameters. The iDAS of the
M360E can store up to about one million data points, which can, depending on individual configurations, cover
days, weeks or months of valuable measurements. The data are stored in non-volatile memory and are retained
even when the instrument is powered off. Data are stored in plain text format for easy retrieval and use in
common data analysis programs (such as spreadsheet-type programs).
The iDAS is designed to be flexible, users have full control over the type, length and reporting time of the data.
The iDAS permits users to access stored data through the instrument’s front panel or its communication ports.
Using APICOM, data can even be retrieved automatically to a remote computer for further processing.
The principal use of the iDAS is logging data for trend analysis and predictive diagnostics, which can assist in
identifying possible problems before they affect the functionality of the analyzer. The secondary use is for data
analysis, documentation and archival in electronic format.
To support the iDAS functionality, Teledyne Instruments offers APICOM, a program that provides a visual
interface for remote or local setup, configuration and data retrieval of the iDAS (Section 6.7). The APICOM
manual, which is included with the program, contains a more detailed description of the iDAS structure and
configuration.
The M360E is configured with a basic iDAS configuration, which is enabled by default. New data channels are
also enabled by default but each channel may be turned off for later or occasional use. Note that iDAS
operation is suspended while its configuration is edited through the front panel. To prevent such data loss, it is
recommended to use the APICOM graphical user interface for iDAS changes.
The green SAMPLE LED on the instrument front panel, which indicates the analyzer status, also indicates
certain aspects of the iDAS status:
Table 6-6: Front Panel LED Status Indicators for iDAS
LED STATE
OFF
iDAS Status
System is in calibration mode. Data logging can be enabled or disabled for this mode.
Calibration data are typically stored at the end of calibration periods, concentration data are
typically not sampled, diagnostic data should be collected.
BLINKING
ON
Instrument is in hold-off mode, a short period after the system exits calibrations. IDAS
channels can be enabled or disabled for this period. Concentration data are typically disabled
whereas diagnostic should be collected.
Sampling normally.
The iDAS can be disabled only by disabling or deleting its individual data channels.
6.7.1. iDAS Structure
The iDAS is designed around the feature of a “record”. A record is a single data point of one parameter, stored
in one (or more) data channels and generated by one of several triggering event. The entire iDAS configuration
is stored in a script, which can be edited from the front panel or downloaded, edited and uploaded to the
instrument in form of a string of plain-text lines through the communication ports.
iDAS data are defined by the PARAMETER type and are stored through different triggering EVENTS in data
CHANNELS, which relate triggering events to data parameters and define certain operational functions related
to the recording and reporting of the data.
05232 Rev B3
59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Instructions
Model 360E Instruction Manual
6.7.1.1. iDAS Channels
The key to the flexibility of the iDAS is its ability to store a large number of combinations of triggering events and
data parameters in the form of data channels. Users may create up to 20 data channels and each channel can
contain one or more parameters. For each channel one triggering event is selected and up to 50 data
parameters, which can be the same or different between channels. Each data channel has several properties
that define the structure of the channel and allow the user to make operational decisions regarding the channel
(Table 6-7).
Table 6-7: iDAS Data Channel Properties
PROPERTY
NAME
DESCRIPTION
DEFAULT
“NONE”
SETTING RANGE
The name of the data channel.
Up to 6 letters and digits
(more with APICOM, but
only the first six are
displayed on the front
panel).
TRIGGERING
EVENT
The event that triggers the data channel to measure
and store its data parameters. See APPENDIX A-5
for a list of available triggering events.
ATIMER
See Appendix A-5 For a
complete list.
NUMBER &
PARAMETER
LIST
A User-configurable list of data types to be recorded
in any given channel. See APPENDIX A-5 for a list
of available parameters
1 – DETMES
See Appendix A-5 For a
complete list.
STARTING
DATE
The starting date when a channel starts collecting
data
01-JAN-03
000:01:00
Any actual date in the past
or future.
SAMPLE
PERIOD
The amount of time between each data point that is
averaged into one mean reported every REPORT
PERIOD.
000:00:01 to 366:23:59
(Days:Hours:Minutes)
REPORT
PERIOD
The amount of time between each channel data
point.
000:01:00
100
000:00:01 to
366:23:59
(Days:Hours:Minutes)
NUMBER OF
RECORDS
The number of reports that will be stored in the data
file. Once the specified limit has been exceeded,
the oldest data are over-written to make space for
new data.
1 to 1 million, limited by
available storage space.
RS-232
REPORT
Enables the analyzer to automatically report channel
values to the RS-232 ports.
OFF
ON
OFF or ON
OFF or ON
CHANNEL
ENABLED
Enables or disables the channel. Provides a
convenient means to temporarily disable a data
channel.
CAL HOLD OFF Disables sampling of data parameters while
OFF
OFF or ON
instrument is in calibration mode.
(Section 6.7.2.11.)
When enabled here – there is also a length of the
DAS HOLD OFF after calibration mode, which is set
in the VARS menu.
60
05232 Rev B3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
Operating Instructions
6.7.1.2. iDAS Parameters
Data parameters are types of data that may be measured and stored by the iDAS. For each Teledyne
Instruments analyzer model, the list of available data parameters is different, fully defined and not customizable.
Appendix A-5 lists firmware specific data parameters for the M360E. iDAS parameters include things like CO2
concentration measurements, temperatures of the various heaters placed around the analyzer, pressures and
flows of the pneumatic subsystem and other diagnostic measurements as well as calibration data such as slope
and offset.
Most data parameters have associated measurement units, such as mV, ppb, cm³/min, etc., although some
parameters have no units. With the exception of concentration readings, none of these units of measure can be
changed. To change the units of measure for concentration readings See Section 6.8.6.
Note
iDAS does not keep track of the unit of each concentration value and iDAS data files
may contain concentrations in multiple units if the unit was changed during data
acquisition.
Each data parameter has user-configurable functions that define how the data are recorded:
Table 6-8: iDAS Data Parameter Functions
FUNCTION
PARAMETER
SAMPLE MODE
EFFECT
Instrument-specific parameter name.
INST: Records instantaneous reading.
AVG: Records average reading during reporting interval.
MIN: Records minimum (instantaneous) reading during reporting interval.
MAX: Records maximum (instantaneous) reading during reporting interval.
SDEV: Records the standard deviation of the data points recorded during the reporting interval.
Decimal precision of parameter value (0-4).
PRECISION
STORE NUM.
SAMPLES
OFF: stores only the average (default).
ON: stores the average and the number of samples in each average for a parameter. This
property is only useful when the AVG sample mode is used. Note that the number of samples
is the same for all parameters in one channel and needs to be specified only for one of the
parameters in that channel.
Users can specify up to 50 parameters per data channel (the M360E provides about 30 parameters). However,
the number of parameters and channels is ultimately limited by available memory.
05232 Rev B3
61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Instructions
Model 360E Instruction Manual
6.7.1.3. iDAS Triggering Events
Triggering events define when and how the iDAS records a measurement of any given data channel. Triggering
events are firmware-specific and a complete list of Triggers for this model analyzer can be found in Appendix A-
5. The most commonly used triggering events are:
ATIMER: Sampling at regular intervals specified by an automatic timer. Most trending
information is usually stored at such regular intervals, which can be instantaneous or averaged.
EXITZR, EXITSP, SLPCHG (exit zero, exit span, slope change): Sampling at the end of
(irregularly occurring) calibrations or when the response slope changes. These triggering
events create instantaneous data points, e.g., for the new slope and offset (concentration
response) values at the end of a calibration. Zero and slope values are valuable to monitor
response drift and to document when the instrument was calibrated.
WARNINGS: Some data may be useful when stored if one of several warning messages
appears such as WTEMPW (GFC wheel temperature warning) or PPRESW (purge pressure
warning). This is helpful for trouble-shooting by monitoring when a particular warning occurred.
6.7.2. Default iDAS Channels
A set of default Data Channels has been included in the analyzer’s software for logging CO2 concentration and
certain predictive diagnostic data. These default channels include but are not limited to:
CONC: Samples CO2 concentration at one minute intervals and stores an average every hour with a time and
date stamp. Readings during calibration and calibration hold off are not included in the data. By default, the last
800 hourly averages are stored.
PNUMTC: Collects sample flow and sample pressure data at five minute intervals and stores an average once a
day with a time and date stamp. This data is useful for monitoring the condition of the pump and critical flow
orifice (sample flow) and the sample filter (clogging indicated by a drop in sample pressure) over time to predict
when maintenance will be required. The last 360 daily averages (about 1 year) are stored.
CALDAT: Logs new slope and offset every time a zero or span calibration is performed. This Data Channel also
records the instrument readings just prior to performing a calibration. This information is useful for performing
predictive diagnostics as part of a regular maintenance schedule (See Section 9.1).
STBZRO: Logs the concentration stability, the electronic output of the IR detector of the most recent measure
phase and the measure/reference ratio every time the instrument exits the zero calibration mode. Data from the
last 200 zero calibrations is stored. A time and date stamp is recorded for every data point logged. This
information is useful for performing predictive diagnostics as part of a regular maintenance schedule (See
Section 9.1).
STBSPN: Logs the electronic output of the IR detector of the most recent measure phase and the
measure/reference ratio every time the instrument exits span calibration mode. Data from the last 200 zero
calibrations is stored. A time and date stamp is recorded for every data point logged. This information is useful
for performing predictive diagnostics as part of a regular maintenance schedule (See Section 9.1).
TEMP: Samples the analyzer’s bench temperature, box temperature and PHT cooler drive voltage every five
minutes and records an average once every six hours. Data from the last 400 averaging periods is recorded. A
time and date stamp is recorded for every data point logged. This information is useful for performing predictive
diagnostics as part of a regular maintenance schedule (See Section 9.1).
62
05232 Rev B3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
Operating Instructions
Note
The CALDAT, STBZRO and STBSPN channels collect data based on events (e.g. a
calibration operation) rather than a timed interval. This does not represent any specific
length of time since it is dependent on how often calibrations are performed.
Triggering Events and Data Parameters/Functions for these default channels are:
LIST OF CHANNELS
LIST OF PARAMETERS
LIST OF PARAMETERS
NAME: CONC
EVENT: ATIMER
PARAMETER: CONC1
MODE: AVG
PRECISION: 1
REPORT PERIOD: 000:01:00
NO. OF RECORDS: 800
RS-232 REPORT: OFF
CHANNEL ENABLED: ON
CAL HOLD OFF: ON
STORE NUM SAMPLES OFF
PARAMETER: SMPLFLW
MODE: AVG
NAME: PNUMTC
EVENT: ATIMER
PRECISION: 1
STORE NUM SAMPLES OFF
REPORT PERIOD: 001:00:00
NO. OF RECORDS: 360
RS-232 REPORT: OFF
CHANNEL ENABLED: ON
CAL HOLD OFF: OFF
PARAMETER: SMPLPRS
MODE: AVG
PARAMETER: SLOPE1
MODE: INST
PRECISION:3
PRECISION: 1
STORE NUM SAMPLES OFF
STORE NUM SAMPLES OFF
NAME: CALDAT
EVENT: SLPCHG
PARAMETER: OFSET1
MODE: INST
PRECISION: 1
REPORT PERIOD: N/A
NO. OF RECORDS:200
RS-232 REPORT: OFF
CHANNEL ENABLED: ON
CAL HOLD OFF: OFF
STORE NUM SAMPLES OFF
PARAMETER: STABIL
MODE: INST
PARAMETER: ZSCNC1
MODE: INST
PRECISION:2
STORE NUM SAMPLES OFF
PRECISION: 1
STORE NUM SAMPLES OFF
NAME: STBZRO
EVENT: EXITZR
PARAMETER: DETMES
MODE: INST
PRECISION: 1
STORE NUM SAMPLES OFF
REPORT PERIOD: N/A
NO. OF RECORDS:200
RS-232 REPORT: OFF
CHANNEL ENABLED: ON
CAL HOLD OFF: OFF
PARAMETER: DETMES
MODE: INST
PRECISION: 1
PARAMETER: RATIO
MODE: INST
PRECISION: 3
STORE NUM SAMPLES OFF
NAME: STBSPN
EVENT: EXITSP
STORE NUM SAMPLES OFF
REPORT PERIOD: N/A
NO. OF RECORDS:200
RS-232 REPORT: OFF
CHANNEL ENABLED: ON
CAL HOLD OFF: OFF
PARAMETER: RATIO
MODE: INST
PRECISION: 3
STORE NUM SAMPLES OFF
PARAMETER: BNTEMP
MODE: AVG
PRECISION:1
STORE NUM SAMPLES OFF
NAME: TEMP
EVENT: ATIMER
PARAMETER: BOXTMP
MODE: AVG
PRECISION: 1
STORE NUM SAMPLES OFF
REPORT PERIOD: 000:06:00
NO. OF RECORDS:400
RS-232 REPORT: OFF
CHANNEL ENABLED: ON
CAL HOLD OFF: OFF
PARAMETER: PHTDRV
MODE: AVG
PRECISION: 1
STORE NUM SAMPLES OFF
Figure 6-4: Default iDAS Channels Setup
These default Data Channels can be used as they are, or they can be customized from the front panel to fit a
specific application. They can also be deleted to make room for custom user-programmed Data Channels.
Appendix A-5 lists the firmware-specific iDAS configuration in plain-text format. This text file can either be
loaded into APICOM and then modified and uploaded to the instrument or can be copied and pasted into a
terminal program to be sent to the analyzer.
05232 Rev B3
63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Instructions
Model 360E Instruction Manual
NOTE
Sending an iDAS configuration to the analyzer through its COM ports will replace the
existing configuration and will delete all stored data. Back up any existing data and the
iDAS configuration before uploading new settings.
These default Data Channels can be used as they are, or they can be customized from the front panel to fit a
specific application. They can also be deleted to make room for custom user-programmed Data Channels.
Appendix A-5 lists the firmware-specific iDAS configuration in plain-text format. This text file can either be
loaded into APICOM and then modified and uploaded to the instrument or can be copied and pasted into a
terminal program to be sent to the analyzer.
NOTE
Sending an iDAS configuration to the analyzer through its COM ports will replace the
existing configuration and will delete all stored data. Back up any existing data and the
iDAS configuration before uploading new settings.
64
05232 Rev B3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
Operating Instructions
6.7.2.1. Viewing iDAS Data and Settings
iDAS data and settings can be viewed on the front panel through the following keystroke sequence.
VIEW KEYPAD FUNCTIONS
KEY
FUNCTION
SAMPLE*
RANGE = 500.000 PPM
CO2 =X.XXX
< TST TST > CAL
SETUP
<PRM
PRM>
Moves to the next Parameter
Moves to the previous
Parameter
SETUP X.X
PRIMARY SETUP MENU
NX10
NEXT
PREV
PV10
Moves the view forward 10
data points/channels
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE
EXIT
EXIT
Moves to the next data
point/channel
Moves to the previous data
point/channel
SETUP X.X
DATA ACQUISITION
Moves the view back 10 data
points/channels
VIEW EDIT
Keys only appear as needed
SETUP X.X
CONC : DATA AVAILABLE
NEXT VIEW
EXIT
SETUP X.X
00:00:00 NXCNC1=0.0 PPM
PV10 PREV NEXT NX10 <PRM PRM>
EXIT
SETUP X.X
PNUMTC: DATA AVAILABLE
PREV NEXT VIEW
EXIT
SETUP X.X
00:00:00 SMPFLW=000.0 cc / m
<PRM
PRM>
EXIT
SETUP X.X
CALDAT: DATA AVAILABLE
PREV NEXT VIEW
EXIT
SETUP X.X
00:00:00 NXSLP1=0.000
<PRM PRM>
PV10 PREV
EXIT
SETUP X.X
STBZRO: DATA AVAILABLE
PREV NEXT VIEW
EXIT
SETUP X.X
00:00:00 STABIL=0.000
<PRM PRM>
PV10 PREV
EXIT
EXIT
EXIT
SETUP X.X
STBSPN: DATA AVAILABLE
PREV NEXT VIEW
EXIT
SETUP X.X
00:00:00 DETMES=0.000
<PRM PRM>
PV10 PREV
SETUP X.X
TEMP: DATA AVAILABLE
PREV NEXT VIEW
EXIT
SETUP X.X
00:00:00 BOXTMP=0.000
<PRM PRM>
PV10 PREV
05232 Rev B3
65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Instructions
Model 360E Instruction Manual
6.7.2.2. Editing iDAS Data Channels
iDAS configuration is most conveniently done through the APICOM remote control program. The following list of
key strokes shows how to edit using the front panel.
SAMPLE*
RANGE = 500.000 PPM
CO2 =X.XXX
< TST TST > CAL
SETUP
SETUP X.X
PRIMARY SETUP MENU
EXIT will return to the
previous SAMPLE
display.
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE
EXIT
Main Data Acquisition Menu
SETUP X.X
DATA ACQUISITION
VIEW EDIT
EXIT
SAMPLE
ENTER SETUP PASS : 818
8
8
1
ENTR EXIT
Edit Data Channel Menu
Moves the
display up &
down the list of
Data Channels
SETUP X.X
0) CONC: ATIMER, 1,
900
Exits to the Main
Data Acquisition
Menu
PREV NEXT
INS DEL EDIT PRNT EXIT
Exports the
Inserts a new Data
Channel into the list
BEFORE the Channel
currently being displayed
configuration of all
data channels to
RS-232 interface.
Deletes The Data
Channel currently
being displayed
Moves the display
between the
SETUP X.X
NAME:CONC
Exits returns to the
previous Menu
PROPERTIES for this
data channel.
<SET SET> EDIT PRNT
EXIT
Reports the configuration of current
data channels to the RS-232 ports.
Allows to edit the channel name, see next key sequence.
When editing the data channels, the top line of the display indicates some of the configuration parameters. For
example, the display line:
0) CONC: ATIMER, 4, 800
translates to the following configuration:
Channel No.: 0
NAME: CONC
TRIGGER EVENT: ATIMER
PARAMETERS: Four parameters are included in this channel
EVENT: This channel is set up to record 800 data points.
To edit the name of a data channel, follow the above key sequence and then press:
66
05232 Rev B3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
Operating Instructions
From the end of the previous key sequence …
SETUP X.X
NAME:CONC
<SET SET> EDIT PRINT
EXIT
ENTR accepts the new string
SETUP X.X
NAME:CONC
and returns to the previous
menu.
C
O
N
C
-
-
ENTR
EXIT
EXIT ignores the new string
and returns to the previous
menu.
Press each key repeatedly to cycle through the
available character set:
0-9, A-Z, space ’ ~ ! # $ % ^ & * ( ) - _ = +[ ]
{ } < >\ | ; : , . / ?
6.7.2.3. Trigger Events
To edit the list of data parameters associated with a specific data channel, press:
From the DATA ACQUISITION menu
(see Section 6.7.2.2)
Edit Data Channel Menu
SETUP X.X
0) CONC: ATIMER, 1,
900
Exits to the Main
Data Acquisition
menu
PREV NEXT
INS DEL EDIT PRNT EXIT
SETUP X.X
NAME:CONC
<SET SET> EDIT PRINT
EXIT
SETUP X.X
EVENT:ATIMER
<SET SET> EDIT PRINT
EXIT
ENTR accepts the new string
and returns to the previous
menu.
EXIT ignores the new string
and returns to the previous
menu.
SETUP X.X
EVENT:ATIMER
<PREV NEXT>
ENTR
EXIT
Press each key repeatedly to cycle through the
list of available trigger events.
05232 Rev B3
67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Instructions
Model 360E Instruction Manual
6.7.2.4. Editing iDAS Parameters
Data channels can be edited individually from the front panel without affecting other data channels. However,
when editing a data channel, such as during adding, deleting or editing parameters, all data for that particular
channel will be lost, because the iDAS can store only data of one format (number of parameter columns etc.) for
any given channel. In addition, an iDAS configuration can only be uploaded remotely as an entire set of
channels. Hence, remote update of the iDAS will always delete all current channels and stored data.
To modify, add or delete a parameter, follow the instruction shown in Section 6.7.2.2 then press:
From the DATA ACQUISITION menu
(see Section 6.7.2.2)
Edit Data Channel Menu
SETUP X.X
0) CONC: ATIMER, 1,
900
Exits to the main
Data Acquisition
menu
PREV NEXT
INS DEL EDIT PRNT EXIT
SETUP X.X
NAME:CONC
<SET SET> EDIT PRINT
EXIT
Press SET> key until…
SETUP X.X
PARAMETERS:1
<SET SET> EDIT PRINT
EXIT
SETUP X.X
EDIT PARAMS (DELETE DATA)
YES will delete
all data in that
entire channel.
NO returns to
the previous
menu and
YES NO
retains all data.
Edit Data Parameter Menu
Moves the
display between
existing
SETUP X.X 0) PARAM=CONC1, MODE=AVG
PREV NEXT INS DEL EDIT
Exits to the main
Data Acquisition
menu
EXIT
Parameters
Inserts a new Parameter
before the currently
displayed Parameter
Use to configure
the functions for
this Parameter.
Deletes the Parameter
currently displayed.
68
05232 Rev B3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
Operating Instructions
To configure a specific data parameter, press:
FROM THE EDIT DATA PARAMETER MENU
(see previous section)
SETUP X.X 0) PARAM=CONC1, MODE=AVG
PREV NEXT
INS DEL EDIT
EXIT
SETUP X.X PARAMETERS:CONC!
SET> EDIT
EXIT
SETUP X.X PARAMETERS: PMTDET
PREV NEXT ENTR
EXIT
If more than on parameter is active for
this channel, these cycle through list of
existing Parameters.
SETUP X.X SAMPLE MODE:AVG
<SET SET> EDIT
EXIT
SETUP X.X SAMPLE MODE: INST
INST AVG MIN MAX
EXIT
Press the key for the desired mode
ENTR accepts the new
setting and returns to the
previous menu.
SETUP X.X PRECISION: 1
EXIT ignores the new setting
and returns to the previous
<SET SET> EDIT
EXIT
SETUP X.X PRECISION: 1
1
EXIT
Set for 0-4
<SET Returns to
previous
SETUP X.X STORE NUM. SAMPLES: OFF
Functions
<SET
EDIT
EXIT
SETUP X.X STORE NUM. SAMPLES: OFF
OFF
ENTR EXIT
Turn ON or OFF
05232 Rev B3
69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Instructions
Model 360E Instruction Manual
6.7.2.5. Sample Period and Report Period
The iDAS defines two principal time periods by which sample readings are taken and permanently recorded:
SAMPLE PERIOD: Determines how often iDAS temporarily records a sample reading of the parameter
in volatile memory. The SAMPLE PERIOD is set to one minute by default and generally cannot be
accessed from the standard iDAS front panel menu, but is available via the instruments communication
ports by using APICOM or the analyzer’s standard serial data protocol.
SAMPLE PERIOD is only used when the iDAS parameter’s sample mode is set for AVG, MIN or MAX.
REPORT PERIOD: Sets how often the sample readings stored in volatile memory are processed, (e.g.
average, minimum or maximum are calculated) and the results stored permanently in the instruments
Disk-on-Chip as well as transmitted via the analyzer’s communication ports. The REPORT PERIOD
may be set from the front panel.
If the INST sample mode is selected the instrument stores and reports an instantaneous reading of the
selected parameter at the end of the chosen REPORT PERIOD
In AVG, MIN or MAX sample modes, the settings for the SAMPLE PERIOD and the REPORT PERIOD
determine the number of data points used each time the average, minimum or maximum is calculated, stored
and reported to the COMM ports. The actual sample readings are not stored past the end of the of the chosen
REPORT PERIOD.
Also, the SAMPLE PERIOD and REPORT PERIOD intervals are synchronized to the beginning and end of the
appropriate interval of the instruments internal clock.
If SAMPLE PERIOD were set for one minute the first reading would occur at the beginning of the next
full minute according to the instrument’s internal clock.
If the REPORT PERIOD were set for of one hour the first report activity would occur at the beginning of
the next full hour according to the instrument’s internal clock.
EXAMPLE: Given the above settings, if iDAS were activated at 7:57:35 the first sample would occur at
7:58 and the first report would be calculated at 8:00 consisting of data points for 7:58. 7:59 and 8:00.
During the next hour (from 8:01 to 9:00) the instrument will take a sample reading every minute and
include 60 sample readings.
When the STORE NUM. SAMPLES feature is turned on the instrument will also store how many sample
readings were used for the AVG, MIN or MAX calculation but not the readings themselves.
REPORT PERIODS IN PROGRESS WHEN INSTRUMENT IS POWERED OFF
If the instrument is powered off in the middle of a REPORT PERIOD, the samples accumulated so far during that
period are lost. Once the instrument is turned back on, the iDAS restarts taking samples and temporarily them
in volatile memory as part of the REPORT PERIOD currently active at the time of restart. At the end of this
REPORT PERIOD only the sample readings taken since the instrument was turned back on will be included in
any AVG, MIN or MAX calculation. Also, the STORE NUM. SAMPLES feature will report the number of sample
readings taken since the instrument was restarted.
70
05232 Rev B3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
Operating Instructions
To define the REPORT PERIOD, follow the instruction shown in Section 6.7.2.2 then press:
From the DATA ACQUISITION menu
(see Section 6.7.2.2)
Edit Data Channel Menu
Use the PREV and NEXT
keys to scroll to the data
channel to be edited.
SETUP X.X
0) CONC: ATIMER, 1,
900
Exits to the main
Data Acquisition
menu.
PREV NEXT
INS DEL EDIT PRNT EXIT
SETUP X.X
NAME:CONC
<SET SET> EDIT PRINT
EXIT
Press SET> key until you reach REPORT PERIOD …
SETUP X.X
REPORT PERIOD:000:01:00
<SET SET> EDIT PRINT
EXIT
SETUP X.X
REPORT PERIODD:DAYS:0
Set the number of days
between reports (0-366).
0
0
0
ENTR EXIT
Press keys to set hours
between reports in the format :
HH:MM (max: 23:59). This is a
24 hour clock . PM hours are 13
thru 23, midnight is 00:00.
SETUP X.X
REPORT PERIODD:TIME:01:01
ENTR EXIT
ENTR accepts the new string and
returns to the previous menu.
EXIT ignores the new string and
returns to the previous menu.
0
1
0
0
IIf at any time an illegal entry is selected (e.g., days > 366)
the ENTR key will disappear from the display.
Example 2:15 PM = 14:15
05232 Rev B3
71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Instructions
Model 360E Instruction Manual
6.7.2.6. Number of Records
The number of data records in the M360E is limited to about a cumulative one million data points in all channels
(one megabyte of space on the disk-on-chip). However, the actual number of records is also limited by the total
number of parameters and channels and other settings in the iDAS configuration. Every additional data channel,
parameter, number of samples setting etc. and will reduce the maximum amount of data points somewhat. In
general, however, the maximum data capacity is divided amongst all channels (max: 20) and parameters (max:
50 per channel).
The iDAS will check the amount of available data space and prevent the user from specifying too many records
at any given point. If, for example, the iDAS memory space can accommodate 375 more data records, the
ENTR key will disappear when trying to specify more than that number of records. This check for memory space
may also make an upload of an iDAS configuration with APICOM or a Terminal program fail, if the combined
number of records would be exceeded. In this case, it is suggested to either try from the front panel what the
maximum number of records can be or use trial-and-error in designing the iDAS script or calculate the number of
records using the DAS or APICOM manuals. To set the number of records for one channel from the front panel,
press SETUP-DAS-EDIT-ENTR and the following key sequence.
From the DATA ACQUISITION menu
(see Section 6.12.2.2)
Edit Data Channel Menu
SETUP X.X
0) CONC: ATIMER, 1 2,
900
Exits to the main
Data Acquisition
menu
PREV NEXT
INS DEL EDIT PRNT EXIT
SETUP X.X
NAME:CONC
<SET SET> EDIT PRINT
EXIT
Press SET> key until…
SETUP X.X
NUMBER OF RECORDS:000
<SET SET> EDIT PRINT
EXIT
SETUP X.X
EDIT RECOPRDS (DELET DATA)
NO returns to the
previous menu.
YES will delete all data
in this channel.
YES
NO
ENTR accepts the new
setting and returns to the
previous menu.
EXIT ignores the new setting
and returns to the previous
menu.
Toggle keys to set
number of records
(1-99999)
SETUP X.X
REPORT PERIODD:DAYS:0
ENTR EXIT
0
0
0
0
0
72
05232 Rev B3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
Operating Instructions
6.7.2.7. RS-232 Report Function
The M360E iDAS can automatically report data to the communications ports, where they can be captured with a
terminal emulation program or simply viewed by the user.
To enable automatic COM port reporting, follow the instruction shown in Section 6.7.2.2 then press:
From the DATA ACQUISITION menu
(see Section 6.7.2.2)
Edit Data Channel Menu
SETUP X.X
0) CONC: ATIMER, 1,
900
Exits to the main
Data Acquisition
menu
PREV NEXT
INS DEL EDIT PRNT EXIT
SETUP X.X
NAME:CONC
<SET SET> EDIT PRINT
EXIT
Press SET> key until…
SETUP X.X
RS-232 REPORT: OFF
<SET SET> EDIT PRINT
EXIT
ENTR accepts the new
setting and returns to the
previous menu.
EXIT ignores the new setting
and returns to the previous
menu.
SETUP X.X
RS-232 REPORT: OFF
Toggle key to turn
reporting ON or OFF
OFF
ENTR EXIT
6.7.2.8. Compact Report
When enabled, this option avoids unnecessary line breaks on all RS-232 reports. Instead of reporting each
parameter in one channel on a separate line, up to five parameters are reported in one line.
6.7.2.9. Starting Date
This option allows to specify a starting date for any given channel in case the user wants to start data acquisition
only after a certain time and date. If the Starting Date is in the past, the iDAS ignores this setting.
05232 Rev B3
73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Instructions
Model 360E Instruction Manual
6.7.2.10. Disabling/Enabling Data Channels
Data channels can be temporarily disabled, which can reduce the read/write wear on the disk-on-chip. The
ALL_01 channel of the M360E, for example, is disabled by default.
To disable a data channel, follow the instruction shown in Section 6.7.2.2 then press:
From the DATA ACQUISITION menu
(see Section 6.7.2.2)
Edit Data Channel Menu
SETUP X.X
0) CONC: ATIMER, 1,
900
Exits to the main
Data Acquisition
menu
PREV NEXT
INS DEL EDIT PRNT EXIT
SETUP X.X
NAME:CONC
<SET SET> EDIT PRINT
EXIT
Press SET> key until…
SETUP X.X
CHANNEL ENABLE:ON
<SET SET> EDIT PRINT
EXIT
ENTR accepts the new
setting and returns to the
previous menu.
EXIT ignores the new setting
and returns to the previous
menu.
SETUP X.X
CHANNEL ENABLE:ON
Toggle key to turn
channel ON or OFF
OFF
ENTR EXIT
6.7.2.11. HOLDOFF Feature
The iDAS HOLDOFF feature allows to prevent data collection during calibrations and during the
DAS_HOLDOFF period enabled and specified in the VARS (Section 6.12). To enable or disable the HOLDOFF,
follow the instruction shown in Section 6.7.2.2 then press:
From the DATA ACQUISITION menu
(see Section 6.7.2.2)
Edit Data Channel Menu
SETUP X.X
0) CONC: ATIMER, 1,
900
Exits to the main
Data Acquisition
menu
PREV NEXT
INS DEL EDIT PRNT EXIT
SETUP X.X
NAME:CONC
<SET SET> EDIT PRINT
EXIT
Press SET> key until…
SETUP X.X
CAL HOLD OFF:ON
SET> EDIT PRINT
EXIT
ENTR accepts the new
setting and returns to the
previous menu.
EXIT ignores the new setting
and returns to the previous
menu.
SETUP X.X
CAL HOLD OFF:ON
Toggle key to turn
HOLDOFF ON or OFF
ON
ENTR EXIT
74
05232 Rev B3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
Operating Instructions
6.7.3. Remote iDAS Configuration
Editing channels, parameters and triggering events as described in this can be performed via the APICOM
remote control program using the graphic interface shown in Figure 6-5. Refer to Section 6.15 for details on
remote access to the M360E analyzer.
Figure 6-5: APICOM user interface for configuring the iDAS.
Once an iDAS configuration is edited (which can be done offline and without interrupting DAS data collection), it
is conveniently uploaded to the instrument and can be stored on a computer for later review, alteration or
documentation and archival. Refer to the APICOM manual for details on these procedures. The APICOM user
manual (Teledyne Instruments part number 039450000) is included in the APICOM installation file, which can be
downloaded at http://www.teledyne-api.com/software/apicom/.
Although Teledyne Instruments recommends the use of APICOM, the iDAS can also be accessed and
configured through a terminal emulation program such as HyperTerminal (Figure 6-6). However, all
configuration commands must be created following a strict syntax or be pasted in from of a text file, which was
edited offline and then uploaded through a specific transfer procedure.
05232 Rev B3
75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Instructions
Model 360E Instruction Manual
Figure 6-6: iDAS Configuration Through a Terminal Emulation Program.
Both procedures are best started by downloading the default iDAS configuration, getting familiar with its
command structure and syntax conventions, and then altering a copy of the original file offline before uploading
the new configuration.
CAUTION
Whereas the editing, adding and deleting of iDAS channels and parameters of one
channel through the front-panel keyboard can be done without affecting the other
channels, uploading an iDAS configuration script to the analyzer through its
communication ports will erase all data, parameters and channels by replacing them
with the new iDAS configuration. Backup of data and the original iDAS configuration is
advised before attempting any iDAS changes.
76
05232 Rev B3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
Operating Instructions
6.8. SETUP RNGE: Analog Output Reporting Range
Configuration
The analyzer has three active analog output signals, accessible through a connector on the rear panel.
ANALOG OUT
CO2 concentration
Test Channel
outputs
Not Used
A1
A2
A3
A4
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
LOW range when DUAL
HIGH range when DUAL
mode is selected
mode is selected
Figure 6-7: Analog Output Connector Pin Out
All three outputs can be configured either at the factory or by the user for full scale outputs of 0.1 VDC, 1VDC,
5VDC or 10VDC. Additionally A1 and A2 may be equipped with optional 0-20 mADC current loop drivers and
configured for any current output within that range (e.g. 0-20, 2-20, 4-20, etc.). The user may also adjust the
signal level and scaling of the actual output voltage or current to match the input requirements of the recorder or
data logger (See Section 6.13.4).
The A1 and A2 channels output a signal that is proportional to the CO2 concentration of the sample gas.
Several modes are available which allow them to operate independently or be slaved together (See Section 6.7).
The user may also select between a variety of reporting range spans (See Sections 6.8.3, 6.8.4 and 6.8.5).
EXAMPLE:
A1 OUTPUT: Output Signal = 0-5 VDC representing 0-1000 ppm concentration values
A2 OUTPUT: Output Signal = 0 – 10 VDC representing 0-500 ppm concentration values.
Output A3 is only active if the O2 sensor option is installed. In this case a signal representing the currently
measured O2 concentration is output on this channel.
The output, labeled A4 is special. It can be set by the user (See Section 6.13.9) to output several of the test
functions accessible through the <TST TST> keys of the units sample display.
6.8.1. Physical Range versus Analog Output Reporting Ranges
Functionally, the Model 360E Gas Filter Correlation CO2 Analyzer has one hardware Physical Range that is
capable of determining CO2 concentrations between 50 ppb and 2,000 ppm. This architecture improves
reliability and accuracy by avoiding the need for extra, switchable, gain-amplification circuitry. Once properly
calibrated, the analyzer’s front panel will accurately report concentrations along the entire span of its 50 ppb and
2,000 ppm physical range.
Because, most applications use only a small part of the analyzer’s physical range, the width of the Model 360E’s
physical range can create data resolution problems for most analog recording devices. For example, in an
application where the expected concentration of CO2 is typically less than 500 ppm, the full scale of expected
values is only 25% of the instrument’s 2,000 ppm physical range. Unmodified, the corresponding output signal
would also be recorded across only 25% of the range of the recording device.
05232 Rev B3
77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Instructions
Model 360E Instruction Manual
The M360E solves this problem by allowing the user to select a scaled reporting range for the analog outputs
that only includes that portion of the physical range relevant to the specific application. Only the reporting range
of the analog outputs is scaled, the physical range of the analyzer and the readings displayed on the front panel
remain unaltered.
6.8.2. Reporting Range Modes
The M360E provides three analog output range modes to choose from.
Single range (SNGL) mode sets a single maximum range for the analog output. If single range is
selected (See Section 6.78.3) both outputs are slaved together and will represent the same
measurement span (e.g. 0-50 ppm), however their electronic signal levels may be configured for
different ranges (e.g. 0-10 VDC vs. 0-.1 VDC – See Section 6.9.4.1).
Dual range (DUAL) allows the A1 and A2 outputs to be configured with different measurement spans
(See Section 6.8.4) as well as separate electronic signal levels (See Section 6.9.4.1).
Auto range (AUTO) mode gives the analyzer to ability to output data via a low range and high range.
When this mode is selected (See Section 6.8.5) the M360E will automatically switch between the two
ranges dynamically as the concentration value fluctuates.
Range status is also output via the external digital I/O status outputs (See Section 6.15.1.1).
To select the Analog Output Range Type press:
SAMPLE*
RANGE = 500.000 PPM
CO2 =X.XXX
< TST TST > CAL
SETUP
SAMPLE
ENTER SETUP PASS : 818
8
1
8
ENTR EXIT
SETUP X.X
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE
EXIT
SETUP X.X
RANGE CONTROL MENU
MODE SET UNIT
EXIT
SETUP X.X
RANGE MODE: SNGL
EXIT Returns
to the Main
SNGL DUAL AUTO
ENTR EXIT
SAMPLE Display
Only one of the
range modes may
be active at any
time.
Go To
Section
6.7.3
Go To
Section
6.7.4
Go To
Section
6.7.5
78
05232 Rev B3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
Operating Instructions
NOTE
Upper span limit setting for the individual range modes are shared. Resetting the span
limit in one mode also resets the span limit for the corresponding range in the other
modes as follows:
SNGL
Range
DUAL
AUTO
Range1 Low Range
Range2 High Range
6.8.3. Single Range mode (SNGL)
This is the default reporting range mode for the analyzer. In single range mode both A1 and A2 are set to the
same reporting range. This reporting range can be any value between 50 ppb and 2 000 ppm.
While the two outputs always have the same reporting range, the span, signal offset and scaling of their
electronic signals may be configured for differently (e.g., A1 = 0-10 V; A2 = 0-0.1 V). See Section 6.13.4 for
instructions on adjusting these parameters.
To select SNGL range mode and to set the upper limit of the range, press:
SAMPLE*
RANGE = 500.000 PPM
CO2 X.XXX
SETUP C.3
RANGE MODE: SNGL
< TST TST > CAL
SETUP
SNGL DUAL AUTO
ENTR EXIT
SETUP C.3
RANGE CONTROL MENU
SETUP C.3
PRIMARY SETUP MENU
MODE SET UNIT
EXIT
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE
EXIT
SETUP C.3
RANGE CONTROL MENU
SETUP C.3
RANGE: 500.0 Conc
.0
MODE SET UNIT
EXIT
0
0
5
0
0
ENTR EXIT
SETUP C.3
RANGE MODE: SNGL
SETUP C.3
MODE SET UNIT
RANGE CONTROL MENU
EXIT x 2 returns
to the main
SAMPLE display
SNGL DUAL AUTO
ENTR EXIT
EXIT
05232 Rev B3
79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Instructions
Model 360E Instruction Manual
6.8.4. Dual Range Mode (DUAL)
Selecting Dual Range mode allows the A1 and A2 outputs to be configured with different reporting ranges. The
analyzer software calls these two ranges low and high. The low range setting corresponds with the analog
output labeled A1 on the Rear Panel of the instrument. The high Range Setting corresponds with the A2 output.
While the software names these two ranges low and high, they do not have to be configured that way. For
example: The low range can be set for a span of 0-1000 ppm while the high range is set for 0-500 ppm.
In DUAL range mode the RANGE test function displayed on the front panel will be replaced by two separate
functions:
RANGE1: The range setting for the A1 output.
RANGE2: The range setting for the A2 output.
To set the ranges press following keystroke sequence
SETUP X.X
RANGE MODE: DUAL
SNGL DUAL AUTO
ENTR EXIT
SAMPLE*
RANGE = 500.000 PPM
CO2 =X.XXX
SETUP X.X
RANGE CONTROL MENU
< TST TST > CAL
SETUP
MODE SET UNIT
EXIT
SETUP X.X
PRIMARY SETUP MENU
SETUP X.X
LOW RANGE: 500.0 Conc
.0 ENTR EXIT
Toggle the
Numeral Keys
to set the upper
limit of each
range.
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE
EXIT
0
0
1
5
0
0
SETUP X.X
RANGE CONTROL MENU
SETUP X.X
HIGH RANGE: 500.0 Conc
.0 ENTR EXIT
MODE SET UNIT
EXIT
0
0
0
0
SETUP X.X
RANGE MODE: SNGL
SETUP X.X
RANGE CONTROL MENU
EXIT Returns
to the Main
SAMPLE Display
SNGL DUAL AUTO
ENTR EXIT
MODE SET UNIT
EXIT
.
When the instrument’s range mode is set to DUAL the concentration field in the upper right hand corner of the
display alternates between displaying the low range value and the high range value. The concentration currently
being displayed is identified as follows: C1 = Low (or A1) and C2 = High (or A2).
NOTE
In DUAL range mode the LOW and HIGH ranges have separate slopes and offsets for
computing CO2 concentration.
The two ranges must be independently calibrated.
80
05232 Rev B3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
Operating Instructions
6.8.5. Auto Range Mode (AUTO)
In AUTO range mode, the analyzer automatically switches the reporting range between two user-defined ranges
(low and high). The unit will switch from low range to high range when the CO2 concentration exceeds 98% of
the low range span. The unit will return from high range back to low range once both the CO2 concentration falls
below 75% of the low range span.
In AUTO Range mode the instrument reports the same data in the same range on both the A1 and A2 outputs
and automatically switches both outputs between ranges as described above. Also, the RANGE test function
displayed on the front panel will automatically switch to show which range is in effect.
The high/low range status is also reported through the external, digital status outputs (Section 6.15.1.1).
To set individual ranges press the following keystroke sequence.
SETUP X.X
RANGE MODE: AUTO
SNGL DUAL AUTO
ENTR EXIT
SAMPLE*
RANGE = 500.000 PPM
CO2 =X.XXX
< TST TST > CAL
SETUP
SETUP X.X
RANGE CONTROL MENU
EXIT x 2 returns
to the main
SAMPLE display
MODE SET UNIT
EXIT
SETUP X.X
PRIMARY SETUP MENU
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE
EXIT
EXIT
SETUP X.X
LOW RANGE: 500.0 Conc
.0 ENTR EXIT
Toggle the numeral
keys to set the
LOW and HIGH
range value.
SETUP X.X
RANGE CONTROL MENU
0
0
5
5
0
0
MODE SET UNIT
ENTR accepts the
new setting, EXIT
ignores the new
setting.
SETUP X.X
RANGE MODE: SNGL
SETUP X.X
HIGH RANGE: 500.0 Conc
.0 ENTR EXIT
SNGL DUAL AUTO
ENTR EXIT
0
0
0
0
CAUTION
In AUTO range mode the LOW and HIGH ranges have separate slopes and offsets for
computing CO2 concentration.
The two ranges must be independently calibrated.
NOTE
Avoid accidentally setting the low range of the instrument with a higher span limit than
the high range. This will cause the unit to stay in the low reporting range perpetually
and defeat the function of the AUTO range mode.
05232 Rev B3
81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Instructions
Model 360E Instruction Manual
6.8.6. Range Units
The M360E can display concentrations in parts per billion (109 mols per mol, PPB), parts per million (106 mols
per mol, PPM), micrograms per cubic meter (µg/m3, UG), milligrams per cubic meter (mg/m3, MG) or percent
(volume CO2/volume sample gas, %). Changing units affects all of the display, analog outputs, COM port and
iDAS values for all reporting ranges regardless of the analyzer’s range mode.
NOTE
Concentrations displayed in mg/m3 and ug/m3 use 0C, 760 mmHg for Standard
Temperature and Pressure (STP). Consult your local regulations for the STP used by
your agency.
Conversion factors from volumetric to mass units are:
CO2: ppb x 1.96 = µg/m3; ppm x 1.96 = mg/m3
To change the concentration units:
SAMPLE
RANGE = 500.00 PPB
CO2=X.XXX
< TST TST > CAL
SETUP
SETUP X.X
PRIMARY SETUP MENU
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE
EXIT
EXIT
EXIT returns
to the main menu.
SETUP X.X
RANGE CONTROL MENU
MODE SET UNIT
SETUP X.X
CONC UNITS: PPM
Select the preferred
concentration unit.
PPM PPB UGM MGM
%
ENTER EXIT
ENTER EXIT
ENTR accepts
the new unit,
EXIT returns
to the SETUP
menu.
SETUP X.X
CONC UNITS: %
PPM PPB UGM MGM
%
NOTE
Once the units of measurement have been changed the unit MUST be recalibrated, as
the “expected span values” previously in effect will no longer be valid. Simply entering
new expected span values without running the entire calibration routine is not
sufficient.
82
05232 Rev B3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
Operating Instructions
6.8.7. Dilution Ratio
The dilution ratio is a software option that allows the user to compensate for any dilution of the sample gas
before it enters the sample inlet. Using the dilution ratio option is a 4-step process:
1. Select reporting range units: Follow the procedure in Section 6.8.6.
2. Select the range: Use the procedures in Sections 6.8.2 – 6.8.5. Make sure that the SPAN value entered
is the maximum expected concentration of the undiluted calibration gas and that the span gas is either
supplied through the same dilution inlet system as the sample gas or has an appropriately lower actual
concentration. For example, with a dilution set to 100, a 10 ppm gas can be used to calibrate a 1000
ppm sample gas if the span gas is not routed through the dilution system. On the other hand, if a 1000
ppm span gas is used, it needs to pass through the same dilution steps as the sample gas.
3. Set the dilution factor as a gain (e.g., a value of 20 means 20 parts diluting gas and 1 part of sample
gas):
SAMPLE
RANGE = 500.000 PPM
CO2 =X.XXX
< TST TST > CAL
SETUP
SETUP C.3
PRIMARY SETUP MENU
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE
EXIT
EXIT
SETUP C.3
RANGE CONTROL MENU
DIL only appears
if the dilution ratio
option has been
installed
MODE SET UNIT DIL
EXIT ignores the
new setting.
SETUP C.3
DIL FACTOR: 1.0 GAIN
.0 ENTR
ENTR accepts the
Toggle these keys to set the dilution
factor.
new setting.
0
0
0
1
EXIT
This is the number by which the
analyzer will multiply the CO2
concentrations of the gas passing
through the reaction cell.
SETUP C.3
DIL FACTOR: 20.0 GAIN
.0 ENTR
0
0
2
0
EXIT
The analyzer multiplies the measured gas concentrations with this dilution factor and displays the result.
NOTE
Once the above settings have been entered, the instrument needs to be recalibrated
using one of the methods discussed in Chapter 7.
05232 Rev B3
83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Instructions
Model 360E Instruction Manual
6.9. SETUP PASS: Password Feature
The M360E provides password protection of the calibration and setup functions to prevent unauthorized
adjustments. When the passwords have been enabled in the PASS menu item, the system will prompt the user
for a password anytime a password-protected function is requested.
There are three levels of password protection, which correspond to operator, maintenance, and configuration
functions. Each level allows access to all of the functions in the previous level.
Table 6-9: Password Levels
PASSWORD
No password
101
LEVEL
MENU ACCESS ALLOWED
TEST, MSG, CLR
Operator
Maintenance
Configuration
CAL, CALZ, CALS
818
SETUP, VARS, DIAG
To enable or disable passwords, press the following keystroke sequence:
Example: If all passwords are enabled, the following keypad sequence would be required to enter the SETUP
menu:
SAMPLE
RANGE = 500.000 PPM
CO2 =X.XXX
< TST TST > CAL
SETUP
prompts for password
number
See Table 6-8 for
Passwords and Levels
SAMPLE
ENTER SETUP PASS: 0
ENTR EXIT
0
0
0
8
Example: this
password enables the
SETUP mode
SAMPLE
ENTER SETUP PASS: 0
Press individual
keys to set
numbers
8
1
ENTR EXIT
SETUP X.X
PRIMARY SETUP MENU
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE
EXIT
Note that the instrument still prompts for a password when entering the VARS and DIAG menus, even if
passwords are disabled, but it displays the default password (818) upon entering these menus. The user only
has to press ENTR to access the password-protected menus but does not have to enter the required number
code.
84
05232 Rev B3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
Operating Instructions
6.10. SETUP CLK: Setting the Internal Time-of-Day Clock
The M360E has a time of day clock that supports the AutoCal timer, time of day TEST function, and time stamps
on most COM port messages. To set the time-of-day, press:
SAMPLE
RANGE = 500.000 PPM
CO2 =X.XXX
< TST TST > CAL
SETUP
SETUP X.X
PRIMARY SETUP MENU
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE
EXIT
SETUP X.X
TIME-OF-DAY CLOCK
Enter Current
Time-of-Day
Enter Current
Date-of-Year
TIME DATE
EXIT
SETUP X.X
DATE: 01-JAN-02
SETUP X.X
TIME: 12:00
0
1
JAN
0
2
ENTR EXIT
1
2
: 0
0
ENTR EXIT
SETUP X.X
JAN
DATE: 01-JAN-02
SETUP X.X3
: 0
TIME: 12:00
0
1
0
2
ENTR EXIT
1
2
0
ENTR EXIT
SETUP X.X
TIME-OF-DAY CLOCK
TIME DATE
SETUP X.X
EXIT
PRIMARY SETUP MENU
EXIT returns
to the main
SAMPLE display
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE
EXIT
In order to compensate for CPU clocks which run faster or slower, you can adjust a variable called CLOCK_ADJ
to speed up or slow down the clock by a fixed amount every day. To change this variable, press:
SAMPLE
RANGE = 500.000 PPM
CO2 =X.XXX
SETUPX.X
1 ) CONC_PRECISION = 3
EDIT PRNT EXIT
< TST TST > CAL
SETUP
PREV NEXT JUMP
SETUP X.X
PRIMARY SETUP MENU
Continue to press NEXT until …
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE
EXIT
SETUP X.X
4) CLOCK_ADJ=0 Sec/Day
JUMP EDIT PRNT EXIT
SETUP X.X
SECONDARY SETUP MENU
PREV
COMM VARS DIAG
EXIT
SETUP X.X
CLOCK_ADJ:0 Sec/Day
ENTR EXIT
SETUP X.X
0 ) DAS_HOLD_OFF=15.0 Minutes
+
0
0
NEXT JUMP
EDIT PRNT EXIT
Enter sign and number of seconds per
day the clock gains (-) or loses (+).
SETUP X.X
4) CLOCK_ADJ=0 Sec/Day
PREV NEXT JUMP
EDIT PRNT EXIT
3x EXIT returns
to the main SAMPLE display
05232 Rev B3
85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Instructions
Model 360E Instruction Manual
6.11. SETUP MORE COMM: Using the Analyser’s
Communication Ports
The M360E is equipped with two serial communication ports located on the rear panel (Figure 3-2). Both ports
operate similarly and give the user the ability to communicate with, issue commands to, and receive data from
the analyzer through an external computer system or terminal. By default, both ports operate on the RS-232
protocol.
The COM1 port can also be configured to operate in single or RS-232 multidrop mode (option 62; See
Section 5.5.2 and 6.11.7).
The COM2 port can be configured for standard RS-232 operation, half-duplex RS-485 communication or
for access via an LAN by installing the Teledyne Instruments Ethernet interface card (option 63; See
Section 5.5.3 and 6.11.6).
A code-activated switch (CAS), can also be used on either port to connect typically between 2 and 16
send/receive instruments (host computer(s) printers, data loggers, analyzers, monitors, calibrators, etc.) into one
communications hub. Contact Teledyne Instruments sales for more information on CAS systems.
6.11.1. Analyzer ID
Each type of Teledyne Instruments analyzer is configured with a default ID code. The default ID code for all
M360M analyzers is 360. The ID number is only important if more than one analyzer is connected to the same
communications channel such as when several analyzers are on the same Ethernet LAN (See Section 6.11.6);
in a RS-232 multidrop chain (See Section 6.11.7) or operating over a RS-485 network (See Section 6.11.3). If
two analyzers of the same model type are used on one channel, the ID codes of one or both of the instruments
needs to be changed so
To edit the instrument’s ID code, press:
SAMPLE*
RANGE = 500.000 PPM
CO2 =X.XXX
< TST TST > CAL
SETUP
SETUP X.X
PRIMARY SETUP MENU
SETUP X.X
COMMUNICATIONS MENU
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE
EXIT
ID INET COM1
EXIT
Toggle these keys to
cycle through the
available character set:
0-9
ENTR key accepts the
SETUP X.
MACHINE ID: 360 ID
new settings
EXIT key ignores the new
0
2
0
0
ENTR EXIT
settings
The ID number is only important if more than one analyzer is connected to the same communications channel
(e.g., a multi-drop setup). Different models of Teledyne Instruments analyzers have different default ID
numbers, but if two analyzers of the same model type are used on one channel (for example, two M360E’s), the
ID of one instrument needs to be changed.
The ID can also be used for to identify any one of several analyzers attached to the same network but situated in
different physical locations.
86
05232 Rev B3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
Operating Instructions
6.11.2. COMM Port Default Settings
Received from the factory, the analyzer is set up to emulate a DCE or modem, with pin 3 of the DB-9 connector
designated for receiving data and pin 2 designated for sending data.
COM1: RS-232 (fixed) DB-9 male connector.
o
o
o
Baud rate: 19200 bits per second (baud).
Data Bits: 8 data bits with 1 stop bit.
Parity: None.
COM2: RS-232 (configurable), DB-9 female connector.
o
o
o
Baud rate: 115000 bits per second (baud).
Data Bits: 8 data bits with 1 stop bit.
Parity: None.
NOTE
Cables that appear to be compatible because of matching connectors may incorporate
internal wiring that make the link inoperable. Check cables acquired from sources other
than Teledyne Instruments for pin assignments before using.
In its default configuration, the M360E analyzer has two available RS-232 Com ports accessible via 2 DB-9
connectors on the back panel of the instrument. The COM1 connector is a male DB-9 connector and the COM2
is a female DB9 connector.
Female DB-9 (COM2)
(As seen from outside analyzer)
Male DB-9 (RS-232)
(As seen from outside analyzer)
TXD
TXD
GND
GND
RXD
RXD
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
6
7
8
9
CTS
CTS
RTS
RTS
(DTE mode)
(DTE mode)
RXD
GND
TXD
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
RTS
CTS
(DCE mode)
Figure 6-8: Back Panel connector Pin-Outs for COM1 & COM2 in RS-232 mode.
05232 Rev B3
87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Instructions
Model 360E Instruction Manual
The signals from these two connectors are routed from the motherboard via a wiring harness to two 10-pin
connectors on the CPU card, CN3 (COM1) and CN4 (COM2).
CN3 & CN4
(Located on CPU card)
CTS
RTS
10
RXD
2
4
3
6
5
8
7
1
9
GND
TXD
(As seen from inside analyzer)
Figure 6-9: CPU connector Pin-Outs for COM1 & COM2 in RS-232 mode.
Teledyne Instruments offers two mating cables, one of which should be applicable for your use.
Part number WR000077, a DB-9 female to DB-9 female cable, 6 feet long. Allows connection of COM1
with the serial port of most personal computers. Also available as Option 60 (See Section 5.5.1).
Part number WR000024, a DB-9 female to DB-25 male cable. Allows connection to the most common
styles of modems (e.g. Hayes-compatible) and code activated switches.
Both cables are configured with straight-through wiring and should require no additional adapters.
To assist in properly connecting the serial ports to either a computer or a modem, there are activity indicators
just above the RS-232 port. Once a cable is connected between the analyzer and a computer or modem, both
the red and green LEDs should be on. If the lights for COM 1 are not lit, use small switch on the rear panel to
switch it between DTE and DCE modes (See
Section 6.11.4). If both LEDs are still not illuminated, check the cable for proper wiring.
88
05232 Rev B3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
Operating Instructions
6.11.3. RS-485 Configuration of COM2
As delivered from the factory, COM2 is configured for RS-232 communications. This port can be re-configured
for operation as a non-isolated, half-duplex RS-485 port capable of supporting up to 32 instruments with a
maximum distance between the host and the furthest instrument being 4000 feet. If you require full-duplex or
isolated operation, please contact Teledyne Instruments Customer Service.
To reconfigure COM2 as an RS-285 port set switch 6 of SW1 to the ON position (see Figure 6-10).
The RS-485 port can be configured with or without a 150 Ω termination resistor. To include the resistor,
install jumper at position JP3 on the CPU board (see Figure 6-10). To configure COM2 as an un-
terminated RS-485 port leave JP3 open.
CN4
COM2 – RS-232
CN3
COM1 – RS-232
JP3
CN5
COM2 – RS-485
SW1
Pin 6
Figure 6-10: CPU card Locations of RS-232/486 Switches, Connectors and Jumpers
05232 Rev B3
89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Instructions
Model 360E Instruction Manual
When COM2 is configured for RS-485 operation the port uses the same female DB-9 connector on the back of
the instrument as when Com2 is configured for RS-232 operation, however, the pin assignments are different.
Female DB-9 (COM2)
(As seen from outside analyzer)
RX/TX-
GND
RX/TX+
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
(RS-485)
Figure 6-11: Back Panel connector Pin-Outs for COM2 in RS-485 mode.
The signal from this connector is routed from the motherboard via a wiring harness to a 6-pin connector on the
CPU card, CN5.
CN5
(Located on CPU card)
RX/TX
-
GND
RX/TX+
2
1
4
3
6
5
(As seen from inside analyzer)
Figure 6-12: CPU connector Pin-Outs for COM2 in RS-485 mode.
6.11.4. DTE and DCE Communication
RS-232 was developed for allowing communications between data terminal equipment (DTE) and data
communication equipment (DCE). Basic terminals always fall into the DTE category whereas modems are
always considered DCE devices. The difference between the two is the pin assignment of the Data Receive and
Data Transmit functions. DTE devices receive data on pin 2 and transmit data on pin 3; DCE devices receive
data on pin 3 and transmit data on pin 2.
To allow the analyzer to be used with terminals (DTE), modems (DCE) and computers (which can be either), a
switch mounted below the serial ports on the rear panel allows the user to switch between the two functions.
90
05232 Rev B3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
Operating Instructions
6.11.5. COMM Port Communication Modes
Each of the analyzer’s serial ports can be configured to operate in a number of different modes, listed in Table 6-
10 which can be combined by adding the mode ID numbers. For example, quiet mode, computer mode and
internet-enabled mode would carry a combined mode ID of 11, the standard configuration on the M360E COM2
port. Note that each COM port needs to be configured independently.
Table 6-10: COMM Port Communication modes
MODE1
QUIET
ID
1
DESCRIPTION
Quiet mode suppresses any feedback from the analyzer (iDAS reports, and warning
messages) to the remote device and is typically used when the port is communicating
with a computer program such as APICOM. Such feedback is still available but a
command must be issued to receive them.
COMPUTER
SECURITY
Computer mode inhibits echoing of typed characters and is used when the port is
communicating with a computer program, such as APICOM.
2
4
When enabled, the serial port requires a password before it will respond. The only
command that is active is the help screen (? CR).
HESSEN
PROTOCOL
The Hessen communications protocol is used in some European countries. Teledyne
Instruments part number 02252 contains more information on this protocol.
16
E, 7, 1
When turned on this mode switches the COMM port settings
from
No parity; 8 data bits; 1 stop bit
to
2048
Even parity; 7 data bits; 1 stop bit
RS-485
Configures the COM2 Port for RS-485 communication. RS-485 mode has precedence
over multidrop mode if both are enabled.
1024
32
MULTIDROP
PROTOCOL
Multidrop protocol allows a multi-instrument configuration on a single communications
channel. Multidrop requires the use of instrument IDs.
ENABLE
MODEM
Enables to send a modem initialization string at power-up. Asserts certain lines in the
RS-232 port to enable the modem to communicate.
64
ERROR
Fixes certain types of parity errors at certain Hessen protocol installations.
CHECKING2
128
256
XON/XOFF
Disables XON/XOFF data flow control also known as software handshaking.
HANDSHAKE2
HARDWARE
HANDSHAKE
Enables CTS/RTS style hardwired transmission handshaking. This style of data
transmission handshaking is commonly used with modems or terminal emulation
protocols as well as by Teledyne Instrument’s APICOM software.
8
HARDWARE
FIFO2
Improves data transfer rate when on of the COMM ports.
512
COMMAND
PROMPT
Enables a command prompt when in terminal mode.
4096
1 Modes are listed in the order in which they appear in the
SETUP MORE COMM COM[1 OR 2] MODE menu
2 The default sting for this feature is ON. Do not disable unless instructed to by Teledyne Instruments Customer Service
personnel.
05232 Rev B3
91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Instructions
Model 360E Instruction Manual
Press the following keys to select a communication mode for a one of the COMM Ports, such as the following
example where HESSEN PROTOCOL mode is enabled:
SAMPLE*
RANGE = 500.000 PPM
CO2 =X.XXX
< TST TST > CAL
SETUP
SETUP X.X
PRIMARY SETUP MENU
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE
EXIT
EXIT returns to
the previous
menu
SETUP X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU
COMM VARS DIAG ALRM
EXIT
EXIT
EXIT
SETUP X.X
COMMUNICATIONS MENU
Select which COM port
to configure
ID COM1 COM2
The sum of the mode
IDs of the selected
modes is displayed here
SETUP X.X
SET> EDIT
COM1 MODE:0
SETUP X.X
COM1 QUIET MODE: OFF
ENTR EXIT
NEXT OFF
Continue pressing next until …
SETUP X.X COM1 HESSEN PROTOCOL : OFF
Use PREV and NEXT keys
to move between available
modes.
PREV NEXT OFF
ENTR EXIT
A mode is enabled by
toggling the ON/OFF key.
ENTR key accepts the
SETUP X.X COM1 HESSEN PROTOCOL : ON
new settings
EXIT key ignores the new
PREV NEXT ON
ENTR EXIT
settings
Continue pressing the NEXT and PREV keys to select any other
modes you which to enable or disable
92
05232 Rev B3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
Operating Instructions
6.11.6. Ethernet Card Configuration
When equipped with the optional Ethernet interface, the analyzer can be connected to any standard 10BaseT
Ethernet network via low-cost network hubs, switches or routers. The interface operates as a standard TCP/IP
device on port 3000. This allows a remote computer to connect through the internet to the analyzer using
APICOM, terminal emulators or other programs.
The firmware on board the Ethernet card automatically sets the communication modes and baud rate (115 200
kBaud) for the COM2 port. Once the Ethernet option is installed and activated, the COM2 submenu is replaced
by a new submenu, INET. This submenu is used to manage and configure the Ethernet interface with your LAN
or Internet Server(s).
The card has four LEDs that are visible on the rear panel of the analyzer, indicating its current operating status.
Table 6-11: Ethernet Status Indicators
LED
LNK (green)
ACT (yellow)
TxD (green)
RxD (yellow)
FUNCTION
ON when connection to the LAN is valid.
Flickers on any activity on the LAN.
Flickers when the RS-232 port is transmitting data.
Flickers when the RS-232 port is receiving data.
6.11.6.1. Ethernet Card COM2 Communication Modes and Baud Rate
The firmware on board the Ethernet card automatically sets the communication modes for the COM2 port. The
baud rate is also automatically set at 115 200 kBaud.
6.11.6.2. Configuring the Ethernet Interface Option using DHCP
The Ethernet option for you M360E uses Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) to automatically
configure its interface with your LAN. This requires your network servers also be running DHCP. The analyzer
will do this the first time you turn the instrument on after it has been physically connected to your network. Once
the instrument is connected and turned on it will appear as an active device on your network without any extra
set up steps or lengthy procedures.
Should you need to, the Ethernet configuration properties are viewable via the analyzer’s front panel See Table
6-12.
05232 Rev B3
93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Instructions
Model 360E Instruction Manual
Table 6-12: LAN/Internet Configuration Properties
PROPERTY
DEFAULT STATE
On Editable
DESCRIPTION
This displays whether the DHCP is turned ON or OFF.
DHCP STATUS
EDIT key
disabled when
DHCP is ON
INSTRUMENT
IP ADDRESS
Configured by
DHCP
This string of four packets of 1 to 3 numbers each (e.g.
192.168.76.55.) is the address of the analyzer itself.
EDIT key
A string of numbers very similar to the Instrument IP
GATEWAY IP
ADDRESS
Configured by
DHCP
disabled when address (e.g. 192.168.76.1.) that is the address of the
DHCP is ON
computer used by your LAN to access the Internet.
Also a string of four packets of 1 to 3 numbers each (e.g.
255.255.252.0) that defines that identifies the LAN the
device is connected to.
EDIT key
disabled when
DHCP is ON
Configured by
DHCP
All addressable devices and computers on a LAN must
have the same subnet mask. Any transmissions sent
devices with different assumed to be outside of the LAN
and are routed through gateway computer onto the
Internet.
SUBNET MASK
This number defines the terminal control port by which
the instrument is addressed by terminal emulation
software, such as Internet or Teledyne Instruments’
APICOM.
TCP PORT
3000
Editable
Editable
The name by which your analyzer will appear when
addressed from other computers on the LAN or via the
Internet. While the default setting for all Teledyne
Instruments M360E analyzers is “m360e” the host name
may be changed to fit customer needs.
HOST NAME
M360E
1 Do not change the setting for this property unless instructed to by Teledyne Instruments Customer Service
personnel.
NOTE
It is a good idea to check these settings the first time you power up your analyzer after
it has been physically connected to the LAN/Internet to make sure that the DHCP has
successfully downloaded the appropriate information from you network server(s).
If the gateway IP, instrument IP and the subnet mask are all zeroes (e.g. “0.0.0.0”),
the DCHP was not successful.
You may have to manually configure the analyzer’s Ethernet properties.
See your network administrator.
94
05232 Rev B3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
Operating Instructions
To view the above properties, press:
SAMPLE*
RANGE = 500.000 PPM
CO2 =X.XXX
SETUP X.X
DHCP: ON
< TST TST > CAL
SETUP
SET> EDIT
EXIT
EXIT
SETUP X.X
INST IP: 0.0.0.0
SETUP X.X
PRIMARY SETUP MENU
<SET SET>
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE
EXIT
EXIT
SETUP X.X GATEWAY IP: 0.0.0.0
SETUP X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU
EDIT Key
Disabled
<SET SET>
EXIT
COMM VARS DIAG
SETUP X.X SUBNET MASK: 0.0.0.0
SETUP X.X
ID INET
COMMUNICATIONS MENU
<SET SET>
EXIT
EXIT
EXIT
COM1
EXIT
SETUP X.X
TCP PORT: 3000
SAMPLE
ENTER SETUP PASS : 818
8
<SET SET> EDIT
8
1
ENTR EXIT
SETUP X.X HOSTNAME: M200EH
From this point on,
EXIT returns to
COMMUNICATIONS
MENU
<SET
EDIT
Do not alter unless
directed to by Teledyne
Instruments Customer
Service personnel
05232 Rev B3
95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Instructions
Model 360E Instruction Manual
6.11.6.3. Manually Configuring the Network IP Addresses
There are several circumstances when you may need to manually configure the interface settings of the
analyzer’s Ethernet card. The INET sub-menu may also be used to edit the Ethernet card’s configuration
properties
Your LAN is not running a DHCP software package,
The DHCP software is unable to initialize the analyzer’s interface;
You wish to program the interface with a specific set of IP addresses that may not be the ones
automatically chosen by DHCP.
Editing the Ethernet Interface properties is a two step process.
STEP 1: Turn DHCP OFF: While DHCP is turned ON, the ability to manually set INSTRUMENT IP, GATEWAY
IP and SUBNET MASK is disabled
SAMPLE
ENTER SETUP PASS : 818
8
SAMPLE*
RANGE = 500.000 PPM
CO2 =X.XXX
8
1
ENTR EXIT
< TST TST > CAL
SETUP
SETUP X.X
DHCP: ON
SETUP X.X
PRIMARY SETUP MENU
<SET SET> EDIT
EXIT
ENTR EXIT
ENTR EXIT
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE
EXIT
EXIT
SETUP X.X
DHCP: ON
SETUP X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU
ON
COMM VARS DIAG
SETUP X.X
DHCP: ON
SETUP X.X
ID INET
COMMUNICATIONS MENU
COM1
OFF
EXIT
ENTR accept
new settings
Continue with editing of Ethernet interface
properties (see Step 2, below).
EXIT ignores
new settings
96
05232 Rev B3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
Operating Instructions
STEP 2: Configure the INSTRUMENT IP, GATEWAY IP and SUBNET MASK addresses by pressing:
Internet Configuration Keypad Functions
From Step 1 above)
KEY
[0]
FUNCTION
Press this key to cycle through the range of
numerals and available characters (“0 – 9” & “ . ”)
<CH CH>
DEL
Moves the cursor one character left or right.
Deletes a character at the cursor location.
SETUP X.X
DHCP: OFF
Accepts the new setting and returns to the previous
menu.
ENTR
EXIT
SET> EDIT
EXIT
EXIT
Ignores the new setting and returns to the previous
menu.
Some keys only appear as needed.
SETUP X.X INST IP: 000.000.000.000
<SET SET> EDIT
Cursor
location is
indicated by
brackets
SETUP X.X INST IP: [0] 00.000.000
<CH CH>
DEL [0]
ENTR EXIT
SETUP X.X GATEWAY IP: 000.000.000.000
<SET SET> EDIT
EXIT
SETUP X.X GATEWAY IP: [0] 00.000.000
<CH CH> DEL [?] ENTR EXIT
SETUP X.X SUBNET MASK:255.255.255.0
<SET SET> EDIT
EXIT
SETUP X.X SUBNET MASK:[2]55.255.255.0
<CH CH> DEL [?] ENTR EXIT
SETUP X.X TCP PORT 3000
<SET
EDIT
EXIT
The PORT number needs to remain at 3000.
Do not change this setting unless instructed to by
Teledyne Instruments Customer Service personnel.
Pressing EXIT from
any of the above
display menus
causes the Ethernet
option to reinitialize
its internal interface
firmware
SETUP X.X
INITIALIZING INET 0%
…
INITIALIZING INET 100%
SETUP X.X
INITIALIZATI0N SUCCEEDED
SETUP X.X
INITIALIZATION FAILED
Contact your IT
Network Administrator
SETUP X.X
ID INET
COMMUNICATIONS MENU
COM1
EXIT
05232 Rev B3
97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Instructions
Model 360E Instruction Manual
6.11.6.4. Changing the Analyzer’s HOSTNAME
The HOSTNAME is the name by which the analyzer appears on your network. The default name for all
Teledyne Instruments Model 360E analyzers is M360E. To change this name (particularly if you have more than
one Model 360E analyzer on your network), press.
SAMPLE*
RANGE = 500.000 PPM
CO2 =X.XXX
SETUP X.X
DHCP: ON
< TST TST > CAL
SETUP
SET> EDIT
EXIT
Continue pressing SET> UNTIL …
SETUP X.X
PRIMARY SETUP MENU
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE
EXIT
EXIT
SETUP X.X HOSTNAME: 360E
<SET EDIT
SETUP X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU
EXIT
COMM VARS DIAG ALRM
SETUP X.X HOSTNAME: [M]360E
SETUP X.X
ID INET
COMMUNICATIONS MENU
<CH CH> INS DEL [?]
ENTR EXIT
COM1
EXIT
Use these keys (See Table 6-19)
to edit HOSTNAME
SAMPLE
ENTER SETUP PASS : 818
8
SETUP X.X HOSTNAME: 360E-FIELD1
8
1
ENTR EXIT
<SET
EDIT
EXIT
SETUP X.X
INITIALIZING INET 0%
…
INITIALIZING INET 100%
SETUP X.X
INITIALIZATI0N SUCCEEDED
SETUP X.X
INITIALIZATION FAILED
SETUP X.X
ID INET
COMMUNICATIONS MENU
Contact your IT Network
Administrator
COM1
EXIT
Table 6-13: Internet Configuration Keypad Functions
FUNCTION
KEY
<CH
CH>
INS
DEL
[?]
Moves the cursor one character to the left.
Moves the cursor one character to the right.
Inserts a character before the cursor location.
Deletes a character at the cursor location.
Press this key to cycle through the range of numerals and characters available for insertion.
0-9, A-Z, space ’ ~ ! # $ % ^ & * ( ) - _ = +[ ] { } < >\ | ; : , . / ?
ENTR
EXIT
Accepts the new setting and returns to the previous menu.
Ignores the new setting and returns to the previous menu.
Some keys only appear as needed.
98
05232 Rev B3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
Operating Instructions
6.11.7. Multidrop RS-232 Set Up
The RS-232 multidrop consists of a printed circuit assembly that plugs onto the CN3, CN4, and CN5 connectors
of the CPU card (see Figures 6-10 and 6-13) and the cabling to connect it to the analyzer’s motherboard. This
PCA includes all circuitry required to enable your analyzer for multidrop operation. It converts the instrument’s
COM1 port to multidrop configuration allowing up to eight analyzers to be connected the same I/O port of the
host computer.
Because both of the DB9 connectors on the analyzer’s back panel are needed to construct the multidrop chain,
COM2 is no longer available for separate RS-232 or RS-485 operation; however, with the addition of an Ethernet
Option (option 63, See Section 5.5.3 and 6.11.6) the COM2 port is available for communication over a 10BaseT
LAN.
JP2
CPU Card
Rear Panel
(as seen from inside)
Cable to
Ethernet
Card
Multidrop
PCA
Cable to
Motherboard
Figure 6-13: Location of JP2 on RS232-Multidrop PCA (option 62)
Each analyzer in the multidrop chain must have:
One Teledyne Instruments option 62 installed.
One 6’ straight-through, DB9 male DB9 Female cable (Teledyne Instruments P/N WR0000101) is
required for each analyzer.
To set up the network, for each analyzer:
4. Turn the analyzer on and change its ID code (See Section 6.11.1) to a unique 4-digit number.
5. Remove the top cover (See Section 3.1) of the analyzer and locate JP2 on the multidrop PCA (see
Figure 6-13)
6. Make sure that the jumpers are in place connection pins 9 10 and 11 12.
7. If the analyzer is to be the last instrument on the chain, make sure a jumper is in place connecting pins
21 22.
05232 Rev B3
99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Instructions
Model 360E Instruction Manual
8. If you are adding an analyzer to the end of an already existing chain, don’t forget to remove JP2, pins 21
22 on the multidrop PCA on the analyzer that was previous the last instrument in the chain.
9. Close the instrument.
10. Using straight-through, DB9 male DB9 Female cables interconnect the host and the analyzers as
shown in Figure 6-14.
NOTE:
Teledyne Instruments recommends setting up the first link, between the Host and the
first analyzer and testing it before setting up the rest of the chain.
KEY:
Host
Female DB9
RS-232 port
Male DB9
Analyzer
Analyzer
Analyzer
Last Analyzer
COM2
COM2
COM2
COM2
RS-232
RS-232
RS-232
RS-232
Make Sure
Jumper between
JP2 pins 21 22
is installed.
Figure 6-14: RS232-Multidrop PCA Host/Analyzer Interconnect Diagram
100
05232 Rev B3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
Operating Instructions
6.11.8. COM Port Baud Rate
To select the baud rate of one of the COM Ports, press:
SAMPLE*
RANGE = 500.000 PPM
CO2 =X.XXX
< TST TST > CAL
SETUP
SETUP X.X
PRIMARY SETUP MENU
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE
EXIT
EXIT
EXIT returns to
the previous
menu
SETUP X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU
COMM VARS DIAG ALRM
SETUP X.X
COMMUNICATIONS MENU
Select which COM port
to configure.
ID COM1 COM2
EXIT
EXIT
EXIT
EXIT
EXIT
SETUP X.X
SET> EDIT
COM1 MODE:0
Press SET> until you
reach COM1 BAUD
RATE
EXAMPLE
SETUP X.X
COM1 BAUD RATE:19200
Use PREV and NEXT
keys to move between
available baud rates.
EXIT key
ignores the
new setting
<SET SET> EDIT
300
1200
4800
SETUP X.X
COM1 BAUD RATE:19200
ENTR
9600
ENTR key
accepts the
new setting
19200
38400
57600
115200
PREV NEXT
SETUP X.X
COM1 BAUD RATE:9600
ENTR
NEXT ON
05232 Rev B3
101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Instructions
Model 360E Instruction Manual
6.11.9. COM Port Testing
The serial ports can be tested for correct connection and output in the COMM menu. This test sends a string of
256 ‘w’ characters to the selected COM port. While the test is running, the red LED on the rear panel of the
analyzer should flicker.
To initiate the test press the following key sequence.
SAMPLE*
RANGE = 500.000 PPM
CO2 =X.XXX
< TST TST > CAL
SETUP
SETUP X.X
PRIMARY SETUP MENU
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE
EXIT
EXIT
SETUP X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU
COMM VARS DIAG
SETUP X.X
ID COM2
COMMUNICATIONS MENU
COM1
Select which
COM port to test.
EXIT
EXIT
EXIT
SETUP X.X
COM1 MODE:0
SET> EDIT
SETUP X.X
COM1 BAUD RATE:19200
<SET SET> EDIT
SETUP X.X
<SET
COM1 : TEST PORT
TEST
EXIT
SETUP X.X
<SET
TRANSMITTING TO COM1
TEST
EXIT returns to
COMM menu
EXIT
Test runs
automatically
102
05232 Rev B3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
Operating Instructions
6.12. SETUP MORE VARS: Internal Variables (VARS)
The M360E has several-user adjustable software variables, which define certain operational parameters.
Usually, these variables are automatically set by the instrument’s firmware, but can be manually re-defined using
the VARS menu. Table 6-14 lists all variables that are available within the 818 password protected level.
Table 6-14: Variable Names (VARS) Revision B.3
ALLOWED
NO.
VARIABLE
DESCRIPTION
VALUES
Changes the internal data acquisition system (iDAS) hold-off
time, which is the duration when data are not stored in the
iDAS because the software considers the data to be
questionable. That is the case during warm-up or just after
the instrument returns from one of its calibration modes to
SAMPLE mode. DAS_HOLD_OFF can be disabled entirely
in each iDAS channel.
Can be between 0.5
and 20 minutes
0
DAS_HOLD_OFF
Default=15 min.
Allows the user to set the number of significant digits to the
CONC_PRECISION right of the decimal point display of concentration and
AUTO, 1, 2, 3, 4
Default=AUTO
1
stability values.
Selects which gas measurement is displayed when the STABIL
test function is selected.
1
STABIL_GAS
CO; CO2 & O2
2
3
Dynamic zero automatically adjusts offset and slope of the
CO2 response when performing a zero point calibration
during an AutoCal (Chapter 7).
DYN_ZERO
DYN_SPAN
CLOCK_ADJ
ON/OFF
Dynamic span automatically adjusts slope and slope of the
CO2 response when performing a zero point calibration
during an AutoCal (Chapter 7).
4
5
ON/OFF
Note that the DYN_ZERO and DYN_SPAN features are not
allowed for applications requiring EPA equivalency.
Adjusts the speed of the analyzer’s clock. Choose the +
sign if the clock is too slow, choose the - sign if the clock is
too fast.
-60 to +60 s/day
1 O2 option is only available in analyzers with o2 sensor options installed.
05232 Rev B3
103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Instructions
Model 360E Instruction Manual
To access and navigate the VARS menu, use the following key sequence.
SAMPLE*
RANGE = 500.000 PPM
CO2 =X.XXX
< TST TST > CAL
SETUP
SETUP X.X
PRIMARY SETUP MENU
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE
EXIT
SETUP X.X
SECONDARY SETUP MENU
COMM VARS DIAG ALRM
EXIT
SAMPLE
ENTER SETUP PASS : 818
EXIT ignores the new setting.
ENTR accepts the new setting.
8
1
8
ENTR EXIT
SETUP X.X
0 ) DAS_HOLD_OFF=15.0 Minutes
SETUP X.X
.0
0)DAS_HOLD_OFF=15.0 Minutes
NEXT JUMP
EDIT PRNT EXIT
1
5
ENTR EXIT
Toggle this keys to change setting
SETUP X.X
1) CONC_PRECUISION : 3
SETUP X.X
1) CONC_PRECUISION : 3
PREV NEXT JUMP
EDIT PRNT EXIT
AUTO
0
1
2
3
4
ENTR EXIT
SETUP X.X
2 ) STABIL_GAS=CO2
Toggle these keys to change setting
PREV NEXT JUMP
EDIT PRNT EXIT
SETUP X.X
2 ) STABIL GAS =CO2
NO NO2 NOX O2
ENTR EXIT
Choose Gas
3) DYN_ZERO=ON
SETUP X.X
3 ) DYN_ZERO=ON
SETUP X.X
PREV NEXT JUMP
EDIT PRNT EXIT
ON
ENTR EXIT
Toggle this keys to change setting
SETUP X.X
4) DYN_SPAN=ON
PREV NEXT JUMP
EDIT PRNT EXIT
SETUP X.X
4) DYN_SPAN=ON
ENTR EXIT
ON
Toggle this keys to change setting
SETUP X.X
5) CLOCK_ADJ=0 Sec/Day
SETUP X.X
5) CLOCK_ADJ=0 Sec/Day
ENTR EXIT
PREV NEXT JUMP
EDIT PRNT EXIT
+
0
0
Toggle tese keys to change setting
104
05232 Rev B3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
Operating Instructions
6.13. SETUP MORE DIAG: Using the Diagnostics Functions
A series of diagnostic tools is grouped together under the SETUPMOREDIAG menu. As these parameters
are dependent on firmware revision (see Menu Tree A-6 in Appendix A). The individual parameters, however,
are explained in more detail in the indicated in 6-15. These tools can be used in a variety of troubleshooting and
diagnostic procedures and are referred to in many places of the maintenance and trouble-shooting s.
Table 6-15: M360E Diagnostic (DIAG) Functions
Front Panel
DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION AND MEANING
Mode Indicator
SIGNAL I/O: Allows observation of all digital and analog signals in
the instrument. Allows certain digital signals such as valves and
heaters to be toggled ON and OFF.
DIAG I/O
6.13.2
6.13.3
ANALOG OUTPUT: When entered, the analyzer performs an analog
output step test. This can be used to calibrate a chart recorder or
to test the analog output accuracy.
DIAG AOUT
ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION: the signal levels of the instruments
analog outputs may be calibrated (either individually or as a
group). Various electronic parameters such as signal span, and
offset are available for viewing and configuration.
DIAG AIO
6.13.4
ELECTRIC TEST: The analyzer is performing an electric test. This
test simulates IR detector signal in a known manner so that the
proper functioning of the sync/demod board can be verified.
DIAG OPTIC
DIAG ELEC
DIAG PCAL
6.13.5
6.13.6
6.13.7
DARK CALIBRATION: The analyzer is performing a dark
calibration procedure. This procedure measures and stores the
inherent dc offset of the sync/demod board electronics.
PRESSURE CALIBRATION: The analyzer records the current
output of the sample gas pressure sensor. This value is used by
the CPU to compensate the CO2 concentration.
FLOW CALIBRATION: This function is used to calibrate the gas flow
output signals of sample gas and ozone supply. These settings
are retained when exiting DIAG.
DIAG FCAL
DIAG TCHN
6.13.8
6.13.9
TEST CHAN OUTPUT: Configures the A4 analog output channel.
05232 Rev B3
105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Instructions
Model 360E Instruction Manual
6.13.1. Accessing the Diagnostic Features
To access the DIAG functions press the following keys:
SAMPLE*
RANGE = 500.00 PPM
CO2 =X.XXX
DIAG
ANALOG I / O CONFIGURATION
< TST TST > CAL
SETUP
PREV
NEXT
NEXT
NEXT
ENTR EXIT
ENTR EXIT
ENTR EXIT
ENTR EXIT
ENTR EXIT
ENTR EXIT
SETUP X.X
PRIMARY SETUP MENU
EXIT returns
to the main
SAMPLE
display
DIAG
ELECTRICAL TEST
DARK CALIBRATION
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE
EXIT
PREV
SETUP X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU
EXIT returns
to the PRIMARY
SETUP MENU
DIAG
COMM VARS DIAG ALRM
EXIT
PREV
SAMPLE
ENTER SETUP PASS: 818
8
DIAG
PRESSURE CALIBRATION
NEXT
8
1
ENTR EXIT
PREV
DIAG
SIGNAL I / O
From this point
forward, EXIT returns
to the
DIAG
FLOW CALIBRATION
TEST CHAN OUTPUT
NEXT
NEXT
ENTR EXIT
ENTR EXIT
PREV
NEXT
NEXT
SECONDARY
SETUP MENU
DIAG
ANALOG OUTPUT
DIAG
PREV
PREV
6.13.2. Signal I/O
The signal I/O diagnostic mode allows reviewing and changing the digital and analog input/output functions of
the analyzer. See Appendix A-4 for a complete list of the parameters available for review under this menu.
NOTE
Any changes of signal I/O settings will remain in effect only until the signal I/O menu
is exited. Exceptions are the ozone generator override and the flow sensor calibration,
which remain as entered when exiting.
106
05232 Rev B3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
Operating Instructions
To enter the signal I/O test mode, press:
SAMPLE
RANGE = 500.000 PPM
CO2 =X.XXX
DIAG
SIGNAL I / O
Use the NEXT & PREV
keys to move between
signal types.
< TST TST > CAL
SETUP
PREV NEXT JUMP
ENTR EXIT
Use the JUMP key to
go directly to a
DIAG I / O
Test Signals Displayed Here
SETUP X.X
PRIMARY SETUP MENU
specific signal
PREV NEXT JUMP
PRNT EXIT
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE
EXIT
See Appendix A-4 for
a complete list of
EXIT returns
to the main
SAMPLE display
available SIGNALS
EXAMPLE
DIAG I / O
JUMP TO: 12
SETUP X.X
SECONDARY SETUP MENU
EXAMPLE:
1
2
ENTR EXIT
Enter 12 to Jump to
12) ST_CONC_VALID
COMM VARS DIAG ALRM
EXIT
DIAG I / O
ST_CONC_VALID = ON
Exit to return
to the
SAMPLE
ENTER SETUP PASS: 818
DIAG menu
PREV NEXT JUMP
ON PRNT EXIT
8
1
8
ENTR EXIT
Pressing the PRNT key will send a formatted printout to the serial port and can be
captured with a computer or other output device.
6.13.3. Analog Output Step Test
This test can be used to check the accuracy and proper operation of the analog outputs. The test forces all four
analog output channels to produce signals ranging from 0% to 100% of the full scale range in 20% increments.
This test is useful to verify the operation of the data logging/recording devices attached to the analyzer.
To begin the Analog Output Step Test press:
DIAG
SIGNAL I / O
SAMPLE
RANGE = 500.000 PPM
CO2 =X.XXX
NEXT
ENTR EXIT
< TST TST > CAL
SETUP
DIAG
ANALOG OUTPUT
SETUP X.X
PRIMARY SETUP MENU
PREV
NEXT
ENTR EXIT
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE
EXIT
Performs
analog output
step test.
DIAG AOUT
0%
ANALOG OUTPUT
ANALOG OUTPUT
SETUP X.X
SECONDARY SETUP MENU
0% - 100%
EXIT
COMM VARS DIAG ALRM
EXIT
Exit-Exit
returns to the
DIAG menu
DIAG AOUT
SETUP X.X
ENTER DIAG PASS: 818
8
1
8
ENTR EXIT
[0%]
EXIT
Pressing the key under “0%” while performing the test will
pause the test at that level. Brackets will appear around
the value: example: [20%] Pressing the same key again
will resume the test.
05232 Rev B3
107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Instructions
Model 360E Instruction Manual
6.13.4. Analog I/O Configuration
The analog I/O functions that are available in the M360E are:
Table 6-16: DIAG - Analog I/O Functions
Function
Sub Menu
AOUTS CALIBRATED: Shows the status of the analog output calibration (YES/NO) and initiates a calibration of all
analog output channels.
CONC_OUT_1
Sets the basic electronic configuration of the A1 analog output (CO2). There are three options:
Range: Selects the signal type (voltage or current loop) and full scale level of the output.
REC_OFS: Allows setting a voltage offset (not available when RANGE is set to CURRent loop.
Auto_CAL: Performs the same calibration as AOUT CALIBRATED, but on this one channel only.
NOTE: Any change to RANGE or REC_OFS requires recalibration of this output.
Same as for CONC_OUT_1 but for analog channel 2 (CO2 )
CONC_OUT_2
TEST OUTPUT
Same as for CONC_OUT_1 but for analog channel 4 (TEST)
AIN CALIBRATED
Shows the calibration status (YES/NO) and initiates a calibration of the analog to digital
converter circuit on the motherboard.
To configure the analyzer’s three analog outputs, set the electronic signal type of each channel and calibrate the
outputs. This consists of:
Selecting an output type (voltage or current, if an optional current output driver has been installed) and
the signal level that matches the input requirements of the recording device attached to the channel, See
Section 6.13.4.1.
Calibrating the output channel. This can be done automatically or manually for each channel, see
Section 6.13.4.2 and 6.13.4.3.
Adding a bipolar recorder offset to the signal, if required (Section 6.13.4.2.)
In its standard configuration, the analyzer’s outputs can be set for the following DC voltages. Each range is
usable from -5% to + 5% of the nominal range.
Table 6-17: Analog Output Voltage Ranges
RANGE
0-0.1 V
0-1 V
MINIMUM OUTPUT
-5 mV
MAXIMUM OUTPUT
+105 mV
-0.05 V
+1.05 V
0-5 V
-0.25 V
+5.25 V
0-10 V
-0.5 V
+10.5 V
The default offset for all ranges is 0 VDC.
108
05232 Rev B3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
Operating Instructions
The following DC current output limits apply to the current loop modules:
Table 6-18: Analog Output Current Loop Range
RANGE
MINIMUM OUTPUT
MAXIMUM OUTPUT
0-20 mA
0 mA
20 mA
These are the physical limits of the current loop modules, typical
applications use 2-20 or 4-20 mA for the lower and upper limits. Please
specify desired range when ordering this option.
The default offset for all ranges is 0 mA.
Pin assignments for the output connector at the rear panel of the instrument are shown in Table 6-19.
ANALOG OUT
A1
A2
A3
A4
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
Table 6-19: Analog Output Pin Assignments
PIN
ANALOG
OUTPUT
VOLTAGE
SIGNAL
CURRENT
SIGNAL
1
2
V Out
I Out +
I Out -
A1
A2
Ground
3
4
V Out
I Out +
I Out -
Ground
5
6
V Out
I Out +
I Out -
A31
A4
Ground
7
8
V Out
I Out +
I Out -
Ground
1 Output A3 is only used when the O2 sensor option is installed
See Figure 3-2 for the location of the analog output connector on the instrument’s rear panel.
05232 Rev B3
109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Instructions
Model 360E Instruction Manual
6.13.4.1. Analog Output Signal Type and Range Span Selection
To select an output signal type (DC Voltage or current) and level for one output channel, activate the ANALOG
I/O CONFIGURATION MENU (See Section 6.13.1) then press:
FROM ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION MENU
DIAG
ANALOG I / O CONFIGURATION
PREV
NEXT
ENTR
EXIT
EXIT
DIAG AIO
AOUTS CALIBRATED: NO
Press SET> to select the
analog output channel to be
configured. Press EDIT to
continue
< SET SET> CAL
DIAG AIO
CONC_OUT_2:5V, CAL
< SET SET> EDIT
EXIT
EXIT
DIAG AIO
CONC_OUT_2 RANGE: 5V
SET> EDIT
DIAG AIOOUTPUT RANGE: 5V
These keys set
the signal level
and type of the
selected channel
0.1V 1V 5V 10V CURR
ENTR EXIT
Pressing ENTR records the new setting
and returns to the previous menu.
Pressing EXIT ignores the new setting and
returns to the previous menu.
DIAG AIOOUTPUT RANGE: 10V
0.1V 1V 5V 10V CURR
ENTR EXIT
6.13.4.2. Analog Output Calibration Mode
The analog outputs can be calibrated automatically or manually. In its default mode, the instrument is
configured for automatic calibration of all channels. Manual calibration should be used for the 0.1V range or in
cases where the outputs must be closely matched to the characteristics of the recording device. Outputs
configured for automatic calibration can be calibrated as a group or individually. Calibration of the analog
outputs needs to be carried out on first startup of the analyzer (performed in the factory as part of the
configuration process) or whenever re-calibration is required.
110
05232 Rev B3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
Operating Instructions
To calibrate the outputs as a group, activate the ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION MENU (See Section 6.13.1),
then press:
STARTING FROM DIAGNOSTIC MENU
(see Section 6.13.1)
DIAG
ANALOG I / O CONFIGURATION
ENTR EXIT
Exit at any time
to return to the
main DIAG
menu
PREV
NEXT
DIAG AIO
AOUTS CALIBRATED: NO
If AutoCal has been
turned off for any
channel, the message
for that channel will be
similar to:
< SET SET> CAL
EXIT
DIAG AIO AUTO CALIBRATING CONC_OUT_1
AUTO CALIBRATING CONC_OUT_2
NOT AUTO CAL
CONC_OUT_1
AUTO CALIBRATING TEST_OUTPUT
If any of the channels have
not been calibrated this
message will read NO.
Exit to return to
the I/O
configuration
menu
DIAG AIO
AOUTS CALIBRATED:
YES
< SET SET> CAL
EXIT
To automatically calibrate a single analog channel, activate the ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION MENU (See
Section 6.13.1), then press:
DIAG
ANALOG I / O CONFIGURATION
NEXT
ENTR EXIT
EXIT to Return
to the main
Sample Display
PREV
DIAG AIO
AOUTS CALIBRATED: NO
<
SET> CAL
EXIT
Press SET> to select the
Analog Output channel to
be configured. Then Press
EDIT to continue
DIAG AIO
CONC_OUT_2:5V, CAL
< SET SET> EDIT
EXIT
EXIT
DIAG AIO
CONC_OUT_2 RANGE: 5V
DIAG AIO
CONC_OUT_2 CALIBRATED: NO
CAL EXIT
SET> EDIT
<SET
DIAG AIO
CONC_OUT_2 REC OFS: 0 mV
DIAG AIO
AUTO CALIBRATING CONC_OUT_2
< SET SET> EDIT
EXIT
DIAG AIO
CONC_OUT_2 AUTO CAL: ON
DIAG AIO
<SET
CONC_OUT_2 CALIBRATED: YES
< SET SET> EDIT
EXIT
CAL
EXIT
05232 Rev B3
111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Instructions
Model 360E Instruction Manual
To select manual output calibration for a particular channel, activate the ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION MENU
(See Section 6.13.1), then press:
DIAG
ANALOG I / O CONFIGURATION
ENTR EXIT
DIAG AIO
CONC_OUT_2 REC OFS: 0 mV
Exit to return to
the main
sample display
PREV
NEXT
< SET SET> EDIT
EXIT
EXIT
DIAG AIO
AOUTS CALIBRATED: NO
DIAG AIO
CONC_OUT_2 AUTO CAL: ON
< SET SET> CAL
EXIT
< SET SET> EDIT
Press SET> to select the analog output channel to
be configured. Then press EDIT to continue
DIAG AIO
CONC_OUT_2 AUTO CAL: ON
DIAG AIO
CONC_OUT_2:5V, CAL
ON
ENTR EXIT
< SET SET> EDIT
EXIT
EXIT
Toggles the
auto cal mode
ON/ OFF for
this analog
output channel
only.
ENTR accepts the new setting
and returns to the previous
menu. EXIT ignores the new
setting and returns to the
previous menu.
DIAG AIO
CONC_OUT_2 RANGE: 5V
SET> EDIT
Now the analog output channels should either be automatically calibrated or they should be set to manual
calibration, which is described next.
6.13.4.3. Manual Analog Output Calibration and Voltage Adjustment
For highest accuracy, the voltages of the analog outputs can be manually calibrated. Calibration is done through
the instrument software with a voltmeter connected across the output terminals (Figure 6-15). Adjustments are
made using the front panel keys by setting the zero-point first and then the span-point (Table 6-20).
The software allows this adjustment to be made in 100, 10 or 1 count increments.
Table 6-20: Voltage Tolerances for Analog Output Calibration
Full Scale
0.1 VDC
1 VDC
Zero Tolerance
±0.0005V
±0.001V
Span Voltage
90 mV
Span Tolerance
±0.001V
900 mV
±0.001V
5 VDC
±0.002V
4500 mV
4500 mV
±0.003V
10 VDC
±0.004V
±0.006V
NOTE
Outputs configured for 0.1V full scale should always be calibrated manually
112
05232 Rev B3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
Operating Instructions
See Table 3-1 for
pin assignments
of Analog Out
connector on the
rear panel
V
+DC Gnd
V OUT +
V OUT -
V IN +
V IN -
Recording
Device
ANALYZER
Figure 6-15: Setup for Calibrating Analog Voltage Outputs
To make these adjustments, the AOUT auto-calibration feature must be turned off (Section 6.13.4.2). Activate
the ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION MENU (See Section 6.13.1), then press:
FROM ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION MENU
DIAG AIO
CONC_OUT_1 RANGE: 5V
DIAG
ANALOG I / O CONFIGURATION
ENTR EXIT
SET> EDIT
EXIT
PREV
NEXT
DIAG AIO
CONC_OUT_1 REC OFS: 0 mV
DIAG AIO
AOUTS CALIBRATED: NO
< SET SET> EDIT
EXIT
EXIT
If AutoCal is ON, go to
Section 6.7.3
< SET SET> CAL
EXIT
DIAG AIO
CONC_OUT_1 AUTO CAL: OFF
Press SET> to select the analog output channel to be
< SET SET> EDIT
configured:
DISPLAYED AS=
CONC_OUT_1 =
CONC_OUT_2 =
TEST OUTPUT =
CHANNEL
A1
A2
A4
DIAG AIO
< SET
CONC_OUT_2 CALIBRATED: NO
CAL
EXIT
DIAG AIO
CONC_OUT_1 :5V, NO CAL
DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_1 VOLT–Z : 0 mV
< SET SET> EDIT
EXIT
U100 UP10 UP DOWN DN10 D100 ENTR EXIT
These keys increase / decrease the analog
output by 100, 10 or 1 counts.
EXIT ignores the
new setting.
ENTR accepts the
Continue adjustments until the voltage measured
at the output of the analyzer and/or the input of
the recording device matches the value in the
upper right hand corner of the display to the
tolerance listed in Table 6-20.
DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_1 VOLT–S : 4500 mV
U100 UP10 UP DOWN DN10 D100 ENTR EXIT
new setting.
The concentration display will not change. Only
the voltage reading of your voltmeter will change.
DIAG AIO
< SET
CONC_OUT_1 CALIBRATED: YES
CAL EXIT
05232 Rev B3
113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Instructions
Model 360E Instruction Manual
6.13.4.4. Current Loop Output Adjustment
A current loop option is available and can be installed as a retrofit for each of the analog outputs of the analyzer
(s 5.2). This option converts the DC voltage analog output to a current signal with 0-20 mA output current. The
outputs can be scaled to any set of limits within that 0-20 mA range. However, most current loop applications
call for either 2-20 mA or 4-20 mA range. All current loop outputs have a +5% over-range. Ranges with the
lower limit set to more than 1 mA (e.g., 2-20 or 4-20 mA) also have a -5% under-range.
To switch an analog output from voltage to current loop after installing the current output printed circuit
assembly, follow the instructions in Section 6.13.4.4 and select CURR from the list of options on the RANGE
menu.
Adjusting the signal zero and span values of the current loop output is done by raising or lowering the voltage of
the respective analog output. This proportionally raises or lowers the current produced by the current loop
option.
Similar to the voltage calibration, the software allows this current adjustment to be made in 100, 10 or 1 count
increments. Since the exact current increment per voltage count varies from output to output and from
instrument to instrument, you will need to measure the change in the current with a current meter placed in
series with the output circuit (Figure 6-16).
See Table 3-1 for
pin assignments of
mA
the Analog Out
connector on the
rear panel.
IN
OUT
V OUT +
V OUT -
I IN +
I IN -
Recording
Device
Analyzer
Figure 6-16: Setup for Calibrating Current Outputs
NOTE
Do not exceed 60 V between current loop outputs and instrument ground.
To adjust the zero and span values of the current outputs, activate the ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION MENU
(See Section 6.13.1), then press:
114
05232 Rev B3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
Operating Instructions
FROM ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION MENU
The instrument attempt to automatically calibrate
the channel … then beep.
DIAG
ANALOG I / O CONFIGURATION
NEXT ENTR
PREV
EXIT
DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2 D/A/ CAL ERROR
EXIT
DIAG AIO
AIN CALIBRATED: NO
EXIT
SET> EDIT
DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2 CURR-Z: 0 mV
U100 UP10 UP DOWN DN10 D100 ENTR EXIT
Press SET> to select the analog output channel
to be configured:.
DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2 ZERO: 27 mV
Increase or decrease the current
output by 100, 10 or 1 counts.
The resulting change in output
voltage is displayed in the upper
line.
U100 UP10 UP DOWN DN10 D100 ENTR EXIT
DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2:CURR, NO CAL
< SET SET> EDIT
EXIT
Continue adjustments until the
correct current is measured with
the current meter.
DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2 SPAN: 10000 mV
DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2 RANGE: CURR
U100 UP10 UP DOWN DN10 D100 ENTR EXIT
<SET SET> EDIT
EXIT
EXIT
DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2 ZERO: 9731 mV
EXIT ignores the
new setting, ENTR
accepts the new
setting.
DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2 CALIBRATED: NO
U100 UP10 UP DOWN DN10 D100 ENTR EXIT
< SET
CAL
DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2 CALIBRATED: YES
DIAG AIO AUTO CALIBRATING CONC_OUT_2
< SET
CAL
EXIT
If a current meter is not available, an alternative method for calibrating the current loop outputs is to connect a
250 1% resistor across the current loop output. Using a voltmeter connected across the resistor, follow the
procedure above but adjust the output to the following values:
Table 6-21: Current Loop Output Calibration with Resistor
Voltage for 2-20 mA
(measured across resistor)
Voltage for 4-20 mA
(measured across resistor)
Full scale
0%
0.5 V
5.0 V
1.0 V
5.0 V
100%
05232 Rev B3
115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Instructions
Model 360E Instruction Manual
6.13.4.5. AIN Calibration
This is the sub-menu to conduct the analog input calibration. This calibration should only be necessary after
major repair such as a replacement of CPU, motherboard or power supplies. Activate the ANALOG I/O
CONFIGURATION MENU (See Section 6.13.1), then press:
STARTING FROM ANALOG I / O CONFIGURATION MENU
Exit at any time to
return to the main
DIAG menu
DIAG
ANALOG I / O CONFIGURATION
ENTR EXIT
PREV
NEXT
Continue pressing SET? until …
DIAG AIO
AIN CALIBRATED: NO
< SET SET> CAL
EXIT
DIAG AIO
CALIBRATING A/D ZERO
Instrument
calibrates
automatically
CALIBRATING A/D SPAN
Exit to return to the
ANALOG I/O
CONFIGURATION
MENU
DIAG AIO
AIN CALIBRATED: YES
< SET SET> CAL
EXIT
116
05232 Rev B3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
Operating Instructions
6.13.5. Electric Test
The electric test function substitutes simulated signals for CO2 MEAS and CO2 REF, generated by circuitry on
the sync/demod board, for the output of the IR photo-detector. While in this mode the user can also view the
same test functions viewable from the main SAMPLE display. When the test is running, the concentration
reported on the front panel display should be 40.0 ppm.
SAMPLE
RANGE = 500.000 PPM
CO2 =X.XXX
< TST TST > CAL
SETUP
SETUP X.X
PRIMARY SETUP MENU
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE
EXIT
EXIT
SETUP X.X
SECONDARY SETUP MENU
COMM VARS DIAG ALRM
SETUP X.X
ENTER DIAG PASS: 818
8
1
8
ENTR EXIT
DIAG
SIGNAL I / O
NEXT
ENTR
EXIT
Repeat Pressing NEXT unti . . .
DIAG
ELECTRIC TEST
PREV NEXT
ENTR
EXIT
DIAG ELEC
RANGE=50.000 PPM
CO2= 40.0
EXIT
Exit returns
to the
DIAG Menu
<TST TST>
Press <TST TST> to view Test Functions
NOTE: CO MEAS and CO REF will be artificially altered to
enforce a CO2 reading of 40.0 ppm.
All other Test Functions will report the correct operational
value
05232 Rev B3
117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Instructions
Model 360E Instruction Manual
6.13.6. Dark Calibration Test
The dark calibration test interrupts the signal path between the IR photo-detector and the remainder of the
sync/demod board circuitry. This allows the instrument to compensate for any voltage levels inherent in the
sync/demod circuitry that might effect the calculation of CO2 concentration. Performing this calibration returns
two offset voltages, One for CO2 MEAS and on for CO2 REF that are automatically added to the CPU’s
calculation routine. The two offset voltages from the last calibration procedure may be reviewed by the user via
the front panel display.
To activate the dark calibration procedure or review the results of a previous calibration, press:
SAMPLE
RANGE = 500.000 PPM
CO2 =X.XXX
< TST TST > CAL
SETUP
SETUP X.X
PRIMARY SETUP MENU
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE
EXIT
EXIT
DIAG
SIGNAL I / O
NEXT
ENTR
EXIT
SETUP X.X
SECONDARY SETUP MENU
COMM VARS DIAG ALRM
Repeat Pressing NEXT until . . .
SETUP X.X
ENTER DIAG PASS: 818
DIAG
DARK CALIBRATION
8
1
8
ENTR EXIT
PREV NEXT
ENTR
EXIT
DIAG DARK
CO DARK CALIBRATION
Exit returns
to the
previous menu
VIEW CAL
EXIT
Calibration runs automatically
Electric offset for Reference signal
Display
tracks %
complete
DIAG DARK
REF DARK OFFSET: 0.0 mV
DIAG DARK
DARK CAL 1% COMPLETE
EXIT
EXIT
EXIT
EXIT
Electric offset for Measurement signal
DIAG DARK
MEAS DARK OFFSET: 0.0 mV
DIAG DARK
DARK CALIBRATION ABORTED
118
05232 Rev B3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
Operating Instructions
6.13.7. Pressure Calibration
A sensor at the exit of the sample chamber continuously measures the pressure of the sample gas. This data is
used to compensate the final CO2 concentration calculation for changes in atmospheric pressure and is stored in
the CPU’s memory as the test function PRES (also viewable via the front panel).
NOTE
This calibration must be performed when the pressure of the sample gas is equal to
ambient atmospheric pressure.
Before performing the following pressure calibration procedure, disconnect the sample
gas pump and the sample gas-line vent from the sample gas inlet on the instrument’s
rear panel.
To cause the analyzer to measure and record a value for PRES, press.
SAMPLE
RANGE = 500.000 PPM
CO2 =X.XXX
< TST TST > CAL
SETUP
SETUP X.X
PRIMARY SETUP MENU
Exit at
any time
to return
to main
the
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE
EXIT
EXIT
SETUP
menu
SETUP X.X
SECONDARY SETUP MENU
COMM VARS DIAG ALRM
SETUP X.X
ENTER DIAG PASS: 818
8
1
8
ENTR EXIT
DIAG
SIGNAL I / O
NEXT
ENTR
EXIT
Repeat Pressing NEXT until . . .
ENTR accepts the
new value and
returns to the
DIAG PCAL ACTUAL PRESS : 27.20 IN-HG-A
previous menu
EXIT ignores the
new value and
returns to the
2
7
.2
0
ENTR EXIT
Adjust these values until the
displayed pressure equals the
pressure measured by the
independent pressure meter.
previous menu
05232 Rev B3
119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Instructions
Model 360E Instruction Manual
6.13.8. Flow Calibration
The flow calibration allows the user to adjust the values of the sample flow rates as they are displayed on the
front panel and reported through COM ports to match the actual flow rate measured at the sample inlet. This
does not change the hardware measurement of the flow sensors, only the software calculated values.
To carry out this adjustment, connect an external, sufficiently accurate flow meter to the sample inlet (see
Chapter 11 for more details). Once the flow meter is attached and is measuring actual gas flow, press:
SAMPLE
RANGE = 500.000 PPM
CO2 =X.XXX
< TST TST > CAL
SETUP
SETUP X.X
PRIMARY SETUP MENU
CFG ACAL DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT
Exit at
any time
to return
to main
the
SETUP X.X
SECONDARY SETUP MENU
COMM VARS DIAG
EXIT
SETUP
menu
SETUP X.X
ENTER DIAG PASS: 818
8
1
8
ENTR EXIT
DIAG
SIGNAL I / O
NEXT
ENTR EXIT
Adjust these values until
the displayed flow rate
equals the flow rate being
measured by the
independent flow meter.
Repeat Pressing NEXT until . . .
DIAG
FLOW CALIBRATION
Exit returns
to the
PREV NEXT
ENTR EXIT
previous menu
DIAG FCAL
ACTUAL FLOW: 654 CC / M
ENTR EXIT
Adjust these values
until the displayed
flow rate equals the
flow rate being
measured by the
independent flow
meter.
ENTR accepts the
new value and
returns to the
previous menu
EXIT ignores the
new value and
returns to the
0
6
5
4
previous menu
120
05232 Rev B3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
Operating Instructions
6.13.9. Test Channel Output
When activated, output channel A4 can be used to report one of the test functions viewable from the SAMPLE
mode display. To activate the A4 channel and select a test function, follow this key sequence:
SAMPLE*
RANGE = 500.000 PPM
CO2 =X.XXX
< TST TST > CAL
SETUP
SETUP X.X
PRIMARY SETUP MENU
Continue to press NEXT until …
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE
EXIT
EXIT
SETUP X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU
DIAG
TEST CHAN OUTPUT
COMM VARS DIAG ALRM
PREV
NEXT
ENTR
EXIT
SETUP X.X
ENTER DIAG PASS: 818
DIAG TCHN
TEST CHANNEL: NONE
8
1
8
ENTR EXIT
NEXT
ENTR
EXIT
DIAG
SIGNAL I / O
DIAG TCHN TEST CHANNEL: CO2 MEASURE
PREV NEXT ENTR
NEXT
ENTR EXIT
ENTR EXIT
EXIT
DIAG
ANALOG OUTPUT
PREV NEXT
Press PREV or NEXT
to move through the
list of available
parameters
Press ENTR to select
Press EXIT to
return to the
DIAG menu
the displayed
parameter activating
the test channel.
(Table 6-13)
Table 6-22: Test Parameters Available for Analog Output A4
TEST CHANNEL
ZERO
FULL SCALE
NONE
Test Channel is turned off
CO2 MEASURE
CO2 REFERENCE
SAMPLE PRESS
SAMPLE FLOW
SAMPLE TEMP
BENCH TEMP
WHEEL TEMP
CHASSIS TEMP
PHT DRIVE
0 mV
0 mV
5000 mV*
5000 mV*
40 "Hg
0 "Hg
0 cc/m
1000 cc/m
0C
0C
70C
70C
0C
70C
0C
70C
0 mV
5000 mV
* This refers to the internal voltage level of the function NOT the output signal level
of the Test channel itself.
05232 Rev B3
121
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Instructions
Model 360E Instruction Manual
6.14. SETUP MORE ALRM: Using the Gas Concentration
Alarms
The Model 360E includes two CO2 concentration alarms. Each alarm has a user settable limit, and is associated
with an opto-isolated TTL relay accessible via the status output connector on the instrument’s back panel (See
Section 6.15.1.1). If the CO2 concentration measured by the instrument rises above that limit, the alarm‘s status
output relay is closed.
The default settings for ALM1 and ALM2 are:
Table 6-23: CO2 Concentration Alarm Default Settings
1
ALARM
STATUS
LIMIT SET POINT
100 ppm
ALM1
ALM2
Disabled
Disabled
300 ppm
1
Set points listed are for PPM. Should the reporting range units of measure be changed (See Section 6.7.6) the
analyzer will automatically scale the set points to match the new range unit setting.
Note
To prevent the concentration alarms from activating during span calibration operations
make sure to press CAL or CALS button prior to introducing span gas into the analyzer.
6.14.1. Setting the Concentration Alarm Limits
To enable either of the CO2 concentration alarms and set the Limit points, press:
SAMPLE*
RANGE = 500.000 PPM
CO2 =X.XXX
< TST TST > CAL
SETUP
SETUP X.X
ALARM MENU
SETUP X.X
PRIMARY SETUP MENU
ALM1 ALM2
EXIT
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE
EXIT
EXIT
SETUP X.
ALARM 1 LIMIT: OFF
SETUP X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU
OFF
ENTR EXIT
COMM VARS DIAG ALRM
SETUP X.
ALARM 1 LIMIT: ON
ON
ENTR EXIT
Toggle these keys to
cycle through the
available character set:
0-9
ENTR key accepts the
SETUP X.
ALARM 1 LIMIT: 200,00 PPM
.0 ENTR EXIT
new settings
EXIT key ignores the new
0
1
0
0
0
settings
122
05232 Rev B3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
Operating Instructions
6.15. Remote Operation of the Analyzer
6.15.1. Remote Operation Using the External Digital I/O
6.15.1.1. Status Outputs
The status outputs report analyzer conditions via optically isolated NPN transistors, which sink up to 50 mA of
DC current. These outputs can be used interface with devices that accept logic-level digital inputs, such as
programmable logic controllers (PLC’s). Each Status bit is an open collector output that can withstand up to 40
VDC. All of the emitters of these transistors are tied together and available at D.
NOTE
Most PLC’s have internal provisions for limiting the current that the input will draw from
an external device. When connecting to a unit that does not have this feature, an
external dropping resistor must be used to limit the current through the transistor
output to less than 50 mA. At 50 mA, the transistor will drop approximately 1.2V from
its collector to emitter.
The status outputs are accessed via a 12-pin connector on the analyzer’s rear panel labeled STATUS. The
function of each pin is defined in Table 6–24.
STATUS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
+
Figure 6-17: Status Output Connector
05232 Rev B3
123
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Instructions
Model 360E Instruction Manual
The pin assignments for the Status Outputs are:
Table 6-24: Status Output Pin Assignments
OUTPUT #
Status Definition
Condition
On if no faults are present.
1
2
SYSTEM OK
On if CO2 concentration measurement is valid.
CONC VALID
If the CO2 concentration measurement is invalid, this bit is OFF.
On if unit is in high range of DUAL or AUTO range modes.
On whenever the instruments zero point is being calibrated.
On whenever the instruments span point is being calibrated.
On whenever the instrument is in diagnostic mode.
3
4
5
6
HIGH RANGE
ZERO CAL
SPAN CAL
DIAG MODE
On whenever the measured CO2 concentration is above the set point for
ALM1
7
8
ALARM1
ALARM2
On whenever the measured CO2 concentration is above the set point for
ALM2
D
+
EMITTER BUSS
DC POWER
The emitters of the transistors on pins 1-8 are bussed together.
+ 5 VDC
Digital Ground
The ground level from the analyzer’s internal DC power supplies.
124
05232 Rev B3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
Operating Instructions
6.15.1.2. Control Inputs
These inputs allow the user to remotely initiate Zero and Span calibrations. Two methods for energizing the
inputs is provided below; the first using the internal +5V available on the CONTROL IN connector and the
second, if an external, isolated supply is employed.
Table 6-25: Control Input Pin Assignments
INPUT
STATUS
CONDITION WHEN ENABLED
EXTERNAL ZERO
CAL
Zero calibration mode is activated. The mode field of the display will
read ZERO CAL R.
A
EXTERNAL SPAN
CAL
Span calibration mode is activated. The mode field of the display will
read SPAN CAL R.
B
C
D
E
F
Unused
Unused
Unused
Unused
DIGITAL GROUND
Provided to ground an external device (e.g., recorder).
DC power for Input
pull ups
Input for +5 VDC required to activate inputs A - F. This voltage can be
taken from an external source or from the “+” pin.
U
+
Internal source of +5V which can be used to activate inputs when
connected to pin U.
Internal +5V Supply
There are two methods to activate control inputs. The internal +5V available from the “+” pin is the most
convenient method (Figure 6-18). However, to ensure that these inputs are truly isolated, a separate, external 5
VDC power supply should be used.
CONTROL IN
CONTROL IN
A
B
C
D
E
F
U
+
A
B
C
D
E
F
U
+
Z
E
R
O
S
P
A
N
Z
E
R
O
S
P
A
N
5 VDC Power
Supply
+
-
External Power Connections
Local Power Connections
Figure 6-18: Control Inputs
05232 Rev B3
125
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Instructions
Model 360E Instruction Manual
6.15.2. Remote Operation Using the External Serial I/O
6.15.2.1. Terminal Operating Modes
The Model 360E can be remotely configured, calibrated or queried for stored data through the serial ports. As
terminals and computers use different communication schemes, the analyzer supports two communicate modes
specifically designed to interface with these two types of devices.
Computer mode is used when the analyzer is connected to a computer with a dedicated interface
program such as APICOM. More information regarding APICOM can be found in later in this or on the
Teledyne Instruments website at http://www.teledyne-api.com/software/apicom/.
Interactive mode is used with a terminal emulation programs such as HyperTerminal or a “dumb”
computer terminal. The commands that are used to operate the analyzer in this mode are listed in Table
6-26.
6.15.2.2. Help Commands in Terminal Mode
Table 6-26: Terminal Mode Software Commands
COMMAND
Control-T
Function
Switches the analyzer to terminal mode (echo, edit). If mode flags 1 & 2 are OFF, the interface
can be used in interactive mode with a terminal emulation program.
Control-C
Switches the analyzer to computer mode (no echo, no edit).
CR
A carriage return is required after each command line is typed into the terminal/computer. The
command will not be sent to the analyzer to be executed until this is done. On personal
computers, this is achieved by pressing the ENTER key.
(carriage return)
BS
Erases one character to the left of the cursor location.
(backspace)
ESC
Erases the entire command line.
(escape)
? [ID] CR
This command prints a complete list of available commands along with the definitions of their
functionality to the display device of the terminal or computer being used. The ID number of
the analyzer is only necessary if multiple analyzers are on the same communications line, such
as the multi-drop setup.
Control-C
Control-P
Pauses the listing of commands.
Restarts the listing of commands.
126
05232 Rev B3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
Operating Instructions
6.15.2.3. Command Syntax
Commands are not case-sensitive and all arguments within one command (i.e. ID numbers, keywords, data
values, etc.) must be separated with a space character.
All Commands follow the syntax:
X [ID] COMMAND <CR>
Where
X
is the command type (one letter) that defines the type of command. Allowed designators
are listed in Table 6-27 and Appendix A-6.
[ID]
is the analyzer identification number (Section 6.11.1.). Example: the Command “? 200”
followed by a carriage return would print the list of available commands for the revision of
software currently installed in the instrument assigned ID Number 200.
COMMAND is the command designator: This string is the name of the command being issued (LIST,
ABORT, NAME, EXIT, etc.). Some commands may have additional arguments that define
how the command is to be executed. Press ? <CR> or refer to Appendix A-6 for a list of
available command designators.
<CR>
is a carriage return. All commands must be terminated by a carriage return (usually
achieved by pressing the ENTER key on a computer).
Table 6-27: Command Types
COMMAND
COMMAND TYPE
Calibration
Diagnostic
C
D
L
Logon
T
Test measurement
Variable
V
W
Warning
6.15.2.4. Data Types
Data types consist of integers, hexadecimal integers, floating-point numbers, Boolean expressions and text
strings.
Integer data are used to indicate integral quantities such as a number of records, a filter length, etc.
They consist of an optional plus or minus sign, followed by one or more digits. For example, +1, -12,
123 are all valid integers.
Hexadecimal integer data are used for the same purposes as integers. They consist of the two
characters “0x,” followed by one or more hexadecimal digits (0-9, A-F, a-f), which is the ‘C’ programming
language convention. No plus or minus sign is permitted. For example, 0x1, 0x12, 0x1234abcd are all
valid hexadecimal integers.
Floating point numbers are used to specify continuously variable values such as temperature set points,
time intervals, warning limits, voltages, etc. They consist of an optional plus or minus sign, followed by
zero or more digits, an optional decimal point, and zero or more digits. (At least one digit must appear
before or after the decimal point.) Scientific notation is not permitted. For example, +1.0, 1234.5678, -
0.1, 1 are all valid floating-point numbers.
05232 Rev B3
127
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Instructions
Model 360E Instruction Manual
Boolean expressions are used to specify the value of variables or I/O signals that may assume only two
values. They are denoted by the keywords ON and OFF.
Text strings are used to represent data that cannot be easily represented by other data types, such as
data channel names, which may contain letters and numbers. They consist of a quotation mark,
followed by one or more printable characters, including spaces, letters, numbers, and symbols, and a
final quotation mark. For example, “a”, “1”, “123abc”, and “()[]<>” are all valid text strings. It is not
possible to include a quotation mark character within a text string.
Some commands allow you to access variables, messages, and other items, such as iDAS data
channels, by name. When using these commands, you must type the entire name of the item; you
cannot abbreviate any names.
6.15.2.5. Status Reporting
Reporting of status messages as an audit trail is one of the three principal uses for the RS-232 interface (the
other two being the command line interface for controlling the instrument and the download of data in electronic
format). You can effectively disable the reporting feature by setting the interface to quiet mode (Section 6.11.5.,
Table 6-10).
Status reports include iDAS data (when reporting is enabled), warning messages, calibration and diagnostic
status messages. Refer to Appendix A-3 for a list of the possible messages, and this for information on
controlling the instrument through the RS-232 interface.
General Message Format
All messages from the instrument (including those in response to a command line request) are in the format:
X DDD:HH:MM [Id] MESSAGE<CRLF>
Where:
X
is a command type designator, a single character indicating the message type, as
shown in the Table 6-27.
DDD:HH:MM is the time stamp, the date and time when the message was issued. It consists of the
Day-of-year (DDD) as a number from 1 to 366, the hour of the day (HH) as a number
from 00 to 23, and the minute (MM) as a number from 00 to 59.
[ID]
is the analyzer ID, a number with 1 to 4 digits.
MESSAGE
is the message content that may contain warning messages, test measurements, iDAS
reports, variable values, etc.
<CRLF>
is a carriage return / line feed pair, which terminates the message.
The uniform nature of the output messages makes it easy for a host computer to parse them into an easy
structure. Keep in mind that the front panel display does not give any information on the time a message was
issued, hence it is useful to log such messages for trouble-shooting and reference purposes. Terminal
emulation programs such as HyperTerminal can capture these messages to text files for later review.
128
05232 Rev B3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
Operating Instructions
6.15.2.6. Remote Access by Modem
The M360E can be connected to a modem for remote access. This requires a cable between the analyzer’s
COM port and the modem, typically a DB-9F to DB-25M cable (available from Teledyne Instruments with part
number WR0000024).
Once the cable has been connected, check to make sure the DTE-DCE is in the correct position. Also make
sure the M360E COM port is set for a baud rate that is compatible with the modem, which needs to operate with
an 8-bit word length with one stop bit.
The first step is to turn on the MODEM ENABLE communication mode (Mode 64, Section 6.11.5). Once this is
completed, the appropriate setup command line for your modem can be entered into the analyzer. The default
setting for this feature is
AT Y0 &D0 &H0 &I0 S0=2 &B0 &N6 &M0 E0 Q1 &W0
This string can be altered to match your modem’s initialization and can be up to 100 characters long.
To change this setting press:
SAMPLE*
RANGE = 500.000 PPM
CO2 =X.XXX
< TST TST > CAL
SETUP
SETUP X.X
SET> EDIT
COM1 MODE:0
EXIT
EXIT
SETUP X.X
PRIMARY SETUP MENU
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE
EXIT
EXIT
SETUP X.X
COM1 BAUD RATE:19200
<SET SET> EDIT
EXIT returns to
the previous
menu
SETUP X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU
COMM VARS DIAG ALRM
SETUP X.X
COM1 MODEM INIT:AT Y &D &H
EXIT
<SET SET> EDIT
SETUP X.X
COMMUNICATIONS MENU
Select which
COM Port is
tested
ENTR accepts the
new string and returns
to the previous menu.
EXIT ignores the new
string and returns to
the previous menu.
ID COM1 COM2
EXIT
SETUP X.X
COM1 MODEM INIT:[A]T Y &D &H
ENTR EXIT
<CH CH> INS DEL [A]
Press the [?]
key repeatedly to cycle through the
available character set:
0-9
The INS key
inserts a character
before the cursor
location.
The DEL key
deletes a character
at the cursor
location.
A-Z
The <CH and CH> keys move
the [ ] cursor left and right
along the text string
space ’ ~ ! # $ % ^ & * ( ) - _ =
+[ ] { } < >\ | ; : , . / ?
05232 Rev B3
129
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Instructions
Model 360E Instruction Manual
To initialize the modem press:
SAMPLE*
RANGE = 500.000 PPM
CO2 =X.XXX
< TST TST > CAL
SETUP
SETUP X.X
SET> EDIT
COM1 MODE:0
EXIT
SETUP X.X
PRIMARY SETUP MENU
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE
EXIT
SETUP X.X
COM1 BAUD RATE:19200
EXIT returns to
the previous
menu
<SET SET> EDIT
EXIT
SETUP X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU
COMM VARS DIAG ALRM
EXIT
SETUP X.X
COM1 MODEM INIT:AT Y &D &H
SETUP X.X
COMMUNICATIONS MENU
<SET SET> EDIT
EXIT
Select which
COM Port is
tested
ID COM1 COM2
EXIT
SETUP X.X
COM1 INITIALIZE MODEM
EXIT
<SET SET> INIT
SETUP X.X
INITIALIZING MODEM
<SET SET> INIT
EXIT
EXIT returns to the
Communications Menu.
6.15.2.7. COM Port Password Security
In order to provide security for remote access of the M360E, a LOGON feature can be enabled to require a
password before the instrument will accept commands. This is done by turning on the SECURITY MODE (Mode
4, Section 6.11.5). Once the SECURITY MODE is enabled, the following items apply.
A password is required before the port will respond or pass on commands.
If the port is inactive for one hour, it will automatically logoff, which can also be achieved with the
LOGOFF command.
Three unsuccessful attempts to log on with an incorrect password will cause subsequent logins to be
disabled for 1 hour, even if the correct password is used.
If not logged on, the only active command is the '?' request for the help screen.
The following messages will be returned at logon:
LOGON SUCCESSFUL - Correct password given
LOGON FAILED - Password not given or incorrect
LOGOFF SUCCESSFUL - Connection terminated successfully
To log on to the model 360E analyzer with SECURITY MODE feature enabled, type:
LOGON 940331
940331 is the default password. To change the default password, use the variable RS232_PASS issued as
follows:
V RS232_PASS=NNNNNN
Where N is any numeral between 0 and 9.
130
05232 Rev B3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
Operating Instructions
6.15.2.8. APICOM Remote Control Program
APICOM is an easy-to-use, yet powerful interface program that allows accessing and controlling any of Teledyne
Instruments’ main line of ambient and stack-gas instruments from a remote connection through direct cable,
modem or Ethernet. Running APICOM, a user can:
Establish a link from a remote location to the M360E through direct cable connection via RS-232 modem or
Ethernet.
View the instrument’s front panel and remotely access all functions that could be accessed when
standing in front of the instrument.
Remotely edit system parameters and set points.
Download, view, graph and save data for predictive diagnostics or data analysis.
Retrieve, view, edit, save and upload iDAS configurations.
Check on system parameters for trouble-shooting and quality control.
APICOM is very helpful for initial setup, data analysis, maintenance and trouble-shooting. Figure 6-5 shows an
example of APICOM being used to remotely configuration the instruments iDAS feature. Figure 6-19 shows
examples of APICOM’s main interface, which emulates the look and functionality of the instruments actual front
panel
Figure 6-19: APICOM Remote Control Program Interface
APICOM is included free of cost with the analyzer and the latest versions can also be downloaded for free at
http://www.teledyne-api.com/software/apicom/.
6.15.3. Additional Communications Documentation
Table 6-28: Serial Interface Documents
INTERFACE / TOOL
DOCUMENT TITLE
PART
AVAILABLE ONLINE*
NUMBER
APICOM
Multi-drop
DAS Manual
APICOM User Manual
039450000
021790000
028370000
YES
YES
YES
RS-232 Multi-drop Documentation
Detailed description of the iDAS.
* These documents can be downloaded at http://www.teledyne-api.com/manuals/
05232 Rev B3
131
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Instructions
Model 360E Instruction Manual
6.15.4. Using the M360E with a Hessen Protocol Network
6.15.4.1. General Overview of Hessen Protocol
The Hessen protocol is a multidrop protocol, in which several remote instruments are connected via a common
communications channel to a host computer. The remote instruments are regarded as slaves of the host
computer. The remote instruments are unaware that they are connected to a multidrop bus and never initiate
Hessen protocol messages. They only respond to commands from the host computer and only when they
receive a command containing their own unique ID number.
The Hessen protocol is designed to accomplish two things: to obtain the status of remote instruments, including
the concentrations of all the gases measured; and to place remote instruments into zero or span calibration or
measure mode. API’s implementation supports both of these principal features.
The Hessen protocol is not well defined, therefore while API’s application is completely compatible with the
protocol itself, it may be different from implementations by other companies.
The following subs describe the basics for setting up your instrument to operate over a Hessen Protocol
network. For more detailed information as well as a list of host computer commands and examples of command
and response message syntax, download the Manual Addendum for Hessen Protocol from the Teledyne
Instruments web site: http://www.teledyne-api.com/manuals/index.asp .
6.15.4.2. Hessen COMM Port Configuration
Hessen protocol requires the communication parameters of the M360E’s COMM ports to be set differently than
the standard configuration as shown in the table below.
Table 6-29: RS-232 Communication Parameters for Hessen Protocol
Parameter
Data Bits
Stop Bits
Parity
Standard
Hessen
7
8
1
2
None
Full
Even
Half
Duplex
To change the rest of the COMM port parameters. See Section 6.11.5.
To change the baud rate of the M360E’s COMM ports, See Section 6.11.8.
NOTE
Make sure that the communication parameters of the host computer are also properly
set.
Also, the instrument software has a 200 ms. Latency before it responds to commands
issued by the host computer. This latency should present no problems, but you should
be aware of it and not issue commands to the instrument too frequently.
132
05232 Rev B3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
Operating Instructions
6.15.4.3. Activating Hessen Protocol
The first step in configuring the M360E to operate over a Hessen protocol network is to activate the Hessen
mode for COMM ports and configure the communication parameters for the port(s) appropriately. Press:
SAMPLE*
RANGE = 500.000 PPM
CO2 =X.XXX
SETUP X.X
COM1 QUIET MODE: OFF
ENTR EXIT
Repeat the entire
process to set up
the COM2 port
< TST TST > CAL
SETUP
NEXT OFF
SETUP X.X
PRIMARY SETUP MENU
Continue pressing next until …
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE
EXIT
EXIT
EXIT
EXIT
SETUP X.X COM1 HESSEN PROTOCOL : OFF
SETUP X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU
PREV NEXT OFF
ENTR EXIT
COMM VARS DIAG
ALRM
Toggle OFF/ON keys to
change
activate/deactivate
SETUP X.X COM1 HESSEN PROTOCOL : ON
SETUP X.X
COMMUNICATIONS MENU
Select which COMM
port to configure
selected mode.
PREV NEXT ON
ENTR EXIT
ID COM1 COM2
The sum of the mode
IDs of the selected
SETUP X.X
COM1 E,7,1 MODE: OFF
SETUP X.X
SET> EDIT
COM1 MODE:0
modes is displayed here
PREV NEXT OFF
ENTR EXIT
SETUP X.X
COM1 E,7,1 MODE: ON
ENTR key accepts the
new settings
EXIT key ignores the new
PREV NEXT ON
ENTR EXIT
settings
6.15.4.4. Selecting a Hessen Protocol Type
Currently there are two versions of Hessen Protocol in use. The original implementation, referred to as TYPE 1,
and a more recently released version, TYPE 2 that has more flexibility when operating with instruments that can
measure more than one type of gas. For more specific information about the difference between TYPE 1and
TYPE 2 download the Manual Addendum for Hessen Protocol from the Teledyne Instruments web site:
http://www.teledyne-api.com/manuals/index.asp .
To select a Hessen Protocol Type press:
SAMPLE*
RANGE = 500.000 PPM
CO2 =X.XXX
< TST TST > CAL
SETUP
SETUP X.X
COMMUNICATIONS MENU
SETUP X.X
PRIMARY SETUP MENU
ID HESN COM1 COM2
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE
EXIT
EXIT
SETUP X.
HESSEN VARIATION: TYPE 1
SETUP X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU
SET> EDIT
EXIT
COMM VARS DIAG ALRM
ENTR key accepts the
new settings
SETUP X.X HESSEN VARIATION: TYPE 1
TYE1 TYPE 2 ENTR EXIT
EXIT key ignores the new
settings
SETUP X.X HESSEN VARIATION: TYPE 2
PREV NEXT OFF ENTR EXIT
Press to change
protocol type.
05232 Rev B3
133
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Instructions
Model 360E Instruction Manual
NOTE
While Hessen Protocol Mode can be activated independently for COM1 and COM2, The
TYPE selection affects both Ports.
6.15.4.5. Setting The Hessen Protocol Response Mode
The Teledyne Instruments implementation of Hessen Protocol allows the user to choose one of several different
modes of response for the analyzer.
Table 6-30: Teledyne Instruments Hessen Protocol Response Modes
MODE ID
CMD
MODE DESCRIPTION
This is the Default Setting. Reponses from the instrument are encoded as the traditional command format.
Style and format of responses depend on exact coding of the initiating command.
Responses from the instrument are always delimited with <STX> (at the beginning of the response, <ETX>
(at the end of the response followed by a 2 digit Block Check Code (checksum), regardless of the command
encoding.
BCC
Responses from the instrument are always delimited with <CR> at the beginning and the end of the string,
regardless of the command encoding.
TEXT
To Select a Hessen response mode, press:
SAMPLE*
RANGE = 500.000 PPM
CO2 =X.XXX
< TST TST > CAL
SETUP
SETUP X.X
COMMUNICATIONS MENU
ID HESN COM1 COM2
EXIT
EXIT
SETUP X.X
PRIMARY SETUP MENU
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE
EXIT
EXIT
SETUP X.X
HESSEN VARIATION: TYPE 1
SET> EDIT
SETUP X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU
ENTR key accepts the
new settings
COMM VARS DIAG ALRM
EXIT key ignores the new
SETUP X.X
HESSEN RESPONSE MODE :CMD
settings
<SET SET> EDIT
EXIT
Press to
change
response
mode.
SETUP X.X
HESSEN RESPONSE MODE :CMD
BCC TEXT EDIT
ENTR EXIT
6.15.4.6. Hessen Protocol Gas ID
The Model 360E Analyzer is a single gas instrument that measures CO2. As such it’s default gas ID has already
been set to 310. There is no need to change this setting.
134
05232 Rev B3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
Operating Instructions
6.15.4.7. Setting Hessen Protocol Status Flags
Teledyne Instruments’ implementation of Hessen protocols includes a set of status bits that the instrument
includes in responses to inform the host computer of its condition. Each bit can be assigned to one operational
and warning message flag. The default settings for these bit/flags are:
Table 6-31: Default Hessen Status Bit Assignments
STATUS FLAG NAME
DEFAULT BIT
ASSIGNMENT
WARNING FLAGS
SAMPLE FLOW WARNING
BENCH TEMP WARNING
SOURCE WARNING
0001
0002
0004
0008
0010
0020
0040
0080
BOX TEMP WARNING
WHEEL TEMP WARNING
SAMPLE TEMP WARNING
SAMPLE PRESSURE WARNING
INVALID CONC
(The Instrument’s Front Panel Display Will Show The
Concentration As “XXXX”)
OPERATIONAL FLAGS
Instrument Off
0100
0200
0400
0800
In Manual Calibration Mode
In Zero Calibration Mode
In Span Calibration Mode
UNITS OF MEASURE FLAGS
UGM
0000
2000
MGM
PPB
4000
PPM
6000
SPARE/UNUSED BITS
UNASSIGNED FLAGS (0000)
100, 1000, 8000
Sync Warning
Relay Board Warning
Conc Alarm 1
Front Panel Warning
Analog Cal Warning
Cannot Dyn Zero
Cannot Dyn Span
Invalid Conc
Conc Alarm 2
Photo Temp Warning
System Reset
Rear Board Not Detected
NOTES:
It is possible to assign more than one flag to the same Hessen status bit. This allows
the grouping of similar flags, such as all temperature warnings, under the same status
bit.
Be careful not to assign conflicting flags to the same bit as each status bit will be
triggered if any of the assigned flags is active.
05232 Rev B3
135
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Instructions
Model 360E Instruction Manual
To assign or reset the status flag bit assignments, press:
SAMPLE*
RANGE = 500.000 PPM
CO2 =X.XXX
< TST TST > CAL
SETUP
SETUP X.X
PRIMARY SETUP MENU
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE
EXIT
EXIT
SETUP X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU
COMM VARS DIAG ALRM
SETUP X.X
COMMUNICATIONS MENU
ID HESN COM1 COM2
EXIT
Repeat pressing SET> until …
SETUP X.
HESSEN STATUS FLAGS
<SET SET> EDIT
EXIT
SETUP X.
SYNC WARNING: 0000
PREV NEXT
EDIT PRNT EXIT
Repeat pressing NEXT or PREV until the desired
message flag is displayed. See Table 6-27.
For xxample …
SETUP X.
SYSTEM RESET: 0000
EDIT PRNT EXIT
PREV NEXT
The <CH and
CH> keys move
the [ ] cursor left
and right along
the bit string.
SETUP X.
SYSTEM RESET: [0]000
[0]
ENTR key accepts the
new settings
<CH CH>
ENTR EXIT
EXIT key ignores the new
settings
Press the [?] key repeatedly to cycle through the available character set: 0-9
Note: Values of A-F can also be set but are meaningless.
6.15.4.8. Instrument ID Code
Each instrument on a Hessen Protocol network must have a unique ID code. The M360E is programmed with a
default ID code of 360. To change this code See Section 6.11.1
User Notes
136
05232 Rev B3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
Calibration Procedures
7. CALIBRATION PROCEDURES
This contains a variety of information regarding the various methods for calibrating a Model 360E CO2 Analyzer
as well as other supporting information.
NOTE
The procedures in this assume that the calibration password feature is disabled (the
instruments default state). If it is enabled a password prompt screen (See Section 6.9)
will appear after the CAL, CALZ or CALS buttons are pushed but before the instrument
enters the associated calibration mode.
7.1. Before Calibration
The calibration procedures in this assume that the Range Type, Range Span and units of measure have already
been selected for the analyzer. If this has not been done, please do so before continuing (See Section 6.8 for
instructions).
All Gas lines should be PTFE (Teflon), FEP, glass, stainless steel or brass.
NOTE
If any problems occur while performing the following calibration procedures, refer to
Chapter 11 of this manual for troubleshooting tips.
7.1.1. Zero Air and Span Gas
To perform the following calibration you must have sources for zero air and span gas available.
Zero Air is similar in chemical composition to the Earth’s atmosphere but scrubbed of all components that might
affect the analyzer’s readings. Zero air should contain less than 25 ppb of CO2 and other major interfering
gases such as CO and Water Vapor. It should have a dew point of -5C or less
Span Gas is a gas specifically mixed to match the chemical composition of the type of gas being measured at
near full scale of the desired measurement range. It is recommended that the span gas used have a
concentration equal to 80% of the full measurement range.
If Span Gas is sourced directly from a calibrated, pressurized tank, the gas mixture should be CO2 mixed with
Zero Air or N2 at the required ratio.
Zero air generators that condition ambient air by drying and removal of pollutants are available on the
commercial market such as the Teledyne Instruments Model 701 Zero Air Generator. We recommend this type
of device, in conjunction with a CO2 scrubber such as soda lime (such as Teledyne Instruments P/N
037600000), for generating zero air.
05232 Rev B3
137
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Calibration Procedures
Model 360E Instruction Manual
7.1.2. Calibration Gas Traceability
All equipment used to produce calibration gases should be verified against standards of the National Institute for
Standards and Technology (NIST). To ensure NIST traceability, we recommend acquiring cylinders of working
gas that are certified to be traceable to NIST Standard Reference Materials (SRM). These are available from a
variety of commercial sources.
7.1.3. Data Recording Devices
A strip chart recorder, data acquisition system or digital data acquisition system should be used to record data
from the M360E’s serial or analog outputs. If analog readings are used, the response of the recording system
should be checked against a NIST traceable voltage source or meter. Data recording device should be capable
of bi-polar operation so that negative readings can be recorded. For electronic data recording, the M360E
provides an internal data acquisition system (iDAS), which is described in detail in Section 6.7.
7.2. Manual Calibration without Zero/Span Valves
This is the basic method for manually calibrating the Model 360E CO2 Analyzer without functioning zero/span
valve options. It is identical to the method described in the GETTING STARTED (Chapter 3) of this manual and
is repeated her for you convenience.
STEP ONE: Connect the Sources of Zero Air and Span Gas as shown below.
VENT here if input
is pressurized
Source of
SAMPLE GAS
Removed during
calibration
Calibrated
CO2 Gas
at span gas
concentration
Indicating
SAMPLE
Soda Lime
VENT
EXHAUST
VENT SPAN
PRESSURE SPAN
IZS
MODEL
360E
MODEL 701
Zero Gas
PURGE LINE
Generator
Figure 7-1: Pneumatic Connections–Basic Configuration–Using Bottled Span Gas
138
05232 Rev B3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
Calibration Procedures
Figure 7-2: Pneumatic Connections–Basic Configuration–Using Gas Dilution Calibrator
STEP TWO: Set the expected CO2 Span Gas concentration:
SAMPLE*
RANGE = 500.000 PPM
CO2 =X.XXX
SETUP
< TST TST > CAL
This sequence causes the
analyzer to prompt for the
expected CO2 span
concentration.
M-P CAL
RANGE = 500.000 PPM
CO2 =X.XXX
EXIT
< TST TST > ZERO
CONC
The CO2 span
concentration values
automatically default to
400.0 Conc.
EXIT ignores the new setting
and returns to the previous
display.
M-P CAL
CO2 SPAN CONC: 400.000 Conc
To change this value to
the actual concentration of
the span gas, enter the
number by pressing the
key under each digit until
the expected value
ENTR accepts the new setting
0
0
0
4
5
.0
ENTR EXIT
and returns to the
previous display..
appears.
NOTE
For this Initial Calibration it is important to independently verify the PRECISE CO2
Concentration Value of the SPAN gas.
If the source of the Span Gas is from a Calibrated Bottle, use the exact concentration
value printed on the bottle.
05232 Rev B3
139
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Calibration Procedures
Model 360E Instruction Manual
STEP THREE: Perform the Zero/Span Calibration Procedure:
SAMPLE*
RANGE = 500.000 PPM
CO2 =XXX.X
SETUP
Set the Display to show the
STABIL test function.
This function calculates the
stability of the CO2
< TST TST > CAL
measurement
SAMPLE
STABIL=XXX.X PPM
CO2 =XXX.X
SETUP
< TST TST > CAL
ACTION:
Allow zero gas to enter the sample port at the
rear of the instrument.
Wait until STABIL
falls below 1.0 ppm.
This may take several
minutes.
M-P CAL
STABIL=XXX.X PPM
CO2 =XXX.X
< TST TST > CAL
SETUP
M-P CAL
STABIL=XXX.X PPM
CONC
CO2 =XXX.X
EXIT
< TST TST > ZERO
Press ENTR to changes the
OFFSET & SLOPE values for the
CO2 measurements.
M-P CAL
STABIL=XXX.X PPM
CO2 =XXX.X
< TST TST > ENTR
CONC
EXIT
Press EXIT to leave the calibration
unchanged and return to the
previous menu.
ACTION:
Allow span gas to enter the sample port at the
rear of the instrument.
The value of
STABIL may jump
significantly.
Wait until it falls back
below 1.0 ppm
The SPAN key now
appears during the
transition from zero to
span.
This may take several
minutes.
M-P CAL
STABIL=XXX.X PPM
CO2 =XXX.X
EXIT
< TST TST >
M-P CAL
SPAN CONC
You may see both keys.
If either the ZERO or
SPAN buttons fail to
appear see Section 11
for troubleshooting tips.
Press ENTR to change the
OFFSET & SLOPE values for the
CO2 measurements.
RANGE = 500.000 PPM CO2 =XXX.X
EXIT
Press EXIT to leave the calibration
unchanged and return to the
previous menu.
< TST TST > ENTR SPAN CONC
M-P CAL
RANGE = 500.000 PPM CO2 =XXX.X
CONC EXIT
EXIT returns to the main
SAMPLE display
< TST TST > ENTR
If the ZERO or SPAN keys are not displayed, this means that the measurement made during that part of the
procedure is too far out of the allowable range to do allow a reliable calibration. The reason for this must be
determined before the analyzer can be calibrated. See Chapter 11 for troubleshooting tips.
140
05232 Rev B3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
Calibration Procedures
7.3. Manual Calibration Checks
Informal calibration checks, which only evaluate but do not alter the analyzer’s response curve, are
recommended as a regular maintenance item and in order to monitor the analyzer’s performance. To carry out a
calibration check rather than a full calibration, follow these steps.
STEP ONE: Connect the sources of zero air and span gas as shown in Figures 7.1 or 7.2.
STEP TWO: Perform the zero/span calibration check procedure:
ACTION:
Supply the instrument with zero gas.
SAMPLE
RANGE = 500.0 PPM
CO2=X.XXX
SETUP
Scroll the display to the
STABIL test function.
< TST TST > CAL
SAMPLE
STABIL=XXX.X PPM
CO2=X.XXX
SETUP
< TST TST > CAL
Wait until
STABIL is
below 1.0 ppm.
This may take
several minutes.
ACTION:
Record the CO2
concentration
reading.
SAMPLE
STABIL=XXX.X PPM
CO2=X.XXX
< TST TST > CAL
SETUP
The value of
STABIL may jump
significantly.
ACTION:
Supply span gas to the instrument
Wait until it falls
below 1.0 ppm. This
may take several
minutes.
ACTION:
Record the CO2
concentration
reading.
SAMPLE
STABIL=XXX.X PPM
CO2=X.XXX
SETUP
< TST TST > CAL
The SPAN key appears during the transition from zero to
span. You may see both keys.
7.4. Manual Calibration with Zero/Span Valves
There are four different zero/span valve option configurations (See Section 5.4). They all operate identically,
differing only in the method used to supply calibration gas to the Analyzer.
STEP ONE: Connect the sources of Zero Air and Span Gas as shown below.
Figures 7-3 through 7-6 show the proper pneumatic connections for M360E’s with various optional internal valve
sets installed.
05232 Rev B3
141
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Calibration Procedures
Model 360E Instruction Manual
Figure 7-3: Pneumatic Connections–M360E with Zero/Span/Shutoff Valves (OPT 50)
VENT here if input
is pressurized
Source of
SAMPLE GAS
Removed during
calibration
SAMPLE
EXHAUST
VENT SPAN
VENT
MODEL
360E
Calibrated
CO2 Gas
at span gas
concentration
PRESSURE SPAN
External
Zero Air
Scrubber
IZS
PURGE LINE
MODEL 701
Zero Gas
Indicating
Soda Lime
Generator
Figure 7-4
Pneumatic Connections–M360E with Zero/Span/Shutoff Valves and External Zero Air
Scrubber (OPT 51)
142
05232 Rev B3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
Calibration Procedures
Figure 7-5: Pneumatic Connections–M360E with Zero/Span Valves (OPT 52)
Figure 7-6: Pneumatic Connections–M360E with Zero/Span Valves with External Zero air Scrubber
(OPT 53)
05232 Rev B3
143
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Calibration Procedures
Model 360E Instruction Manual
STEP TWO: Set the expected CO2 Span Gas concentration:
SAMPLE*
RANGE = 500.000 PPM
CO2 =X.XXX
SETUP
< TST TST > CAL CALZ CALS
This sequence causes the
analyzer to prompt for the
expected CO2 span
concentration.
M-P CAL
RANGE = 500.000 PPM
CONC
CO2 =X.XXX
EXIT
< TST TST > ZERO
The CO2 span
concentration values
automatically default to
400.0 Conc.
EXIT ignores the new setting
and returns to the previous
display.
M-P CAL
CO2 SPAN CONC: 450.000 Conc
To change this value to
the actual concentration of
the span gas, enter the
number by pressing the
key under each digit until
the expected value
ENTR accepts the new setting
0
0
0
4
5
.0
ENTR EXIT
and returns to the
previous display.
appears.
NOTE
For this Initial Calibration it is important to independently verify the PRECISE CO2
Concentration Value of the SPAN gas.
If the source of the Span Gas is from a Calibrated Bottle, use the exact concentration
value printed on the bottle.
144
05232 Rev B3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
Calibration Procedures
STEP THREE: Perform the zero/span calibration. Zero and span checks using the zero/span valve option are
similar to that described in Section 7.2, except that zero air and span gas is supplied to the analyzer through the
zero/span valves rather than through the sample inlet port.
The zero and cal operations are initiated directly and independently with dedicated keys (CALZ & CALS).
SAMPLE*
RANGE = 500.000 PPM
CO2 =XXX.X
Set the Display to show the
STABIL test function.
This function calculates the
stability of the COx
<TST TST> CAL CALZ CALS SETUP
measurement
SAMPLE
STABIL=XXX.X PPM
CO2 =XXX.X
< TST TST > CAL CALZ CALS SETUP
ACTION:
Allow zero gas to enter the sample port at the
rear of the instrument.
Wait until STABIL
falls below1.0 ppm.
This may take several
minutes.
M-P CAL
STABIL=XXX.X PPM
CO2 =XXX.X
SETUP
< TST TST > CAL CALZ CALS
M-P CAL
STABIL=XXX.X PPM
CONC
CO2 =XXX.X
EXIT
< TST TST > ZERO
Press ENTR to changes the
OFFSET & SLOPE values for the
CO2 measurements.
M-P CAL
STABIL=XXX.X PPM
CO2 =XXX.X
< TST TST > ENTR
CONC
EXIT
Press EXIT to leave the calibration
unchanged and return to the
previous menu.
ACTION:
Allow span gas to enter the sample port at the
rear of the instrument.
The value of
STABIL may jump
significantly.
Wait until it falls back
below 1.0 ppm.
The SPAN key now
appears during the
transition from zero to
span.
This may take several
minutes.
M-P CAL
STABIL=XXX.X PPM
CO2 =XXX.X
EXIT
< TST TST >
M-P CAL
SPAN CONC
You may see both keys.
If either the ZERO or
SPAN buttons fail to
appear see Section 11
for troubleshooting tips.
Press ENTR to change the
OFFSET & SLOPE values for the
CO2 measurements.
RANGE = 500.000 PPM CO2 =XXX.X
EXIT
Press EXIT to leave the calibration
unchanged and return to the
previous menu.
< TST TST > ENTR SPAN CONC
M-P CAL
RANGE = 500.000 PPM CO2 =XXX.X
CONC EXIT
EXIT returns to the main
SAMPLE display
< TST TST > ENTR
05232 Rev B3
145
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Calibration Procedures
Model 360E Instruction Manual
7.5. Manual Calibration Checks with Zero/Span Valves
Zero and span checks using the VARIOUS zero/span valve options available for the M360E are similar to that
described in Section 7.3, except that the zero and calibration operations are initiated directly and independently
with dedicated keys CALZ and CALS.
To perform a manual calibration check of an analyzer with a valve option installed, use the following method.
STEP ONE: Connect the sources of Zero Air and Span Gas as shown in Figures 7-3 through 7-6.
STEP TWO: Perform the zero/span check.
SAMPLE*
RANGE = 500.000 PPM
CO2 =X.XXX
Scroll to the STABIL test
< TST TST > CAL CALZ CALS
SETUP
function.
SAMPLE
STABIL=XXX.X PPM
CO2 =X.XXX
SETUP
Wait until STABIL
falls below 1.0
ppm.
< TST TST > CAL CALZ CALS
ACTION:
Record the
CO2 readings
presented in the
upper right corner of
the display.
This may take
several minutes.
ZERO CAL M
STABIL=XXX.X PPM CO2 =X.XXX
CONC EXIT
< TST TST > ZERO
SAMPLE
STABIL=XXX.X PPM CO2 =X.XXX
ACTION:
Record the
CO2 readings
presented in the
upper right corner of
the display.
The value of STABIL
may jump
significantly. Wait
until STABIL falls
below 1.0 ppm. This
may take several
minutes.
< TST TST > CAL CALZ CALS
SETUP
SPAN CAL M
STABIL=XXX.X PPM
CO2 =X.XXX
EXIT
EXIT returns to the main
< TST TST > ZERO SPAN CONC
SAMPLE display
146
05232 Rev B3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
Calibration Procedures
7.5.1. Zero/Span Calibration on Auto Range or Dual Ranges
If the analyzer is being operated in dual range mode or auto range mode, then the high and low ranges must be
independently calibrated.
When the analyzer is in either dual or auto range modes the user must run a separate calibration procedure for
each range. After pressing the CAL, CALZ or CALS keys the user is prompted for the range that is to be
calibrated as seen in the CALZ example below:
SAMPLE*
RANGE = 500.000 PPM
CO2 =XXX.X
SETUP
Set the Display to show the
STABIL test function.
This function calculates the
stability of the CO2
<TST TST> CAL CALZ CALS
measurement
SAMPLE
STABIL=XXX.X PPM
CO2 =XXX.X
SETUP
< TST TST > CAL CALZ CALS
ACTION:
Allow zero gas to enter the sample port at the
rear of the instrument.
Wait until STABIL
falls below 1.0 ppm.
This may take several
minutes.
M-P CAL
STABIL=XXX.X PPM
CO2 =XXX.X
< TST TST > CAL CALZ CALS
SETUP
SAMPLE
RANGE TO CAL: LOW
ENTR
LOW HIGH
SETUP
SETUP
SAMPLE
RANGE TO CAL: HIGH
ENTR
LOW HIGH
ANALYZER ENTERS
ZERO CAL MODE
ZERO CAL M
RANGE = 500.000 PPM CO2 =XXX.X
< TST TST > ZERO SPAN CONC
EXIT
Continue Calibration as per
Standard Procedure
Once this selection is made, the calibration procedure continues as previously described in Section 7.2. The
other range may be calibrated by starting over from the main SAMPLE display.
05232 Rev B3
147
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Calibration Procedures
Model 360E Instruction Manual
7.5.2. Use of Zero/Span Valves with Remote Contact Closure
Contact closures for controlling calibration are located on the rear panel CONTROL IN connector. Instructions
for setup and use of these contacts are found in Section 6.15.1.2. When the contacts are closed for at least 5
seconds, the instrument switches into zero or span mode. The remote calibration contact closures may be
activated in any order. It is recommended that contact closures remain closed for at least 10 minutes to
establish a reliable reading.
The instrument will stay in the selected mode for as long as the contacts remain closed. If calibration is enabled,
the M360E will re-calibrate when the contact is opened, then go into SAMPLE mode. If calibration is disabled,
the instrument will return to SAMPLE mode, leaving the calibration unchanged.
7.6. Automatic Zero/Span Cal/Check (AutoCal)
The AutoCal system allows unattended periodic operation of the ZERO/SPAN valve options by using the
M360E’s internal time of day clock. AutoCal operates by executing SEQUENCES programmed by the user to
initiate the various calibration modes of the analyzer and open and close valves appropriately. It is possible to
program and run up to 3 separate sequences (SEQ1, SEQ2 and SEQ3). Each sequence can operate in one of
3 Modes, or be disabled.
Table 7-1: AUTOCAL Modes
MODE NAME
DISABLED
ZERO
ACTION
Disables the Sequence
Causes the Sequence to perform a zero calibration/check
ZERO-SPAN
Causes the Sequence to perform a zero and span concentration
calibration/check
SPAN
Causes the Sequence to perform a span concentration
calibration/check
For each mode there are seven parameters that control operational details of the SEQUENCE. They are:
Table 7-2: AutoCal ATTRIBUTE Setup Parameters
ATTRIBUTE NAME
TIMER ENABLED
STARTING DATE
STARTING TIME
DELTA DAYS
ACTION
Turns on the Sequence timer
Sequence will operate after Starting Date
Time of day sequence will run
Number of days to skip between each Seq. execution
Number of hours later each “Delta Days” Seq is to be run
Number of minutes the sequence operates
DELTA TIME
DURATION
CALIBRATE
Enable to do a calibration – Disable to do a cal check only
148
05232 Rev B3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
Calibration Procedures
The following example sets Sequence #2 to do a Zero-Span Calibration every other day starting at 1 am on
September 4, 2001, lasting 15 minutes, without calibration. This will start ½ hour later each iteration.
MODE AND ATTRIBUTE
Sequence
VALUE
COMMENT
Define Sequence #2
2
ZERO-SPAN
ON
Mode
Select Zero and Span Mode
Enable the timer
Timer Enable
Starting Date
Starting Time
Delta Days
Delta Time
Sept. 4, 2001
01:00
Start after Sept 4, 2001
First Span starts at 1:00AM
Do Sequence #2 every other day
Do Sequence #2 ½ hr later each day
Operate Span valve for 15 min
Do not calibrate at end of Sequence
2
00:30
Duration
15.0
Calibrate
NO
NOTE
The programmed STARTING_TIME must be a minimum of 5 minutes later than the real
time clock (See Section 6.10 for setting real time clock).
NOTE
Avoid setting two or more sequences at the same time of the day. Any new sequence
which is initiated whether from a timer, the COM ports, or the contact closure inputs
will override any sequence which is in progress.
NOTE
If at any time an illegal entry is selected (Example: Delta Days > 367) the ENTR key will
disappear from the display.
05232 Rev B3
149
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Calibration Procedures
Model 360E Instruction Manual
To program the Sequence:
SAMPLE*
RANGE = 500.000 PPM CO2 =X.XXX
SETUP X.X STARTING TIME:14:15
<SET SET> EDIT
< TST TST > CAL CALZ CALS
SETUP
EXIT
EXIT
SETUP X.X
PRIMARY SETUP MENU
SETUP X.X
DELTA DAYS: 1
CFG ACAL DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE
EXIT
EXIT
<SET SET> EDIT
Toggle keys
to set
number of
days
SETUP X.X SEQ 1) DISABLED
SETUP X.X DELTA DAYS: 1
NEXT MODE
between
procedures
(1-367)
0
0
2
ENTR EXIT
SETUP X.X SEQ 2) DISABLED
SETUP X.X DELTA DAYS:2
PREV NEXT MODE
EXIT
<SET SET> EDIT
EXIT
SETUP X.X MODE: DISABLED
SETUP X.X DELTA TIME00:00
NEXT
ENTR EXIT
ENTR EXIT
ENTR EXIT
EXIT
<SET SET> EDIT
EXIT
SETUP X.X MODE: ZERO
Toggle keys
to set
delay time for
each iteration
of the
sequence:
HH:MM
PREV NEXT
SETUP X.X DELTA TIME: 00:00
0
0
:3
0
ENTR EXIT
SETUP X.X MODE: ZERO–SPAN
(0 – 24:00)
PREV NEXT
SETUP X.X DELTA TIEM:00:30
<SET SET> EDIT
EXIT
SETUP X.X SEQ 2) ZERO–SPAN, 1:00:00
PREV NEXT MODE SET
SETUP X.X DURATION:15.0 MINUTES
Toggle keys
to set
duration for
each
iteration of
the
sequence:
Set in
<SET SET> EDIT
EXIT
ENTR EXIT
EXIT
Default
value is
ON
SETUP X.X TIMER ENABLE: ON
SET> EDIT
EXIT
SETUP X.X DURATION 15.0MINUTES
3
0
.0
SETUP X.X STARTING DATE: 01–JAN–02
Decimal
minutes
from
<SET SET> EDIT
EXIT
0.1 – 60.0
SETUP X.X DURATION:30.0 MINUTES
Toggle keys
to set
day, month &
year:
<SET SET> EDIT
SETUP X.X STARTING DATE: 01–JAN–02
0
4
SEP
0
3
ENTR EXIT
Format :
DD-MON-YY
SETUP X.X
CALIBRATE: OFF
SETUP X.X STARTING DATE: 04–SEP–03
<SET SET> EDIT
EXIT
ENTR EXIT
EXIT
<SET SET> EDIT
EXIT
Toggle key
between
Off and
ON
SETUP X.X
ON
CALIBRATE: OFF
SETUP X.X STARTING DATE: 04–SEP–03
<SET SET> EDIT
EXIT
SETUP X.X
CALIBRATE: ON
Toggle keys to
set time:
SETUP X.X STARTING TIME:00:00
<SET SET> EDIT
Format : HH:MM
<SET SET> EDIT
EXIT
This is a 24 hr
clock .
PM hours are
13 – 24.
SETUP X.X SEQ 2) ZERO–SPAN, 2:00:30
EXIT returns
to the SETUP
Menu
SETUP X.X STARTING TIME:00:00
Example
2:15 PM = 14:15
PREV NEXT MODE SET
EXIT
1
4
: 1
5
ENTR EXIT/
Sequence
Delta Time
MODE
Delta Days
150
05232 Rev B3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
Calibration Procedures
7.6.1. AutoCal with Auto or Dual Reporting Ranges Modes Selected
SETUP C.4
<SET
RANGE TO CAL: LOW
EDIT
EXIT
SETUP C.4
RANGE TO CAL: LOW
RANGE TO CAL: HIGH
LOW HIGH
ENTR SETUP
SETUP C.4
<SET
EDIT
EXIT
EXIT
SETUP C.4 SEQ 2) ZERO–SPAN, 2:00:30
EXIT returns to the
PRIMARY SETUP
Menu
PREV NEXT MODE SET
NOTE
In order to automatically calibrate both the HIGH and LOW ranges, you must set up a
separate sequence for each.
7.7. Calibration Quality
After completing one of the calibration procedures described above, it is important to evaluate the analyzer’s
calibration SLOPE and OFFSET parameters. These values describe the linear response curve of the analyzer.
The values for these terms, both individually and relative to each other, indicate the quality of the calibration. To
perform this quality evaluation, you will need to record the values of both test functions (Section 6.2.1 or
Appendix A-3), all of which are automatically stored in the iDAS channel CALDAT for data analysis,
documentation and archival.
Make sure that these parameters are within the limits listed in Table 7-3 and frequently compare them to those
values on the Final Test and Checkout Sheet that came attached to your manual, which should not be
significantly different. If they are, refer to the troubleshooting Chapter 11.
Table 7-3: Calibration Data Quality Evaluation
FUNCTION
SLOPE
MINIMUM VALUE
0.700
OPTIMUM VALUE
1.000
MAXIMUM VALUE
1.300
OFFS
-0.500
0.000
0.500
These values should not be significantly different from the values recorded on the Teledyne Instruments
Final Test and Validation Data sheet that was shipped with your instrument. If they are, refer to the
troubleshooting Chapter 11.
05232 Rev B3
151
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Calibration Procedures
Model 360E Instruction Manual
The default iDAS configuration records all calibration values in channel CALDAT as well as all calibration check
(zero and span) values in its internal memory. Up to 200 data points are stored for up 4 years of data (on
weekly calibration checks) and a lifetime history of monthly calibrations. Review these data to see if the zero
and span responses change over time. These channels also store the STABIL value (standard deviation of CO
concentration) to evaluate if the analyzer response has properly leveled off during the calibration procedure.
Finally, the CALDAT channel also stores the converter efficiency for review and documentation.
If your instrument has an O2 sensor option installed that should be calibrated as well.
User Notes
152
05232 Rev B3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE & PROCEDURES
9. MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE & PROCEDURES
Predictive diagnostic functions, including data acquisition records, failure warnings and test functions built into the
analyzer, allow the user to determine when repairs are necessary without performing painstaking preventative
maintenance procedures. There are, however, a minimal number of simple procedures that when performed
regularly will ensure that the analyzer continues to operate accurately and reliably over its lifetime. Repairs and
troubleshooting are covered in Chapter 11 of this manual.
9.1. Maintenance Schedule
Table 9-1 shows a typical maintenance schedule for the analyzer. Please note that in certain environments (i.e.
dusty, very high ambient pollutant levels) some maintenance procedures may need to be performed more often
than shown.
NOTE
A Span and Zero Calibration Check (see CAL CHECK REQ’D Column of Table 9-1) must be
performed following certain of the maintenance procedure listed below.
See Sections 7.3, 7.5 and 7.6 for instructions on performing checks.
CAUTION
Risk of electrical shock. Disconnect power before performing any of the following
operations that require entry into the interior of the analyzer.
NOTE
The operations outlined in this chapter are to be performed by qualified maintenance
personnel only.
05232 Rev B3
155
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE & PROCEDURES
Model 360E Instruction Manual
9.2. Predicting Failures Using the Test Functions
The Test Functions can be used to predict failures by looking at how their values change over time. Initially it
may be useful to compare the state of these Test Functions to the values recorded on the printed record of the
final calibration performed on your instrument at the factory, p/n 04307. Table 9-3 can be used as a basis for
taking action as these values change with time. The internal data acquisition system (iDAS) is a convenient way
to record and track these changes. Use APICOM to download and review this data from a remote location.
Table 9-3: Predictive uses for Test Functions
FUNCTION
STABILITY
CONDITION
BEHAVIOR
INTERPRETATION
Pneumatic Leaks – instrument & sample system
Detector deteriorating
Zero Cal
Increasing
Source Aging
CO2 MEAS
Detector deteriorating
Zero Cal
Zero Cal
Decreasing
Increasing
Optics getting dirty or contaminated
Source Aging
Detector deteriorating
Contaminated zero gas (H2O)
Source Aging
Detector deteriorating
GFC Wheel Leaking
Decreasing
Increasing
Pneumatic Leaks
MR RATIO
Contaminated zero gas (CO2)
Source Aging
Pneumatic Leaks – instrument & sample system
Calibration system deteriorating
Source Aging
Span Cal
Sample
GFC Wheel Leaking
Decreasing
Calibration system deteriorating
Pneumatic Leak between sample inlet and Sample Cell
Change in sampling manifold
Dirty particulate filter
Increasing > 1”
PRES
Pneumatic obstruction between sample inlet and Sample
Cell
Decreasing > 1”
Obstruction in sampling manifold
Mechanical Connection between IR-Detector and Sample
Cell deteriorating
Any, but with
Bench Temp at
48°C
PHT DRIVE
Increasing
IR-Photodetector deteriorating
See MR Ratio - Zero Cal Decreasing above
See MR Ratio - Zero Cal Increasing above
See MR Ratio - Span Cal Decreasing above
See MR Ratio – Span Cal Increasing above
Increasing
Decreasing
Increasing
Decreasing
OFFSET
SLOPE
Zero Cal
Span Cal
158
05232 Rev B3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE & PROCEDURES
9.3. Maintenance Procedures
The following procedures are to be performed periodically as part of the standard maintenance of the Model
360E.
9.3.1. Replacing the Sample Particulate Filter
The particulate filter should be inspected often for signs of plugging or contamination. We recommend that when
you change the filter, handle it and the wetted surfaces of the filter housing as little as possible. Do not touch
any part of the housing, filter element, PTFE retaining ring, glass cover and the o-ring.
To change the filter:
1. Turn OFF the analyzer to prevent drawing debris into the instrument.
2. Open the M360E’s hinged front panel and unscrew the knurled retaining ring on the filter assembly.
Figure 9-1: Sample Particulate Filter Assembly
3. Carefully remove the retaining ring, PTFE o-ring, glass filter cover and filter element.
4. Replace the filter, being careful that the element is fully seated and centered in the bottom of the holder.
5. Re-install the PTFE o-ring with the notches up, install the glass cover, then screw on the retaining ring
and hand tighten. Inspect the seal between the edge of filter and the o-ring to assure a proper seal.
6. Re-start the Analyzer.
9.3.2. Rebuilding the Sample Pump
The diaphragm in the sample pump periodically wears out and must be replaced. A sample rebuild kit is
available – see Appendix B of this manual for the part number of the pump rebuild kit. Instructions and diagrams
are included with the kit.
Always perform a Flow and Leak Check after rebuilding the Sample Pump.
05232 Rev B3
159
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE & PROCEDURES
Model 360E Instruction Manual
9.3.3. Performing Leak Checks
Leaks are the most common cause of analyzer malfunction; Section 9.3.3.1 presents a simple leak check
9.3.3.1. Vacuum Leak Check and Pump Check
This method is easy and fast. It detects, but does not locate most leaks; it also verifies that the sample pump is
in good condition.
1. Turn the analyzer ON, and allow enough time for flows to stabilize.
2. Cap the sample inlet port.
3. After several minutes, when the pressures have stabilized, note the following. In the TEST menu, note
the SAMPLE PRESSURE reading.
4. If the reading is < 10 in-Hg, the pump is in good condition and there are no large leaks.
5. Check the sample gas flow. If the flow is <10 cm3/min and stable, there are no large leaks in the
instrument’s pneumatics.
9.3.3.2. Pressure Leak Check
If you can’t locate the leak by the above procedure, use the following procedure. Obtain a leak checker similar
to the Teledyne Instruments part number 01960, which contains a small pump, shut-off valve, and pressure
gauge. Alternatively, a convenient source of low-pressure gas is a tank of span gas, with the two-stage regulator
adjusted to less than 15 psi with a shutoff valve and pressure gauge.
CAUTION
Do not use bubble solution with vacuum applied to the analyzer. The solution may
contaminate the instrument. Do not exceed 15 PSIG pressure.
1. Turn OFF power to the instrument.
2. Install a leak checker or tank of gas as described above on the sample inlet at the rear panel.
3. Remove the instrument cover and locate the inlet side of the sample pump. Remove the flow assembly
from the pump and plug it with the appropriate gas-tight fitting.
4. Pressurize the instrument with the leak checker, allowing enough time to fully pressurize the instrument
through the critical flow orifice. Check each fitting with soap bubble solution, looking for bubbles. Once
the fittings have been wetted with soap solution, do not re-apply vacuum, as it will suck soap solution
into the instrument and contaminate it. Do not exceed 15 psi pressure.
5. If the instrument has one of the zero and span valve options, the normally closed ports on each valve
should also be separately checked. Connect the leak checker to the normally closed ports and check
with soap bubble solution.
6. Once the leak has been located and repaired, the leak-down rate should be < 1 in-Hg (0.4 psi) in 5
minutes after the pressure is shut off.
160
05232 Rev B3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE & PROCEDURES
9.3.4. Performing a Sample Flow Check
CAUTION
Always use a separate calibrated flow meter capable of measuring flows in the 0 – 1000
cc/min range to measure the gas flow rate though the analyzer.
DO NOT use the built in flow measurement viewable from the Front Panel of the
instrument. This measurement is only for detecting major flow interruptions such as
clogged or plugged gas lines.
See Figure 3-2 for sample port location.
1. Attach the Flow Meter to the sample inlet port on the rear panel. Ensure that the inlet to the Flow Meter
is at atmospheric f.
2. Sample flow should be 800 cc/min 10%.
3. Once an accurate measurement has been recorded by the method described above, adjust the
analyzer’s internal flow sensors (See Section 6.13.8)
Low flows indicate blockage somewhere in the pneumatic pathway, typically a plugged sintered filter or critical
flow orifice in one of the analyzer’s flow control assemblies. High flows indicate leaks downstream of the Flow
Control Assembly.
9.3.5. Cleaning the Optical Bench
The M360E sensor assembly and optical bench is complex and delicate. Disassembly and cleaning is not
recommended. Please check with the factory before disassembling the optical bench.
9.3.6. Cleaning Exterior Surfaces of the M360E
If necessary, the exterior surfaces of the M360E can be cleaned with a clean damp cloth. Do not submerge any
part of the instrument in water or cleaning solution.
User Notes
05232 Rev B3
161
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
THEORY OF OPERATION
10. THEORY OF OPERATION
The Model 360E Gas Filter Correlation Carbon Dioxide Analyzer is a microprocessor-controlled analyzer that
determines the concentration of carbon dioxide (CO2) in a sample gas drawn through the instrument. It requires
that sample and calibration gasses be supplied at ambient atmospheric pressure in order to establish a stable
gas flow through the sample chamber where the gases ability to absorb infrared radiation is measured.
Calibration of the instrument is performed in software and does not require physical adjustments to the
instrument. During calibration the microprocessor measures the current state of the IR Sensor output and
various other physical parameters of the instrument and stores them in memory.
The microprocessor uses these calibration values, the IR absorption measurements made on the sample gas
along with data regarding the current temperature and pressure of the gas to calculate a final co2 concentration.
This concentration value and the original information from which it was calculated are stored in one of the unit’s
internal data acquisition system (iDAS - See Sections 6.7) as well as reported to the user via a vacuum
florescent display or a variety of digital and analog signal outputs.
10.1. Measurement Method
10.1.1. Beer’s Law
The basic principle by which the analyzer works is called Beer’s Law. It defines the how light of a specific
wavelength is absorbed by a particular gas molecule over a certain distance. The mathematical relationship
between these three parameters is:
I = Io e-αLc
Where:
Io
is the intensity of the light if there was no absorption.
is the intensity with absorption.
is the absorption path, or the distance the light travels as it is being absorbed.
I
L
C
is the concentration of the absorbing gas. In the case of the Model 360E, carbon dioxide (CO2).
α
is the absorption coefficient that tells how well CO2 absorbs light at the specific wavelength of
interest.
10.1.2. Measurement Fundamentals
In the most basic terms, the Model 360E uses a high energy heated element to generate a beam of broad-band
IR light with a known intensity (measured during Instrument calibration. This beam is directed through
multi-pass cell filled with sample gas. The sample cell uses mirrors at each end to reflect the IR beam back and
forth through the sample gas to generate a 2.5 meter absorption path (see Figure 10–1). This length was
chosen to give the analyzer maximum sensitivity to fluctuations in CO2 density.
05232 Rev B3
163
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THEORY OF OPERATION
Model 360E Instruction Manual
Band-Pass Filter
Sample Chamber
IR
Source
Photo-Detector
IR Beam
Figure 10-1: Measurement Fundamentals
Upon exiting the sample cell, the beam shines through a band-pass filter that allows only light at a wavelength of
4.3 µm to pass. Finally, the beam strikes a solid-state photo-detector that converts the light signal into a
modulated voltage signal representing the attenuated intensity of the beam.
10.1.3. Gas Filter Correlation
Unfortunately, water vapor absorbs light at 4.3 µm too. To overcome the interfering effects of water vapor the
Model 360E adds another component to the IR light path called a gas filter correlation (GFC) wheel (see Figure
10-2).
Measurement Cell
(Pure N2)
Reference Cell
(N2 with CO2)
Figure 10-2: GFC Wheel
10.1.3.1. The GFC Wheel
A GFC wheel is a metallic wheel into which two chambers are carved. The chambers are sealed on both sides
with material transparent to 4.3 µm IR radiation creating two airtight cavities. Each cavity is filled with specially
composed gases. One cell is filled with pure N2 (the measure cell). The other is filled with a combination of N2
and a high concentration of CO2 (the reference cell).
164
05232 Rev B3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
THEORY OF OPERATION
IR unaffected by N2 in Measurement Cell
Δ H
IR IS affected by CO in Reference Cell
M
IR
Source
Photo-Detector
R
GFC Wheel
Figure 10-3: Measurement Fundamentals with GFC Wheel
As the GFC wheel spins, the IR light alternately passes through the two cavities. When the beam is exposed to
the reference cell, the CO2 in the gas filter wheel strips the beam of most of the IR at 4.3μm. When the light
beam is exposed to the measurement cell, the N2 in the filter wheel does not absorb IR light. This results in a
fluctuation in the intensity of the IR light striking the photo-detector (See Figure 10-3) that results in the output of
the detector resembling a square wave.
10.1.3.2. The Measure Reference Ratio
The Model 360E determines the amount of CO2 in the sample chamber by computing the ratio between the peak
of the measurement pulse (CO2 MEAS) and the peak of the reference pulse (CO2 REF).
If no gases exist in the sample chamber that absorb light at 4.3μm, the high concentration of CO2 in the gas
mixture of the reference cell will attenuate the intensity of the IR beam by 60% giving a M/R ratio of
approximately 2.4:1.
Adding CO2 to the sample chamber causes the peaks corresponding to both cells to be attenuated by a further
percentage. Since the intensity of the light passing through the measurement cell is greater, the effect of this
additional attenuation is greater. This causes CO2 MEAS to be more sensitive to the presence of CO2 in the
sample chamber than CO2 REF and the ratio between them (M/R) to move closer to 1:1 as the concentration of
CO2 in the sample chamber increases.
05232 Rev B3
165
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THEORY OF OPERATION
Model 360E Instruction Manual
IR unaffected by N2 in Measurement Cell of
the GDC Wheel and no additional CO2 in
the Sample Chamber
CO2 MEAS
CO2 REF
IR affected by CO2 in Reference Cell
with no interfering gas in the Sample
Chamber
IR shinning through Measurement Cell of
the GDC Wheel is reduced by additional
CO2 in the Sample Chamber
M/R
is reduced
IR shining through Reference Cell is
also reduced by additional CO2 in the
Sample Chamber, but to a lesser extent
Figure 10-4: Affect of CO2 in the Sample on CO2 MEAS & CO2 REF
Once the Model 360E has computed this ratio, a look-up table is used, with interpolation, to linearize the
response of the instrument. This linearized concentration value is combined with calibration SLOPE and
OFFSET values to produce the CO2 concentration which is then normalized for changes in sample pressure.
10.1.4. Interference and Signal to Noise Rejection
If an interfering gas, such as H2O vapor is introduced into the sample chamber, the spectrum of the IR beam is
changed in a way that is identical for both the reference and the measurement cells, but without changing the
ratio between the peak heights of CO2 MEAS and CO2 REF. In effect, the difference between the peak heights
remains the same.
M/R
is Shifted
IR shining through both cells is effected
equally by interfering gas in the Sample
Chamber
Figure 10-5: Effects of Interfering Gas on CO2 MEAS & CO2 REF
166
05232 Rev B3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
THEORY OF OPERATION
Thus, the difference in the peak heights and the resulting M/R ratio is only due to CO2 and not to interfering
gases. In this way, Gas filter correlation rejects the effects of interfering gases and so that the analyzer
responds only to the presence of CO2.
To improve the signal-to-noise performance of the IR photo-detector, the GFC wheel also incorporates an optical
mask that chops the IR beam into alternating pulses of light and dark at six times the frequency of the
measure/reference signal. This limits the detection bandwidth helping to reject interfering signals from outside
this bandwidth improving the signal to noise ratio.
The IR Signal as the Photo-Detector sees it
after being chopped by the GFC Wheel
Screen
CO2 MEAS
CO2 REF
Figure 10-6: Chopped IR Signal
10.1.4.1. Ambient CO2 Interference Rejection
CO2 absorbs IR light very well. So well that even the narrow volume of ambient air between the IR source and
the sample chamber is enough to alter the analyzer’s measured concentration of CO2. Also, ambient air, which
averages around 350 ppm to 400 ppm, will vary significantly over the course of the day. The ambient CO2
concentration can rise as high as 1 000 ppm during the time of the day when people are present. It can fluctuate
300 ppm as the photosynthesis of plant life in the nearby area increases during the day and decreases at
night.
The basic design of the M360E rejects most of this interference at a 100:1 ratio; however this still can allow
small fluctuations in CO2 concentration during the course of the day. To completely remove all effects of
ambient CO2 from the analyzer’s measurement of CO2, dried air, scrubbed of all CO2 is pumped into the GFC
wheel housing to purge all ambient CO2 (see Figure 10-7)
05232 Rev B3
167
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THEORY OF OPERATION
Model 360E Instruction Manual
10.2. Pneumatic Operation
CAUTION
It is important that the sample airflow system is both leak tight and not pressurized
over ambient pressure.
Regular leak checks should be performed on the analyzer as described in the
maintenance schedule, Table 9-1.
Procedures for correctly performing leak checks can be found in Section 9.3.3.
An internal pump evacuates the sample chamber creating a small vacuum that draws sample gas into the
analyzer. Normally the analyzer is operated with its inlet near ambient pressure either because the sample is
directly drawn at the inlet or a small vent is installed at the inlet. There are several advantages to this “pull
through” configuration.
By placing the pump down stream from the sample chamber several problems are avoided.
First the pumping process heats and compresses the sample air complicating the measurement
process.
Additionally, certain physical parts of the pump itself are made of materials that might chemically react
with the sample gas.
Finally, in certain applications where the concentration of the target gas might be high enough to be
hazardous, maintaining a negative gas pressure relative to ambient means that should a minor leak
occur, no sample gas will be pumped into the atmosphere surrounding analyzer.
10.2.1. Sample Gas Flow
SAMPLE GAS
INLET
EXHAUST
GAS OUTLET
PUMP
SAMPLE
PRESSURE
SENSOR
Flow / Pressure
Sensor PCA
O3 FLOW
SENSOR
Sample Gas
Flow Control
PURGE GAS
INLET
Purge Gas
Pressure Control
Figure 10-7: Internal Pneumatic Flow – Basic Configuration
168
05232 Rev B3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
THEORY OF OPERATION
10.2.2. Flow Rate Control
To maintain a constant flow rate of the sample gas through the instrument, the Model 360E uses special flow
control assemblies located in the purge gas line at the entrance to the GFC wheel housing and in the exhaust
gas line just before the pump (see Figure 10-7). These assemblies consists of:
A critical flow orifice.
Two o-rings: Located just before and after the critical flow orifice, the o-rings seal the gap between the
walls of assembly housing and the critical flow orifice.
A spring: Applies mechanical force needed to form the seal between the o-rings, the critical flow orifice
and the assembly housing.
10.2.2.1. Critical Flow Orifice
The most important component of this flow control assembly is the critical flow orifice.
Critical flow orifices are a remarkably simple way to regulate stable gas flow rates. They operate without moving
parts by taking advantage of the laws of fluid dynamics. By restricting the flow of gas though the orifice, a
pressure differential is created. This pressure differential combined with the action of the analyzer’s pump draws
the gas through the orifice.
As the pressure on the downstream side of the orifice (the pump side) continues to drop, the speed that the gas
flows though the orifice continues to rise. Once the ratio of upstream pressure to downstream pressure is
greater than 2:1, the velocity of the gas through the orifice reaches the speed of sound. As long as that ratio
stays at least 2:1 the gas flow rate is unaffected by any fluctuations, surges, or changes in downstream pressure
because such variations only travel at the speed of sound themselves and are therefore cancelled out by the
sonic shockwave at the downstream exit of the critical flow orifice.
CRITICAL
FLOW
ORIFICE
AREA OF
LOW
AREA OF
HIGH
PRESSURE
PRESSURE
Sonic
Shockwave
O-RINGS
SPRING
FILTER
Figure 10-8: Flow Control Assembly & Critical Flow Orifice
The actual flow rate of gas through the orifice (volume of gas per unit of time), depends on the size and shape of
the aperture in the orifice. The larger the hole, the more gas molecules, moving at the speed of sound, pass
through the orifice. Because the flow rate of gas through the orifice is only related to the minimum 2:1 pressure
differential and not absolute pressure the flow rate of the gas is also unaffected by degradations in pump
efficiency due to age.
The critical flow orifice used in the Model 360E is designed to provide a flow rate of 800 cm3/min.
05232 Rev B3
169
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THEORY OF OPERATION
Model 360E Instruction Manual
10.2.3. Purge Gas Pressure Control
In order to ensure that all of the ambient CO2 is purged from the GFC Wheel housing an adequate supply of
dried air, scrubbed of CO2 must be supplied to the PURGE AIR inlet at the back of the instrument.
The minimum gas pressure of the source of purge air should be 7.5 psig.
If the source of the purge air is shared by a Teledyne Instruments M700 (as shown in figure 3-7) the
minimum gas pressure should be 25 psig and should not exceed 35 psig.
In order to maintain the proper pressure differential between the inside of the GFC wheel housing and ambient
air, the M360 design includes a manually settable pressure regulator that maintains the pressure of the purge air
feed at 7.5 psig.
10.2.4. Particulate Filter
The Model 360E Analyzer comes equipped with a 47 mm diameter, Teflon, particulate filter with a 5 micron pore
size. The filter is accessible through the front panel, which folds down to allow access, and should be changed
according to the suggested maintenance schedule described in Table 9-1.
10.2.5. Pneumatic Sensors
10.2.5.1. Sample Pressure Sensor
An absolute value pressure transducer plumbed to the outlet of the sample chamber is used to measure sample
pressure. The output of the sensor is used to compensate the concentration measurement for changes in air
pressure. This sensor is mounted to a printed circuit board with the sample flow sensor on the sample chamber;
see the following section and Figure 3-3.
10.2.5.2. Sample Flow Sensor
A thermal-mass flow sensor is used to measure the sample flow through the analyzer. The sensor is calibrated
at the factory with ambient air or N2, but can be calibrated to operate with samples consisting of other gases
such as CO2, See Section 9.3.4. This sensor is mounted to a printed circuit board with the Sample Pressure
sensor on the sample chamber; see the previous section and Figure 3-3.
170
05232 Rev B3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
10.3. Electronic Operation
10.3.1. Overview
THEORY OF OPERATION
Figure 10-9 shows a block diagram of the major electronic components of the Model 360E.
At its heart the analyzer is a microcomputer (CPU) that controls various internal processes, interprets data,
makes calculations, and reports results using specialized firmware developed by Teledyne Instruments. It
communicates with the user as well as receives data from and issues commands to a variety of peripheral
devices via a separate printed circuit assembly called the Mother Board.
The mother board collects data, performs signal conditioning duties and routs incoming and outgoing signals
between the CPU and the analyzer’s other major components.
Data is generated by a gas-filter-correlation optical bench which outputs an analog signal corresponding to the
concentration of CO2 in the sample gas. This analog signal is transformed into two, pre-amplified, DC voltages
(CO2 MEAS and CO2 REF) by a synchronous demodulator printed circuit assembly. CO2 MEAS and CO2 REF
are converted into digital data by a unipolar, analog-to-digital converter, located on the mother board.
A variety of sensors report the physical and operational status of the analyzer’s major components, again
through the signal processing capabilities of the mother board. These status reports are used as data for the
CO2 concentration calculation and as trigger events for certain control commands issued by the CPU. They are
stored in memory by the CPU and in most cases can be viewed but the user via the front panel display.
The CPU communicates with the user and the outside world in a variety of manners:
Through the analyzer’s keyboard and vacuum florescent display over a clocked, digital, serial I/O bus
(using a protocol called I2C);
RS 232 & RS485 Serial I/O channels;
Via an optional Ethernet communications card:
Various DCV and DCA analog outputs, and
Several sets of Digital I/O channels.
Finally, the CPU issues commands via a series of relays and switches (also over the I2C bus) located on a
separate printed circuit assembly to control the function of key electromechanical devices such as heaters,
motors and valves.
05232 Rev B3
171
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THEORY OF OPERATION
Model 360E Instruction Manual
Analog Outputs
A1
A2
Back Panel
Connectors
Optional
4-20 mA
Control Inputs:
1 – 8
COM1 COM2
A3
A4
Status Outputs:
1 – 6
Optional
Ethernet
Interface
Analog
Outputs
(D/A)
External
Digital I/O)
PC 104
CPU Card
A/D
Converter
(V/F)
RS–232
or RS-485
Power-Up
Circuit
Disk On
Chip
RS – 232
MOTHER
BOARD
Flash Chip
Box
Temp
PC 104 Bus
Zero/Span
Valve
Options
PUMP
Thermistor
Interface
Internal
Digital I/O
I2C
Bus
Sensor Inputs
SAMPLE
TEMP
C
O
C
O
RELAY
BOARD
Sample Flow
& Pressure
Sensors
Optional
O2 Sensor
Keyboard &
Display
CPU Status
M
E
A
S
R
E
F
LED
BENCH
TEMP
TEC Control
IR
Source
PHT
WHEEL
TEMP
Photo-
detector
SYNC
DEMOD
Drive
Detector
Output
GFC
Motor
GFC
Wheel
O2 SENSOR
TEMP
(optional)
Optical
Bench
Schmidt
Trigger
Wheel
Heater
Segment Sensor
Bench Heater
M / R Sensor
Figure 10-9: 360E Electronic Block Diagram
172
05232 Rev B3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
THEORY OF OPERATION
10.3.2. CPU
The Model 360E’s CPU is a, low power (5 VDC, 0.8A max), high performance, 386-based microcomputer
running MS-DOS. Its operation and assembly conform to the PC/104 Specification version 2.3 for embedded
PC and PC/AT applications. It has 2 MB of DRAM on board and operates at 40MHz over an internal 32-bit data
and address bus. Chip to chip data handling is performed by two 4-channel DMA devices over data busses of
either 8-bit or 16-bit configuration. The CPU supports both RS-232 and RS-485 serial I/O.
The CPU includes two types of non-volatile data storage.
Disk-On-Chip
While technically an EEPROM, the Disk –on-Chip (DOC), this device appears to the CPU as, behaves as, and
performs the same function in the system as an 8MB disk drive. It is used to store the operating system for the
computer, the Teledyne Instruments Firmware, and most of the operational data generated by the analyzer’s
internal data acquisition system (iDAS - See Section 6.7).
Flash Chip
Another, smaller EEPROM used to store critical calibration and configuration data. Segregating this data on a
separate, less heavily accessed chip significantly decreases the chance of this key data being corrupted.
10.3.3. Optical Bench & GFC Wheel
Electronically, the Model 360E’s optical bench, GFC wheel and associated components do more than simply
measure the amount of CO2 present in the sample chamber. A variety of other critical functions are performed
here as well.
10.3.3.1. Temperature Control
Because the temperature of a gas affects its density and therefore the amount of light absorbed by that gas it is
important to reduce the effect of fluctuations in ambient temperature on the Model 360E’s measurement of CO2.
To accomplish this both the temperature of the sample chamber and the GFC Wheel are maintained at constant
temperatures above their normal operating ranges.
Bench Temperature: To minimize the effects of ambient temperature variations on the sample measurement, the
sample chamber is heated to 48C (8 degrees above the maximum suggested ambient operating temperature
for the analyzer). A strip heater attached to the underside of the chamber housing is the heat source. The
temperature of the sample chamber is sensed by a thermistor, also attached to the sample chamber housing.
Wheel Temperature: To minimize the effects of temperature variations caused by the near proximity of the IR
Source to the GFC wheel on the gases contained in the wheel, it is also raised to a high temperature level.
Because the IR Source itself is very hot, the set point for this heat circuit is 68C. A cartridge heater implanted
into the heat sync on the motor is the heat source. The temperature of the wheel/motor assembly is sensed by a
thermistor also inserted into the heat sync.
Both heaters operate off of the AC line voltage supplied to the instrument.
10.3.3.2. IR Source
The light used to detect CO2 in the sample chamber is generated by an element heated to approximately 1100oC
producing infrared radiation across a broad band. This radiation is optically filtered after it has passed through
the GFC Wheel and the sample chamber and just before it reaches the photo-detector to eliminate all black body
radiation and other extraneous IR emitted by the various components of those components.
05232 Rev B3
173
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THEORY OF OPERATION
Model 360E Instruction Manual
10.3.3.3. GFC Wheel
A synchronous AC motor turns the GFC wheel motor. For analyzers operating on 60Hz line power this motor
turns at 1800 rpm. For those operating on 50Hz line power the spin rate is 1500 rpm. The actual spin rate is
unimportant within a large rate since a phase lock loop circuit is used to generate timing pulses for signal
processing.
In order to accurately interpret the fluctuations of the IR beam after it has passed through the sample gas, the
GFC wheel several other timing signals are produced by other photo emitters/detectors. These devices consist
of a combination LED and detector mounted so that the light emitted by the LED shines through the same mask
on the GFC wheel that chops the IR beam.
KEY:
Detection Beam shining
through MEASUREMENT
side of GFC Wheel
Detection Beam shining
through REFERENCE side
of GFC Wheel
IR Detection Ring
Segment Sensor Ring
M/R Sensor Ring
Figure 10-10: GFC Light Mask
M/R Sensor
This emitter/detector assembly that produces a signal that shines through a portion of the mask that allows light
to pass for half of a full revolution of the wheel. The resulting light signal tells the analyzer whether the IR beam
is shining through the measurement or the reference side of the GFC wheel.
Segment Sensor
Light from this emitter/detector pair shines through a portion of the mask that is divided into the same number of
segments as the IR detector ring. It is used by the synchronous / demodulation circuitry of the analyzer to latch
onto the most stable part of each measurement and reference IR pulse.
174
05232 Rev B3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
THEORY OF OPERATION
Measurement
Pulses
Reference
Pulses
IR Beam
Pulses
Segment Sensor
Pulses
MR Sensor
Pulses
Figure 10-11: Segment Sensor and M/R Sensor Output
Schmidt Triggers
To ensure that the waveforms produced by the Segment Sensor and the M/R Sensor are properly shaped and
clean, these signals are passed through a set of Schmidt Triggers circuits.
10.3.3.4. IR Photo-Detector
The IR beam is converted into an electrical signal by a cooled solid-state photo-conductive detector. The
detector is composed of a narrow-band optical filter, a piece of lead-salt crystal whose electrical resistance
changes with temperature, and a two-stage thermo-electric cooler.
When the analyzer is on, a constant electrical current is directed through the detector, The IR beam is focused
onto the detector surface, raising its temperature and lowering its electrical resistance that results in a change in
the voltage drop across the detector.
During those times that the IR beam is bright, the temperature of the detector is high; the resistance of the
detector is correspondingly low and the its output voltage output is low. During those times when the IR beam
intensity is low or completely blocked by the GFC Wheel mask, the temperature of the detector is lowered by the
two-stage thermo-electric cooler, increasing the detectors resistance and raising the output voltage.
10.3.4. Synchronous Demodulator (Sync/Demod) Assembly
10.3.4.1. Overview
While the photo-detector converts fluctuations of the IR beam into electronic signals, the Sync / Demod Board
amplifies these signals and converts them into usable information. Initially the output by the photo-detector is a
complex and continuously changing waveform made up of Measure and Reference pulses. The sync/demod
board demodulates this waveform and outputs two analog DC voltage signals, corresponding to the peak values
of these pulses. CO2 MEAS and CO2 REF are converted into digital signals by circuitry on the motherboard
then used by the CPU to calculate the CO2 concentration of the sample gas.
Additionally the synch/demod board contains circuitry that controls the photo-detector’s thermoelectric cooler as
well as circuitry for performing certain diagnostic tests on the analyzer.
05232 Rev B3
175
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THEORY OF OPERATION
Model 360E Instruction Manual
56V
Bias
CO2 MEAS
Variable
Gain Amp
Sample &
Dark
Switch
Pre Amp
Photo-
detector
Signal
Conditioner
Hold
Circuits
TEC Control
PHT DRIVE
E-Test
Generator
CO2 Reference
Signal
(x4)
Conditioner
Thermo-Electric
Cooler
Control Circuit
E Test A Gate
E Test B Gate
Dark Test Gate
Measure Gate
Compact
Programmable
Logic Device
Measure Dark Gate
Reference Gate
Reference Dark Gate
Phase Lock Warning
M/R Sensor
From GFC
Wheel
Segment
Sensor
Segment Clock
X1 Reference
E Test Control
Phase
Lock
Loop
x10
From CPU
via Mother
Board
10
Dark Switch
Control
X10 Clock
M/R
Segment
Status LED
Status LED
Phase Lock
Figure 10-12: 360E Sync / Demod Block Diagram
10.3.4.2. Signal Synchronization and Demodulation
The signal emitted by the IR photo-detector goes through several stages of amplification before it can be
accurately demodulated. The first is a pre-amplification stage that raises the signal to levels readable by the rest
of the synch/demod board circuitry. The second is a variable amplification stage that is adjusted at the factory to
compensate for performance variations of mirrors, detectors, and other components of the optical bench from
instrument to instrument.
The workhorses of the sync/demod board are the four sample-and-hold circuits that capture various voltage
levels found in the amplified detector signal needed to determine the value of CO2 MEAS and CO2 REF. They
are activated by logic signals under the control of a compact programmable logic device (PLD), which in turn
responds to the output of the Segment Sensor and M/R Sensor described in Figure 10–11.
176
05232 Rev B3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
THEORY OF OPERATION
The four sample and hold circuits are:
DESIGNATION
ACTIVE WHEN:
IR BEAM PASSING THROUGH
MEASUREMENT cell of GFC Wheel
MEASUREMENT Cell of GFC Wheel
REFERENCE cell of GFC Wheel
REFERENCE cell of GFC Wheel
SEGMENT SENSOR PULSE IS:
Measure Gate
Measure Dark Gate
Reference Gate
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
LOW
Reference Dark Gate
Timing for activating the Sample and Hold circuits is provided by a phase lock loop circuit (PLL). Using the
segment sensor output as a reference signal the PLL generates clock signal at ten times that frequency. This
faster clock signal is used by the PLD to make the sample and hold circuits capture the signal during the center
portions of the detected waveform, ignore the rising and falling edges of the detector signal.
Sample & Hold
Active
Detector
Output
Sample & Hold
Inactive
Figure 10-13: Sample & Hold Timing
10.3.4.3. Sync/Demod Status LED’s
The following two status LED’s located on the synch/demod board provide additional diagnostic tools for
checking the GFC wheel rotation.
LED
D1
FUNCTION
STATUS OK
FAULT STATUS
M/R Sensor Status
LED flashes approximately
2/second
LED is stuck
ON or OFF
D2
Segment Sensor
Status
LED flashes approximately
6/second
LED is stuck
ON or OFF
See Section 11.1.4 for more information.
05232 Rev B3
177
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THEORY OF OPERATION
Model 360E Instruction Manual
10.3.4.4. Photo-Detector Temperature Control
The synch/demod board also contains circuitry that controls the IR photo-detector’s thermoelectric coolers. A
drive voltage, PHT DRIVE, is supplied to the coolers by the synch/demod board which is adjusted by the
synch/demod board based on a return signal called TEC control which alerts informs the synch/demod board of
the detector’s temperature. The warmer the detector, the harder the coolers are driven.
PHT DRIVE is one of the Test Functions viewable by the user via the front panel. Press <TST or TST> until it
appears on the display.
10.3.4.5. Dark Calibration Switch
This switch initiates the Dark Calibration procedure. When initiated by the user (See Section 6.13.6 for more
details), the dark calibration process opens this switch, interrupting the signal from the IR photo-detector. This
allows the analyzer to measure any offset caused by the synch/demod board circuitry.
10.3.4.6. Electric Test Switch
When active this circuit generates a specific waveform intended to simulate the function of the IR photo-detector
but with a known set of value which is substituted for the detector’s actual signal via the dark switch. It may also
be initiated by the user (See Section 6.13.5 for more details).
10.3.5. Relay Board
By actuating various switches and relays located on this board, the CPU controls the status of other key
components. The relay board receives instructions in the form of digital signals over the I2C bus, interprets
these digital instructions and activates its various switches and relays appropriately.
Heater Control
The two heaters attached to the sample chamber housing and the GFC wheel motor are controlled by solid state
relays located on the relay board.
The GFC wheel heater is simply turned on or off, however control of the bench heater also includes circuitry that
selects which one of its two separate heating elements is activated depending on whether the instrument is
running on 100 VAC, 115 VAC or 230 VAC line power.
GFC Wheel Motor Control:
The GFC wheel operates from an AC voltage supplied by a multi-input transformer located on the relay board.
The step-down ratio of this transformer is controlled by factory-installed jumpers to adjust for 100 VAC, 115 VAC
or 230 VAC line power. Other circuitry slightly alters the phase of the AC power supplied to the motor during
start up based on whether line power is 50Hz or 60 Hz.
Normally, the GFC Wheel Motor is always turning while the analyzer is on. A physical switch located on the
relay board can be used to turn the motor off for certain diagnostic procedures.
178
05232 Rev B3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
THEORY OF OPERATION
Zero/Span Valve Options
Any zero/span/shutoff valve options installed in the analyzer are controlled by a set of electronic switches
located on the relay board. These switches, under CPU control, supply the +12VDC needed to activate each
valve’s solenoid.
IR Source
The Relay board supplies a constant 11.5VDC to the IR Source. Under normal operation the IR source is
always on.
10.3.5.1. Status LED’s
Eight LED’s are located on the analyzer’s relay board to show the current status on the various control functions
performed by the relay board (see Figure 10-14). They are:
Table 10-2: Relay Board Status LED’s
LED
COLOR
FUNCTION
STATUS WHEN LIT
STATUS WHEN UNLIT
D1
RED
Watchdog Circuit
Cycles On/Off Every 3 Seconds under direct control of the
analyzer’s CPU.
D2
D3
D4
D5
YELLOW
YELLOW
YELLOW
GREEN
Wheel Heater
Bench Heater
Spare
HEATING
HEATING
N/A
NOT HEATING
NOT HEATING
N/A
Sample/Cal Gas
Valve Option
Valve Open to CAL GAS
FLOW
Valve Open to SAMPLE GAS
FLOW
D6
D7
D8
GREEN
GREEN
GREEN
Zero/Span Gas
Valve Option
Valve Open to SPAN GAS
FLOW
Valve Open to ZERO GAS FLOW
Shutoff Valve
Option
Valve Open to CAL GAS
FLOW
Valve CLOSED to CAL GAS
FLOW
IR SOURCE
Source ON
Source OFF
DC VOLTAGE TEST
POINTS
STATUS LED’s
RELAY PCA
PN 04135
05232 Rev B3
179
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THEORY OF OPERATION
Model 360E Instruction Manual
Figure 10-14: Location of relay board Status LED’s
10.3.5.2. I2C Watch Dog Circuitry
Special circuitry on the relay board monitors the activity on the I2C bus and drives LED D1. Should this LED
ever stay ON or OFF for 30 seconds, the watchdog circuit will automatically shut of all valves as well as turn off
the IR Source and all heaters. The GFC wheel motor will still be running as will the Sample Pump, which is not
controlled by the relay board.
10.3.6. Mother Board
This printed circuit assembly provides a multitude of functions including, A/D conversion, digital input/output, PC-
104 to I2C translation, temperature sensor signal processing and is a pass through for the RS-232 and RS-485
signals.
10.3.6.1. A to D Conversion
Analog signals, such as the voltages received from the analyzer’s various sensors, are converted into digital
signals that the CPU can understand and manipulate by the analog to digital converter (A/D). Under the control
of the CPU, this functional block selects a particular signal input (e.g. BOX TEMP, CO2 MEAS, CO2 REF, etc.)
and then coverts the selected voltage into a digital word.
The A/D consists of a voltage-to-frequency (V-F) converter, a programmable logic device (PLD), three
multiplexers, several amplifiers and some other associated devices. The V-F converter produces a frequency
proportional to its input voltage. The PLD counts the output of the V-F during a specified time period, and sends
the result of that count, in the form of a binary number, to the CPU.
The A/D can be configured for several different input modes and ranges but in the M360E is used in uni-polar
mode with a +5 V full scale. The converter includes a 1% over and under-range. This allows signals from –0.05
V to +5.05 V to be fully converted.
For calibration purposes, two reference voltages are supplied to the A/D converter: Reference Ground and
+4.096 VDC. During calibration, the device measures these two voltages, outputs their digital equivalent to the
CPU. The CPU uses these values to compute the converter’s offset and slope and uses these factors for
subsequent conversions.
See Section 6.13.4 for instructions on performing this calibration.
10.3.6.2. Sensor Inputs
The key analog sensor signals are coupled to the A/D through the master multiplexer from two connectors on
the motherboard. 100K terminating resistors on each of the inputs prevent cross talk from appearing on the
sensor signals.
Co2 Measure And Reference
These are the primary signals that are used in the computation of the CO2 concentration. They are the
demodulated IR-sensor signals from the sync demodulator board.
Sample Pressure And Flow
These are analog signals from two sensors that measure the pressure and flow rate of the gas stream at the
outlet of the sample chamber. This information is used in two ways. First, the sample pressure is used by the
CPU to calculate CO2 Concentration. Second, the pressure and flow rate are monitored as a test function to
assist the user in predicting and troubleshooting failures.
180
05232 Rev B3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
THEORY OF OPERATION
10.3.6.3. Thermistor Interface
This circuit provides excitation, termination and signal selection for several negative-coefficient, thermistor
temperature sensors located inside the analyzer. They are:
Sample Temperature Sensor
The source of this signal is a thermistor located inside the sample chamber of the Optical Bench. It measures
the temperature of the sample gas in the chamber. This data is used to during the calculation of the CO2
concentration value.
Bench Temperature Sensor
This thermistor, attached to the sample chamber housing, reports the current temperature of the chamber
housing to the CPU as part of the bench heater control loop.
Wheel Temperature Sensor
This thermistor (attached to the heat-sync on the GFC wheel motor assembly) reports the current temperature of
the wheel/motor assembly to the CPU as part of the Wheel Heater control loop.
Box Temperature Sensor
A thermistor is attached to the motherboard. It measures the analyzer’s inside temperature. This information is
stored by the CPU and can be viewed by the user for troubleshooting purposes via the front panel display (See
Section 11.1.2).
10.3.6.4. Analog Outputs
The analyzer comes equipped with four analog outputs: A1, A2, A3 and A4. . In its standard configuration, the
analyzer comes with all four of these channels set up to output a DC voltage. However, 4-20mA current loop
drivers can be purchased for the first three of these outputs: A2, A2 & A3.
A2 and A1 Output
The first two, A2 and A1 are normally set up to operate in parallel so that the same data can be sent to two
different recording devices. While the names imply that one should be used for sending data to a chart recorder
and the other for interfacing with a data logger, either can be used for both applications.
Both of these channels output a signal that is proportional to the CO2 concentration of the sample gas. The A1
and A2 outputs can be slaved together or set up to operated independently. A variety of scaling factors are
available, See Section 6.13.4 for information on setting the range type and scaling factors for these output
channels.
A3 Output
Analog output channel A3 is only active when the O2 sensor option is installed in the M360E. In this case, the
currently measured O2 concentration is output.
Test Function Output
The fourth analog output, labeled A4 is special. It can be set by the user (See Section 6.9.9) to carry the current
signal level of any one of the parameters accessible through the SETUP MORE DIAG TEST CHAN
OUTPUT submenu (See Section 6.13.9) of the unit’s software.
Output Loop-back
05232 Rev B3
181
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THEORY OF OPERATION
Model 360E Instruction Manual
All four analog outputs are connected back to the A/D converter through a Loop-back circuit. This permits the
voltage outputs to be calibrated by the CPU without need for any additional tools or fixtures.
10.3.6.5. Internal Digital I/O
This channel is used to communicate digital status and control signals about the operation of key components of
the Optical Bench. The CPU sends signals to the synch/demod board that initiate the ELECTRICAL TEST and
DARK CALIBRATION procedures. Likewise, the synch/demod board uses this interface to send the SYNC
warning signal to the CPU (See Sections 6.9.5, 6.9.6 and 11.1.1).
10.3.6.6. External Digital I/O
This External Digital I/O performs two functions.
Status Outputs
Logic-Level voltages are output through an optically isolated 8-pin connector located on the rear panel of the
analyzer. These outputs convey good/bad and on/off information about certain analyzer conditions. They can
be used to interface with certain types of programmable devices (See Section 6.13.1.1).
Control Inputs
By applying +5VDC power supplied from an external source such as a PLC or Data logger (See Section
6.13.1.2), Zero and Span calibrations can be initiated by contact closures on the rear panel.
10.3.7. I2C Data Bus
An I2C data bus is used to communicate data and commands between the CPU and the keyboard/display
interface and the relay board. I2C is a two-wire, clocked, digital serial I/O bus that is used widely in commercial
and consumer electronic systems. A transceiver on the motherboard converts data and control signals from the
PC-104 bus to I2C. The data is then fed to the keyboard/display interface and finally onto the relay board.
Interface circuits on the keyboard/display interface and relay boards convert the i2c data to parallel inputs and
outputs. An additional, interrupt line from the keyboard to the motherboard allows the CPU to recognize and
service key presses on the keyboard.
Power up Circuit
This circuit monitors the +5V power supply during start-up and sets the Analog outputs, external digital I/O ports,
and I2C circuitry to specific values until the CPU boots and the instrument software can establish control.
182
05232 Rev B3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
THEORY OF OPERATION
10.3.8. Power Supply/ Circuit Breaker
The analyzer operates on 100 VAC, 115 VAC or 230 VAC power at either 50Hz or 60Hz. Individual units are set
up at the factory to accept any combination of these five attributes. As illustrated in Figure 10-15, power enters
the analyzer through a standard IEC 320 power receptacle located on the rear panel of the instrument. From
there it is routed through the On/Off switch located in the lower right corner of the Front Panel. A 6.75 Amp
circuit breaker is built into the ON/OFF Switch.
AC power is distributed directly to the sample gas pump. The bench and GFC wheel heaters as well as the GFC
wheel receive AC power via the relay board.
AC Line power is converted stepped down and converted to DC power by two DC power supplies. One supplies
+12 VDC, for valves and the IR source, while a second supply provides +5 VDC and ±15 VDC for logic and
analog circuitry. All DC voltages are distributed via the relay board.
CAUTION
Should the AC power circuit breaker trip, investigate and correct the condition causing
this situation before turning the analyzer back on.
ON/OFF
SWITCH
AC POWER
Pressure
Sensors
ENTRANCE
Display
Keypad
CPU
PS 1 (+5 VDC; ±15 VDC)
RELAY
BOARD
KEY
AC POWER
DC POWER
Mother
Board
PS 2 (+12 VDC)
Sync/Demod
IR Source
Cooling Fan
Pump
M/R &
Segment
Sensors
GFC Wheel
Motor
Valve Options
Heaters
Figure 10-15: Power Distribution Block Diagram
05232 Rev B3
183
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THEORY OF OPERATION
Model 360E Instruction Manual
10.4. Interface
The analyzer has several ways to communicate the outside world, see Figure 10-16. Users can input data and
receive information directly via the Front panel keypad and display. Direct communication with the CPU is also
available by way of the analyzer’s RS232 & RS485 I/O ports or an optional Ethernet port. The analyzer can also
send and receive different kinds of information via its external digital I/O connectors and the three analog outputs
located on the rear panel.
COMM A
Male
RS–232 ONLY
RS-232 or RS–485
COMM B
CPU
Female
Mother
Board
Control Inputs:
ETHERNET
OPTION
1 – 6
Status Outputs:
1 – 8
PC/104 BUS
Analog Outputs
KEYBOARD
A1
A2
Optional
4-20 mA
I2C BUS
A3
I2C BUS
A4ST
RELAY
BOARD
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY
10.4.1. Front Panel Interface
MODE FIELD
MESSAGE FIELD
CONCENTRATION FIELD
STATUS LED’s
LOCKING SCREW
FASTENER
FASTENER
SAMPLE
CAL
CO2 = 400.0
SETUP
SAMPLE A
RANGE = 500.0 PPM
<TST TST> CAL
FAULT
POWER
GAS FILTER CORRELATION CO2 ANALYZER- MODEL 360E
KEY DEFINITIONS
KEYBOARD
ON / OFF SWITCH
Figure 10-17: M360E Front Panel Layout
184
05232 Rev B3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
THEORY OF OPERATION
The most commonly used method for communicating with the M360E Analyzer is via the instrument’s front panel
which includes a set of three status LEDs, a vacuum florescent display and a keyboard with 8 context sensitive
keys.
10.4.1.1. Analyzer Status LED’s
Three LEDs are used to inform the user of the instruments basic operating status
Table 10-3: Front Panel Status LED’s
NAME
COLOR
STATE
Off
DEFINITION
SAMPLE
Green
Unit is not operating in sample mode, iDAS is disabled.
On
Sample Mode active; Front Panel Display being updated, iDAS data being stored.
Unit is operating in sample mode, front panel display being updated, iDAS hold-off mode is
ON, iDAS disabled
Blinking
Off
CAL
Yellow
Red
Auto Cal disabled
On
Auto Cal enabled
Blinking
Off
Unit is in calibration mode
FAULT
CO2 warnings exist
Warnings exist
Blinking
10.4.1.2. Keyboard
A row of eight keys just below the vacuum florescent display (see Figure 10-17) is the main method by which the
user interacts with the analyzer. As the software is operated, labels appear on the bottom row of the display
directly above each active key, defining the function of that key as it is relevant for the operation being
performed. Pressing a key causes the associated instruction to be performed by the analyzer.
Note that the keys do not auto-repeat. In circumstances where the same key must be activated for two
consecutive operations, it must be released and re-pressed.
10.4.1.3. Display
The main display of the analyzer is a vacuum florescent display with two lines of 40 text characters each.
Information is organized in the following manner (see Figure 10-17):
Mode Field: Displays the name of the analyzer’s current operating mode.
Message Field: Displays a variety of informational messages such as warning messages, operation data and
response messages during interactive tasks.
Concentration Field: Displays the actual concentration of the sample gas currently being measured by the
analyzer
Keypad Definition Field: Displays the definitions for the row of keys just below the display. These definitions
dynamic, context sensitive and software driven.
05232 Rev B3
185
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THEORY OF OPERATION
Model 360E Instruction Manual
10.4.1.4. Keyboard/Display Interface Electronics
I2C to Relay Board
Key Press
Detect
Display Data
Decoder
Display
Controller
Display Power
Watchdog
Keypad
Decoder
I2C Interface
Serial
Data
From 5 VDC
Power Supply
Optional
Maintenance
LED
Sample LED
(Green)
Maint.
Switch
2nd Lang.
Switch
Cal LED
(Yellow)
2 x 40 CHAR. VACUUM
FLUORESCENT DISPLAY
Fault LED
(Red)
KEYBOARD
FRONT PANEL
Beeper
Figure 10-18: Keyboard and Display Interface Block Diagram
The keyboard/display interface electronics of the M360E Analyzer watches the status of the eight front panel
keys, alerts the CPU when keys are depressed, translates data from parallel to serial and back and manages
communications between the keyboard, the CPU and the front panel display. Except for the Keyboard interrupt
status bit, all communication between the CPU and the keyboard/display is handled by way of the instrument’s
I2C buss. The CPU controls the clock signal and determines when the various devices on the bus are allowed to
talk or required to listen. Data packets are labeled with addresses that identify for which device the information
is intended.
KEYPAD DECODER
Each key on the front panel communicates with a decoder IC via a separate analog line. When a key is
depressed the decoder chip notices the change of state of the associated signal; latches and holds the state of
all eight lines (in effect creating an 8-bit data word); alerts the key-depress-detect circuit (a flip-flop IC);
translates the 8-bit word into serial data and; sends this to the I2C interface chip.
KEY-DEPRESS-DETECT CIRCUIT
This circuit flips the state of one of the inputs to the I2C interface chip causing it to send an interrupt signal to the
CPU
186
05232 Rev B3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
THEORY OF OPERATION
I2C INTERFACE CHIP
This IC performs several functions:
Using a dedicated digital status bit, it sends an interrupt signal alerting the CPU that new data from the
keyboard is ready to send.
Upon acknowledgement by the CPU that it has received the new keyboard data, the I2C interface chip
resets the key-depress-detect flip-flop.
In response to commands from the CPU, it turns the front panel status LEDs on and off and activates
the beeper.
Informs the CPU when the optional maintenance and second language switches have been opened or
closed (see Chapter 5 for information on these options).
DISPLAY DATA DECODER
This decoder the serial translates the data sent by the CPU (in TTY format) into a bitmapped image which is
sent over a parallel data bus to the display.
DISPLAY CONTROLLER
This circuit manages the interactions between the display data decoder and the display itself. It generates a
clock pulse that keeps the two devices synchronized. It can also, in response to commands from the CPU turn
off and/or reset the display.
Additionally, for analyzers with the optional maintenance switch is installed (See Chapter 5), the display
controller turns on an LED located on the back of the keyboard interface PCA whenever the instrument is placed
in maintenance mode.
DISPLAY POWER WATCHDOG
The Model 360E’s display can begin to show garbled information or lock-up if the DC voltage supplied to it falls
too low, even momentarily. To alleviate this, a brown-out watchdog circuit monitors the level of the power supply
and in the event that the voltage level falls below a certain level, turns the display off, then on resetting it
I2C LINK TO THE RELAY PCA
While the CPU’s I2C communication with the relay board is also routed through the keyboard/display interface,
information passed to and from the relay board via this channel is not recognized by, acted upon or affected by
the circuitry of the keyboard/display interface.
05232 Rev B3
187
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THEORY OF OPERATION
Model 360E Instruction Manual
10.5. Software Operation
The Model 360E Gas Filter Correlation Carbon Dioxide Analyzer is at its heart a high performance, 386-based
microcomputer running MS-DOS. Inside the DOS shell, special software developed by Teledyne Instruments
interprets user commands via the various interfaces, performs procedures and tasks, stores data in the CPU’s
various memory devices and calculates the concentration of the sample gas.
DOS Shell
API FIRMWARE
Analyzer Operations
Calibration Procedures
Configuration Procedures
Memory Handling
IDAS Records
Calibration Data
PC/104 BUS
Autonomic Systems
Diagnostic Routines
System Status Data
ANALYZER
HARDWARE
Interface Handling
Sensor input Data
Display Messages
Measurement
Algorithm
Keypad
Analog Output Data
RS232 & RS485
External Digital I/O
PC/104 BUS
Linearization Table
Figure 10-19: Basic Software Operation
10.5.1. Adaptive Filter
The M360E software processes the CO2 MEAS and CO2 REF signals, after they are digitized by the
motherboard, through an adaptive filter built into the software. Unlike other analyzers that average the output
signal over a fixed time period, the M360E averages over a set number of samples, where each sample is 0.2
seconds. This is technique is known as boxcar averaging. During operation, the software automatically
switches between two different length filters based on the conditions at hand. Once triggered, the short filter
remains engaged for a fixed time period to prevent chattering.
During conditions of constant or nearly constant concentration the software, by default, computes an average of
the last 750 samples, or approximately 150 seconds. This provides the calculation portion of the software with
smooth stable readings. If a rapid change in concentration is detected the filter includes, by default, the last 48
samples, approximately 10 seconds of data, to allow the analyzer to more quickly respond. If necessary, these
boxcar lengths can be changed between 1 and 1000 samples but with corresponding tradeoffs in rise time and
signal-to-noise ratio (contact customer service for more information).
188
05232 Rev B3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
THEORY OF OPERATION
Two conditions must be simultaneously met to switch to the short filter. First the instantaneous concentration
must exceed the average in the long filter by a fixed amount. Second the instantaneous concentration must
exceed the average in the long filter by a portion, or percentage, of the average in the long filter.
10.5.2. Calibration - Slope and Offset
Calibration of the analyzer is performed exclusively in software.
During instrument calibration (see Chapter 7) the user enters expected values for zero and span via the front
panel keypad and commands the instrument to make readings of calibrated sample gases for both levels. The
readings taken are adjusted, linearized, and compared to the expected values, With this information the software
computes values for instrument slope and offset and stores these values in memory for use in calculating the
CO2 concentration of the sample gas.
The instrument slope and offset values recorded during the last calibration can be viewed by pressing the
following keystroke sequence:
SAMPLE
RANGE = 50.0 MGM
CO =XX.XX
SETUP
< TST TST > CAL
SAMPLE
OFFSET = 0.000
CO =XX.XX
SETUP
< TST TST > CAL
SAMPLE
TIME = 16:23:34
CO =XX.XX
SETUP
< TST TST > CAL
SAMPLE
SLOPE = 1.000
CO =XX.XX
SETUP
< TST TST > CAL
10.5.3. Measurement Algorithm
Once the IR photo-detector is signal is demodulated into CO2 MEAS and CO2 REF by the sync/demod board
and converted to digital data by the motherboard the M360E analytical software calculates the ratio between
CO2 MEAS and CO2 REF. This value is compared to a look-up table is used, with interpolation, to linearize the
response of the instrument. The linearized concentration value is combined with calibration slope and offset
values, then normalized for changes in sample gas pressure to produce the final CO2 concentration. This is the
value that is displayed on the instrument front panel display and is stored in memory by the analyzer’s iDAS
system.
10.5.4. Temperature and Pressure Compensation
Changes in pressure can have a noticeable, effect on the CO2 concentration calculation. To account for this, the
Model 360E software includes a feature which allows the instrument to compensation of the CO2 calculations
based on changes in ambient pressure.
The TPC feature multiplies the analyzer’s CO2 concentration by a factor which is based on the difference
between the ambient pressure of the sample gas normalized to standard atmospheric pressure. As ambient
pressure increases, the compensated CO2 concentration is increased.
05232 Rev B3
189
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THEORY OF OPERATION
Model 360E Instruction Manual
10.5.5. Internal Data Acquisition System (iDAS)
The iDAS is designed to implement predictive diagnostics that stores trending data for users to anticipate when
an instrument will require service. Large amounts of data can be stored in non-volatile memory and retrieved in
plain text format for further processing with common data analysis programs. The iDAS has a consistent user
interface in all Teledyne Instruments analyzers. New data parameters and triggering events can be added to the
instrument as needed.
Depending on the sampling frequency and the number of data parameters the iDAS can store several months of
data, which are retained even when the instrument is powered off or a new firmware is installed. The iDAS
permits users to access the data through the instrument’s front panel or the remote interface. The latter can
automatically download stored data for further processing. For information on using the iDAS, refer to Sections
6.12.
User Notes
190
05232 Rev B3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR PROCEDURES
11. TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR PROCEDURES
This contains a variety of methods for identifying the source of performance problems with the analyzer. Also
included in this are procedures that are used in repairing the instrument.
CAUTION
The operations outlined in this chapter are to be performed by qualified maintenance
personnel only.
CAUTION
Risk of electrical shock. Disconnect power before performing the following
operations.
11.1. General Troubleshooting Hints
The analyzer has been designed so that problems can be rapidly detected, evaluated and repaired. During
operation, the analyzer continuously performs self-check diagnostics and provides the ability to monitor the key
operating parameters of the instrument without disturbing monitoring operations.
A systematic approach to troubleshooting will generally consist of the following four steps:
1. Note any WARNING MESSAGES and take corrective action as required.
2. Examine the values of all TEST functions and compare to factory values. Note any major deviations
from the factory values and take correction action as required.
3. Use the internal electronic status LED’s to determine whether the CPU and I2C buses are running, and if
the sync/demodulator and relay board are operating properly. Verify that the DC power supplies are
operating properly by checking the voltage test points on the relay board. Please note that the
analyzer’s DC power wiring is color-coded and these colors match the color of the corresponding test
points on the relay board.
4. SUSPECT A LEAK FIRST! Data from Teledyne Instruments’ service department indicates that 50% of
all problems are eventually traced to leaks in the pneumatic connections and gas lines of the analyzer
itself, the source of zero air, span gases or sample gas delivery system.
Check for gas flow problems such as clogged or blocked internal/external gas lines, damaged seals,
punctured gas lines, a damaged pump diaphragm, etc.
5. Follow the procedures defined in Section 11.5 for confirming that the analyzer’s basic components are
working (power supplies, CPU, relay board, sync/demod board, keypad, GFC wheel motor, etc.). See
Figure 3-3 for general layout of components and sub-assemblies in the analyzer. See the wiring
Interconnect Drawing and Interconnect List, documents 04216 and 04217.
05232 Rev B3
191
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR PROCEDURES
Model 360E Instruction Manual
11.1.1. Interpreting WARNING Messages
The most common and/or serious instrument failures will result in a warning message being displayed on the
front panel. Table 11-1 lists warning messages, along with their meaning and recommended corrective action.
It should be noted that if more than two or three warning messages occur at the same time, it is often an
indication that some fundamental analyzer sub-system (power supply, relay board, motherboard) has failed
rather than indication of the specific failures referenced by the warnings. In this case, it is recommended that
proper operation of power supplies (See Section 11.5.2), the relay board (See Section 11.5.5), and the A/D
Board (See Section11.4.7.1) be confirmed before addressing the specific warning messages.
The analyzer will alert the user that a Warning Message is active by displaying the keypad label MSG on the
Front Panel. In this case the Front panel display will look something like the following:
SAMPLE
BENCH TEMP WARNING
CO2 = XXX.0
TEST CAL
MSG CLR SETUP
The analyzer will also alert the user via the Serial I/O COM port(s) and cause the FAULT LED on the front panel
to blink.
To view or clear the various warning messages press:
SAMPLE
WHEEL TEMP WARNING
CAL MSG
CO2 = XX.XX
CLR SETUP
TEST deactivates Warning
Messages until New warning(s)
are activated
TEST
MSG activates Warning
SAMPLE
RANGE=500.00 PPM
MSG
CO2 = XX.XX
CLR SETUP
Messages.
<TST TST> keys replaced with
< TST TST > CAL
TEST key
SAMPLE
WHEEL TEMP WARNING
CO2 = XX.XX
Press CLR to clear the
message currently being
Displayed.
< TST TST > CAL
MSG
CLR SETUP
If more than one warning is
active the next message will
take its place
Once the last warning has been
cleared, the analyzer returns to
SAMPLE Mode
Make sure warning messages
are not due to
legitimate problems..
Figure 11-1: Viewing and Clearing Warning Messages
192
05232 Rev B3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR PROCEDURES
Table 11-1: Warning Messages - Indicated Failures
WARNING
MESSAGE
FAULT CONDITION
POSSIBLE CAUSES
Bad bench heater
Bad bench temperature sensor
Bad relay controlling the bench heater
Entire relay board is malfunctioning
The optical bench temp is
BENCH TEMP
WARNING
controlled at 48 2 °C.
I2C buss malfunction
NOTE: Box temperature typically runs ~7oc warmer than
ambient temperature.
Poor/blocked ventilation to the analyzer.
Stopped exhaust-fan
BOX TEMP
WARNING
Box Temp is
< 5 °C or > 48 °C.
Ambient temperature outside of specified range
Measured concentration value is too high or low.
Concentration slope value to high or too low
Measured concentration value is too high.
Concentration offset value to high.
Failed disk on chip
CANNOT DYN
SPAN
CANNOT DYN
ZERO
CONFIG
INITIALIZED
Dynamic Span operation failed
Dynamic Zero operation failed
Configuration and Calibration data
reset to original Factory state.
Concentration alarm 1 is enabled
and the measured CO2 level is ≥
the set point.
User erased data
CONC ALRM1
WARNING
Concentration alarm 2 is enabled
and the measured CO2 level is ≥
the set point.
CONC ALRM2
WARNING
Failed disk on chip
User cleared data
DATA INITIALIZED
Data Storage in iDAS was erased
Warning only appears on serial I/O com port(s)
Front panel display will be frozen, blank or will not respond.
Failed keyboard
The CPU is unable to
Communicate with the Front Panel
Display /Keyboard
FRONT PANEL
WARN
I2C buss failure
Loose connector/wiring
Failed IR photo-detector
PHOTO TEMP
WARNING
PHT DRIVE is
>4800 mVDC
Failed sync/demod board
IR photo-detector improperly attached to the sample chamber
Bench temp too high.
Mother Board not detected on
power up.
Warning only appears on serial i/o com port(s)
Front panel display will be frozen, blank or will not respond.
Massive failure of mother board
REAR BOARD NOT
DET
I2C buss failure
RELAY BOARD
WARN
The CPU cannot communicate with
the Relay Board.
Failed relay board
Loose connectors/wiring
Failed sample pump
Blocked sample inlet/gas line
Dirty particulate filter
SAMPLE FLOW
WARN
Sample flow rate is < 500 cc/min or
> 1000 cc/min.
Leak downstream of critical flow orifice
Failed flow sensor/circuitry
If sample pressure is < 10 in-hg:
o Blocked particulate filter
o Blocked sample inlet/gas line
o Failed pressure sensor/circuitry
SAMPLE PRES
WARN
Sample Pressure is <10 in-Hg or
> 35 in-Hg
Normally 29.92 in-Hg at sea level
decreasing at 1 in-Hg per 1000 ft of
altitude (with no flow – pump
disconnected).
If sample pressure is > 35 in-hg:
o Pressurized sample gas. Install vent
o Blocked vent line on pressurized sample/zero/span gas
supply
o Bad pressure sensor/circuitry
05232 Rev B3
193
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR PROCEDURES
Model 360E Instruction Manual
Table 11-1: Warning Messages – Indicated Failures (cont.)
WARNING
MESSAGE
FAULT CONDITION
POSSIBLE CAUSES
SAMPLE TEMP
WARN
Sample temperature is < 10oC or >
100oC.
Ambient temperature outside of specified range
Failed bench heater
Failed bench temperature sensor
Relay controlling the bench heater
Failed relay board
I2C buss
SOURCE
WARNING
Occurs when CO2 Ref is <1250
mVDC or >4950 mVDC.
GFC wheel stopped
Failed sync/demod board
If status LED’s on the sync/demod board ARE flashing the
cause is most likely a failed:
IR source
Either of these conditions will result
in an invalid M/R ratio.
Relay board
I2C buss
IR photo-detector
SYSTEM RESET
The computer has rebooted.
This message occurs at power on. If you have not cycled the
power on your instrument:
o Failed +5 VDC power,
o Fatal error caused software to restart
o Loose connector/wiring
WHEEL TEMP
WARNING
The filter wheel temperature is
Blocked cooling vents below GFC Assembly. Make sure that
adequate clear space beneath the analyzer.
Analyzer’s top cover removed
Wheel heater
controlled at 68 2 °C
Wheel temperature sensor
Relay controlling the wheel heater
Entire relay board
I2C buss
11.1.2. Fault Diagnosis with TEST Functions
Besides being useful as predictive diagnostic tools, the test functions viewable from the front panel can be used
to isolate and identify many operational problems when combined with a thorough understanding of the
analyzer’s theory of operation (see Chapter 10).
The acceptable ranges for these test functions are listed in the “Nominal Range” column of the analyzer Final
Test and Validation Data Sheet (p/n 04307) shipped with the instrument. Values outside these acceptable
ranges indicate a failure of one or more of the analyzer’s subsystems. Functions whose values are still within
the acceptable range but have significantly changed from the measurement recorded on the factory data sheet
may also indicate a failure. A worksheet has been provided in Appendix C to assist in recording the value of
these test functions.
Table 11-2 contains some of the more common causes for these values to be out of range.
194
05232 Rev B3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
Table 11-2: Test Functions - Indicated Failures
INDICATED FAILURE(S)
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR PROCEDURES
TEST
FUNCTIONS
Time of day clock is too fast or slow: To adjust See Section 6.6.
Battery in clock chip on CPU board may be dead.
TIME
Incorrectly configured measurement range(s) could cause response problems with a Data logger or chart
recorder attached to one of the analog output.
If the Range selected is too small, the recording device will over range.
If the Range is too big, the device will show minimal or no apparent change in readings.
Indicates noise level of instrument or CO2 concentration of sample gas (See Section 11.4.2 for causes).
RANGE
STABIL
If the value displayed is too high the IR Source has become brighter. Adjust the variable gain
potentiometer on the sync/demod board
If the value displayed is too low or constantly changing and the CO2 REF is OK:
o Failed multiplexer on the mother board
o Failed sync/demod board
o Loose connector or wiring on sync/demod board
Flow of purge gas to the GFC wheel housing may have stopped
If the value displayed is too low or constantly changing and the CO2 REF is BAD:
o GFC wheel stopped or rotation is too slow
o Failed sync/demod board IR source
CO2 MEAS
&
CO2 REF
o Failed IR source
o Failed relay board
o Failed I2C buss
o Failed IR photo-detector
When the analyzer is sampling zero air and the ratio is too low:
o The reference cell of the GFC wheel is contaminated or leaking.
o The alignment between the GFC wheel and the segment sensor, the M/R sensor or both is
incorrect.
MR RATIO
o Failed sync/demod board
o Flow of purge gas to the GFC wheel housing may have stopped
When the analyzer is sampling zero air and the ratio is too high:
o Zero air is contaminated
o Failed IR photo-detector
See Table 11-1 for SAMPLE PRES WARN
PRES
Check for gas flow problems. see Section 11.1.6
SAMPLE FL
SAMPLE TEMP should be close to BENCH TEMP. Temperatures outside of the specified range or
oscillating temperatures are cause for concern
SAMPLE
TEMP
Bench temp control improves instrument noise, stability and drift. Temperatures outside of the specified
range or oscillating temperatures are cause for concern. See Table 11-1 for BENCH TEMP WARNING
Wheel temp control improves instrument noise, stability and drift. Outside of set point or oscillating
temperatures are cause for concern. See Table 11-1 for WHEEL TEMP WARNING
If the box temperature is out of range, check fan in the power supply module. Areas to the side and rear
of instrument should allow adequate ventilation. See Table 11-1 for BOX TEMP WARNING.
If this drive voltage is out of range it may indicate one of several problems:
- A poor mechanical connection between the various components in inside the detector housing
- An electronic failure of the IR Photo-Detector’s built-in cooling circuitry, or;
- A temperature problem inside the analyzer chassis. In this case other temperature warnings would also
be active such as BENCH TEMP WARNING or BOX TEMP WARNING.
Values outside range indicate
BENCH TEMP
WHEEL TEMP
BOX TEMP
PHT DRIVE
Contamination of the zero air or span gas supply
Instrument is miss-calibrated
Blocked gas flow
SLOPE
Contaminated or leaking GFC wheel (either chamber)
Faulty IR photo-detector
Faulty sample faulty IR photo-detector pressure sensor (P1) or circuitry
Invalid M/R ratio (see above)
Bad/incorrect span gas concentration due.
Values outside range indicate
Contamination of the zero air supply
Contaminated or leaking GFC wheel (either chamber)
OFFSET
Faulty IR photo-detector
05232 Rev B3
195
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR PROCEDURES
Model 360E Instruction Manual
11.1.3. Using the Diagnostic Signal I/O Function
The Signal I/O parameters found under the DIAG Menu (See Section 6.9.2 and Appendix A) combined with a
thorough understanding of the instrument’s Theory of Operation (found in Chapter 10) are useful for
troubleshooting in three ways:
The technician can view the raw, unprocessed signal level of the analyzer’s critical inputs and outputs.
All of the components and functions that are normally under algorithmic control of the CPU can be
manually exercised.
The technician can directly control the signal level of the Analog and Digital Output signals.
This allows the technician to systematically observe the effect of directly controlling these signals on the
operation of the analyzer. Below in Figure 11-2 is an example of how to use the signal I/O menu to view the raw
voltage of an input signal or to control the state of an output voltage or control signal. The specific parameter will
vary depending on the situation.
SAMPLE*
RANGE = 500.000 PPM
CO2 =X.XXX
< TST TST > CAL
SETUP
SETUP X.X
PRIMARY SETUP MENU
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE
EXIT
SETUP X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU
COMM VARS DIAG
EXIT
SAMPLE
ENTER SETUP PASS : 818
8
8
1
ENTR EXIT
DIAG
SIGNAL I/O
PREV NEXT
DIAG I/O
ENTR
EXIT
0 ) EXT_ZERO_CAL=ON
PREV NEXT JUMP
PRNT EXIT
If parameter is an
input signal
If parameter is an output
signal or control
DIAG I/O
28) SAMPLE_PRESSURE=2540 MV
DIAG I/O
22) WHEEL_HTR=ON
PREV NEXT JUMP
PRNT EXIT
PREV NEXT JUMP
ON PRNT EXIT
Toggles parameter
ON/OFF
DIAG I/O
22 ) WHEEL_HTR=OFF
PREV NEXT JUMP
OFF PRNT EXIT
Exit returns to
DIAG display & all values
return to software control
Figure 11-2: Example of Signal I/O Function
196
05232 Rev B3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR PROCEDURES
11.1.4. Internal Electronic Status LED’s
Several LED’s are located inside the instrument to assist in determining if the analyzer’s CPU, I2C buss and
relay board, GFC wheel and the sync/demodulator board are functioning properly.
11.1.4.1. CPU Status Indicator
DS5, a red LED, that is located on upper portion of the motherboard, just to the right of the CPU board, flashes
when the CPU is running the main program loop. After power-up, approximately 30 to 60 seconds, DS5 should
flash on and off. If characters are written to the front panel display but DS5 does not flash then the program files
have become corrupted. If after 30 – 60 seconds neither the DS5 is flashing or no characters have been written
to the front panel display then the CPU is bad and must be replaced.
Mother Board
P/N 04069
CPU Status LED
Figure 11-3: CPU Status Indicator
11.1.4.2. Sync Demodulator Status LED’s
Two LED’s located on the Sync/Demod Board and are there to make it obvious that the GFC Wheel is spinning
and the synchronization signals are present:
Table 11-3: Sync/Demod Board Status Failure Indications
LED
FUNCTION
M/R Sensor Status
(Flashes slowly)
FAULT STATUS
INDICATED FAILURE(S)
GFC Wheel is not turning
M/R Sensor on Opto-Pickup Board failed
Sync/Demod Board failed
LED is stuck
ON or OFF
D1
JP 4 Connector/Wiring faulty
Failed/Faulty +5 VDC Power Supply (PS1)
GFC Wheel is not turning
Segment Sensor on Opto-Pickup Board failed
Sync/Demod Board failed
JP 4 Connector/Wiring faulty
Failed/Faulty +5 VDC Power Supply (PS1)
Segment Sensor
Status
LED is stuck
ON or OFF
D2
(Flashes quickly)
05232 Rev B3
197
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR PROCEDURES
Model 360E Instruction Manual
D1 – M/R Sensor Status
D2 – Segment Sensor Status
JP4 Connector to Opto-Pickup
Board
Figure 11-4: Sync/Demod Board Status LED Locations
11.1.4.3. Relay Board Status LED’s
There are eight LED’s located on the Relay Board. The most important of which is D1, which indicates the
health of the I2C buss. If D1 is blinking the other faults following LED’s can be used in conjunction with DIAG
menu signal I/O to identify hardware failures of the relays and switches on the relay (See Section 6.9.2 and
Appendix D).
Table 11-4: I2C Status LED Failure Indications
LED
FUNCTION
FAULT STATUS
INDICATED FAILURE(S)
Failed/Halted CPU
I2C buss Health
(Watchdog
Circuit)
Continuously ON
or
Continuously OFF
Faulty Mother Board, Keyboard or Relay Board
Faulty Connectors/Wiring between Mother Board,
Keyboard or Relay Board
D1
(Red)
Failed/Faulty +5 VDC Power Supply (PS1)
DC VOLTAGE TEST
POINTS
STATUS LED’s
RELAY PCA
PN 04135
Figure 11-5: Relay Board Status LEDs
198
05232 Rev B3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR PROCEDURES
Table 11-5: Relay Board Status LED Failure Indications
SIGNAL I/O PARAMETER
ACTIVATED BY VIEW RESULT
LED
FUNCTION
DIAGNOSTIC TECHNIQUE
Voltage displayed should change. If not:
Failed Heater
WHEEL_TEMP Faulty Temperature Sensor
Failed AC Relay
D2
Yellow
WHEEL
HEATER
WHEEL_HEATER
Faulty Connectors/Wiring
Voltage displayed should change. If not:
Failed Heater
BENCH_TEMP Faulty Temperature Sensor
Failed AC Relay
D3
Yellow
BENCH
HEATER
BENCH_HEATER
N/A
Faulty Connectors/Wiring
D4
Yellow
SPARE
N/A
N/A
Sample/Cal Valve should audibly change states. If
not:
SAMPLE/CAL
GAS VALVE
OPTION
Failed Valve
Failed Relay Drive IC on Relay Board
Failed Relay Board
D5
Green
CAL_VALVE
N/A
Faulty +12 VDC Supply (PS2)
Faulty Connectors/Wiring
Zero/Span Valve should audibly change states. If
not:
ZERO/SPAN
GAS VALVE
OPTION
Failed Valve
Failed Relay Drive IC on Relay Board
Failed Relay Board
Faulty +12 VDC Supply (PS2)
Faulty Connectors/Wiring
Shutoff Valve should audibly change states. If not:
Failed Valve
Failed Relay Drive IC on Relay Board
Failed Relay Board
Faulty +12 VDC Supply (PS2)
Faulty Connectors/Wiring
Voltage displayed should change. If not:
Failed IR Source
D6
Green
SPAN_VALVE
SHUTOFF_VALVE
IR_SOURCE
N/A
N/A
D7
Green
SHUTOFF
VALVE OPTION
Faulty +12 VDC Supply (PS2)
D8
Green
IR SOURCE
CO2_MEASURE Failed Relay Board
Failed IR Photo-Detector
Failed Sync/Demod Board
Faulty Connectors/Wiring
05232 Rev B3
199
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR PROCEDURES
Model 360E Instruction Manual
11.2. Gas Flow Problems
The M360E has two main gas flow path, the sample gas flow path and the GFC purge gas flow path. Both are
controlled by a critical flow orifice. Only the sample gas path is measured and reported. When the IZS or
zero/span valve options are installed, there are several subsidiary paths but none of those are displayed on the
front panel or stored by the iDAS.
With the O2 sensor option installed, third gas flow controlled with a critical flow orifice is added, but this flow is
not measured or reported.
In general, flow problems can be divided into three categories:
Flow is too high
Flow is greater than zero, but is too low, and/or unstable
Flow is zero (no flow)
When troubleshooting flow problems, it is crucial to confirm the actual flow rate without relying on the analyzer’s
flow display. The use of an independent, external flow meter to perform a flow check as described in Section
9.3.4 is essential. If this test shows the flow to be correct, check the pressure sensors as described in Section
11.5.6.5.
The flow diagrams found in a variety of locations within this manual depicting the M360E in its standard
configuration and with options installed can help in trouble-shooting flow problems. For your convenience they
are colleted here.
11.2.1. M360E Internal Gas Flow Diagrams
Figure 11-7: M360E – Basic Internal Gas Flow
200
05232 Rev B3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR PROCEDURES
Model 360E Instruction Manual
Figure 11.9: M360E – Internal Pneumatics with O2 Sensor Option 65
11.2.2. Typical Sample Gas Flow Problems
11.2.2.1. Flow is Zero
The unit displays a SAMPLE FLOW warning message on the front panel display or the SAMPLE FLOW test
function reports a zero or very low flow rate.
Confirm that the sample pump is operating (turning). If not, use an AC voltmeter to make sure that power is
being supplied to the pump. If no power is present at the electrical leads of the pump.
1. If AC power is being supplied to the pump, but it is not turning, replace the pump.
2. If the pump is operating but the unit reports no gas flow, perform a flow check as described in Section
9.3.4.
3. If no independent flow meter is available:
Disconnect the gas lines from both the sample inlet and the exhaust outlet on the rear panel of the
instrument.
Make sure that the unit is in basic SAMPLE Mode.
Place a finger over an Exhaust outlet on the rear panel of the instrument.
If gas is flowing through the analyzer, you will feel pulses of air being expelled from the Exhaust
outlet.
202
05232 Rev B3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR PROCEDURES
4. If gas flows through the instrument when it is disconnected from its sources of zero air, span gas or
sample gas, the flow problem is most likely not internal to the analyzer. Check to make sure that:
All calibrators/generators are turned on and working correctly.
Gas bottles are not empty or low.
Valves, regulators and gas lines are not clogged or dirty.
11.2.2.2. Low Flow
1. Check if the pump diaphragm is in good condition. If not, rebuild the pump (See Section 9.3.2). Check
the Spare Parts List for information of pump rebuild kits.
2. Check for leaks as described in Section 9.3.3. Repair the leaking fitting, line or valve and re-check.
3. Check for the sample filter and the orifice filter for dirt. Replace filters (See Sections 9.3.1 and 11.5.1
respectively).
4. Check for partially plugged pneumatic lines, orifices, or valves. Clean or replace them.
5. If an IZS option is installed in the instrument, press CALZ and CALS. If the flow increases then suspect
a bad sample/cal valve.
11.2.2.3. High Flow
The most common cause of high flow is a leak in the sample flow control assembly or between there and the
pump. If no leaks or loose connections are found in the fittings or the gas line between the orifice and the pump,
rebuild/clean the sample flow control assembly as described in Section 11.6.1.
11.2.2.4. Displayed Flow = “XXXX”
This warning means that there is inadequate gas flow. There are four conditions that might cause this:
1. A leak upstream or downstream of the flow sensor
2. A flow obstruction upstream or downstream of the flow sensor
3. Bad Flow Sensor Board
4. Bad pump
To determine which case it is, view the sample pressure and sample flow functions on the front panel. If the
sample pressure is reading abnormally low, then the cause is likely a flow obstruction upstream of the flow
sensor. First, check the sample filter and make sure it is not plugged and then systematically check all the other
components upstream of the orifice to ensure that they are not obstructed.
If the sample pressure is reading normal but the sample flow is reading low then it is likely that the pump
diaphragm is worn or there is an obstruction downstream of the flow sensor.
11.2.2.5. Actual Flow Does Not Match Displayed Flow
If the actual flow measured does not match the displayed flow, but is within the limits of 720-880 cc/min, adjust
the calibration of the flow measurement as described in Section 6.9.8.
05232 Rev B3
203
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR PROCEDURES
Model 360E Instruction Manual
11.2.2.6. Sample Pump
The sample pump should start immediately after the front panel power switch is turned ON. With the Sample
Inlet plugged, the test function PRES should read about 10”-Hg for a pump in good condition. Readings above
10” Hg indicate that the pump needs rebuilding. If the test function SAMP FL is greater than 10 cm3/min there is
a leak in the pneumatic lines.
11.2.3. Poor or Stopped Flow of Purge Gas
If sufficient purge gas is not supplied to the GFC wheel housing, cyclical fluctuations in readings at zero or low
CO2 concentrations, such as < 100 ppm, may occur. These fluctuations are the result of changes in the CO2
concentration of the ambient atmosphere throughout the course of the day and night. In isolated areas with
relatively few people working nearby the ambient CO2 concentration will fall during the day and rise during the
night as rate of photosynthesis of the plants in the surrounding area decreases and increases. In a lab
environment with a relatively high human occupancy the ambient CO2 concentration will increase during those
parts of the day when the highest number of workers are present. If the GFC wheel housing is allowed to fill with
ambient air, these natural, diurnal fluctuations might be detected by the instrument and cause it’s in its
calculation of the CO2 concentration of the sample gas to drift.
Another possible symptom of poor or stopped purge gas flow would be the inability to measure zero
concentrations accurately at the end of a work day on a system that was calibrated at the beginning of a
workday. Although this could also be due to local fluctuations in ambient CO2 concentration during the day.
11.3. Calibration Problems
11.3.1. Miscalibrated
There are several symptoms that can be caused by the analyzer being miss-calibrated. This condition is
indicated by out of range Slopes and Offsets as displayed through the test functions and is frequently caused by
the following:
1. BAD SPAN GAS. This can cause a large error in the slope and a small error in the offset. Delivered
from the factory, the M360E’s slope is within ±15% of nominal. Bad span gas will cause the analyzer to
be calibrated to the wrong value. If in doubt have the span gas checked by and independent lab.
2. CONTAMINATED ZERO GAS. Excess H2O can cause a positive or negative offset and will indirectly
affect the slope.
3. Dilution calibrator not set up correctly or is malfunctioning. This will also cause the slope, but not the
zero, to be incorrect. Again the analyzer is being calibrated to the wrong value.
4. Too many analyzers on the manifold. This can cause either a slope or offset error because ambient gas
with its pollutants will dilute the zero or span gas.
204
05232 Rev B3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR PROCEDURES
11.3.2. Non-Repeatable Zero and Span
As stated earlier, leaks both in the M360E and in the external system are a common source of unstable and non-
repeatable readings.
5. Check for leaks in the pneumatic systems as described in Section 9.3.3. Don’t forget to consider
pneumatic components in the gas delivery system outside the M360E. Such as:
A change in zero air source such as ambient air leaking into zero air line, or;
A change in the span gas concentration due to zero air or ambient air leaking into the span gas line.
6. Once the instrument passes a leak check, do a flow check (See Section 9.3.4) to make sure adequate
sample is being delivered to the sensor assembly.
7. A failing IR photo-detector may be at fault. Check the CO2 MEAS and CO2 REF test functions via the
front panel display to make sure the signal levels are in the normal range (See Appendix A) and are
quiet.
8. Confirm the sample pressure, wheel temperature, bench temperature, and sample flow readings are
correct and have steady readings.
9. Disconnect the exhaust line from the optical bench near the rear of the instrument and plug this line into
the SAMPLE inlet creating a pneumatic loop. The CO2 concentration (either zero or span) now must be
constant. If readings become quiet, the problem is in the external pneumatics supplies for sample gas,
span gas or zero air.
10. If pressurized span gas is being used with a zero/span valve option, make sure that the venting is
adequate (See Section 3.1.2 and 5.4)
11. If it is the zero point that is non-repeatable, and if that non-repeatability seems to only occur at a certain
time of day, such as when worker occupancy is highest or lowest, make sure the flow of purge gas to
the GFC wheel housing has not stopped (See Sections 10.2.2 and 11.1.7 for more information).
11.3.3. Inability to Span – No SPAN Key
1. Confirm that the carbon dioxide span gas source is accurate; this can be done by switching between two
span-gas tanks. If the CO2 concentration is different, there is a problem with one of the tanks.
2. Check for leaks in the pneumatic systems as described in Section 9.3.3.
3. Make sure that the expected span gas concentration entered into the instrument during calibration is the
correct span gas concentration and not too different from expected span value. This can be viewed via
the RNG Menu (See Section 6.7).
4. Check to make sure that there is no ambient air or zero air leaking into span gas line.
11.3.4. Inability to Zero – No ZERO Key
1. Confirm that there is a good source of zero air. Dilute a tank of span gas with the same amount of zero
air from two different sources. If the CO2 Concentration of the two measurements is different, there is a
problem with one of the sources of zero air.
2. Check for leaks in the pneumatic systems as described in Section 9.3.3.
3. If the analyzer has had zero/span valve options 52 or 53, the CO2 scrubber may need maintenance.
4. Check to make sure that there is no ambient air leaking into zero air line.
05232 Rev B3
205
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR PROCEDURES
Model 360E Instruction Manual
11.4. Other Performance Problems
Dynamic problems (i.e. problems which only manifest themselves when the analyzer is monitoring sample gas)
can be the most difficult and time consuming to isolate and resolve. The following provides an itemized list of
the most common dynamic problems with recommended troubleshooting checks and corrective actions.
11.4.1. Temperature Problems
Individual control loops are used to maintain the set point of the absorption bench, filter wheel, and IR photo-
detector temperatures. If any of these temperatures are out of range or are poorly controlled, the M360E will
perform poorly.
11.4.1.1. Box or Sample Temperature
Box Temperature
The box temperature sensor is mounted to the motherboard and cannot be disconnected to check its resistance.
Rather check the BOX TEMP signal using the SIGNAL I/O function under the DIAG Menu (See Section 11.1.3).
This parameter will vary with ambient temperature, but at ~30oC (6-7° above room temperature) the signal
should be ~1450 mV.
Sample Temperature
The Sample Temperature should closely track the bench temperature. If it does not, locate the sensor, which is
located at the midpoint of the optical bench in a brass fitting. Unplug the connector labeled “Sample”, and
measure the resistance of the thermistor; at room temperature (25°C) it should be ~30K Ohms, at operating
temperature, 48°C, it should be ~ 12K Ohms
11.4.1.2. Bench Temperature
There are three possible failures that could cause the Bench temperature to be incorrect.
1. The heater mounted to the bottom of the Absorption bench is electrically shorted or open. Check the
resistance of the two heater elements by measuring between pin 2 and 4 (~76 Ohms), and pin 3 and 4
(~330 Ohms), of the white five-pin connector just below the sample temperature sensor on the Bench
(pin 1 is the pointed end).
2. Assuming that the I2C buss is working and that there is no other failure with the relay board, the solid-
state relay (K2) on the relay board may have failed. Using the BENCH_HEATER parameter under the
signal I/O function, as described above, turn on and off K2 (D3 on the relay board should illuminate as
the heater is turned on). Check the AC voltage present between pin 2 and 4, for a 100 or 115 VAC
model, and pins 3 and 4, for a 220-240 VAC model.
WARNING:
HAZARDOUS VOLTAGES ARE PRESENT DURING THIS TEST
3. If the relay has failed there should be no change in the voltage across pins 2 and 4 or 3 and 4. NOTE:
K2 is in a socket for easy replacement.
206
05232 Rev B3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR PROCEDURES
4. If K2 checks out OK, the thermistor temperature sensor located on the optical bench near the front of the
instrument could be at fault. Unplug the connector labeled “Bench”, and measure the resistance of the
thermistor. At room temperature it should have approximately 30K Ohms resistance near the 48oC set
point it should have ~12K ohms.
11.4.1.3. GFC Wheel Temperature
Like the bench heater above there are three possible causes for the GFC wheel temperature to have failed.
1. The wheel heater has failed. Check the resistance between pins 1 and 4 on the white five-pin connector
just below the sample temperature sensor on the bench (pin 1 is the pointed end). It should be
approximately 275 ohms.
2.
Assuming that the I2C buss is working and that there is no other failure with the relay board, the solid-
state relay (K1) on the relay board may have failed. Using the WHEEL_HEATER parameter under the signal
I/O function, as described above, turn on and off K1 (D2 on the relay board should illuminate as the heater is
turned on). Check the AC voltage present between pin 1 and 4.
WARNING:
HAZARDOUS VOLTAGES ARE PRESENT DURING THIS TEST
3. If the relay has failed there should be no change in the voltage across pins 1 and 4. NOTE: K1 is
socketed for easy replacement.
4. If K1 checks out OK, the thermistor temperature sensor located at the front of the filter wheel assembly
may have failed. Unplug the connector labeled “Wheel”, and measure the resistance of the thermistor.
The resistance near the 68oC set point is ~5.7k ohms.
11.4.1.4. IR Photo-Detector TEC Temperature
If the PHT DRIVE test parameter described above in Table 11-2 is out of range there are two four possible
causes of failure.
1. The screws retaining the IR photo detector to the absorption bench have become loose. Carefully
tighten the screws, hand-tight and note whether, after the analyzer has come up to operating
temperature, whether the PHT DRIVE voltage has returned to an acceptable level.
2. The two large transistor-type devices mounted to the side of the Absorption Bench have come loose
from the bench. Tighten the retaining screws and note whether there is an improvement in the PHT
DRIVE voltage.
3. The photo-detector has failed. Contact the factory for instructions.
4. The sync demodulator circuit board has failed. Contact the factor for instructions.
05232 Rev B3
207
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR PROCEDURES
Model 360E Instruction Manual
11.4.2. Excessive Noise
Noise is continuously monitored in the TEST functions as the STABIL reading and only becomes meaningful
after sampling a constant gas concentration for at least 10 minutes. Compare the current STABIL reading with
that recorded at the time of manufacture (included in the M360E Final Test and Validation Data Sheet-p/n 04271
shipped with the unit from Teledyne Instruments).
1. The most common cause of excessive noise is leaks. Leak check and flow check the instrument
described in Section 9.3.
2. Detector failure – caused by failure of the hermetic seal or over-temperature due to poor heat sinking of
the detector can to the optical bench. In addition to increased noise due to poor signal-to-noise ratio,
another indicator of detector failure is a drop in the signal levels of the CO2 MEASURE signal and CO2
REFERENCE signal.
3. Sync/Demod Board failure. There are many delicate, high impedance parts on this board. Check the
CO2 MEAS and CO2 REF Test Functions via the Front Panel Display.
4. The detector cooler control circuit can fail for reasons similar to the detector itself failing. Symptoms
would be a change in MR RATIO Test Function when zero air is being sampled.
Also check the SIGNAL I/O parameter PHT DRIVE. After warm-up, and at 25oC ambient, if PHT DRIVE
< 4800 mV, the cooler is working properly. If PHT DRIVE is > 4800 mV there is a malfunction.
5. The +5 and 15 VDC voltages in the M360E are provided by switching power supplies. Switch mode
supplies create DC outputs by switching the input AC waveform at high frequencies. As the
components in the switcher age and degrade, the main problem observed is increased noise on the DC
outputs. If a noisy switcher power supply is suspected, attach an oscilloscope to the DC output test
points located on the top right hand edge of the Relay board. Look for short period spikes > 100 mV p-p
on the DC output.
208
05232 Rev B3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR PROCEDURES
11.5. Subsystem Checkout
The preceding s of this manual discussed a variety of methods for identifying possible sources of failures or
performance problems within the analyzer. In most cases this included a list of possible causes. This describes
how to determine individually determine if a certain component or subsystem is actually the cause of the
problem being investigated.
11.5.1. AC Mains Configuration
The analyzer is correctly configured for the AC mains voltage in use if:
1. The Sample Pump is running.
2. The GFC wheel motor is spinning. LED’s D1 & D2 (located on the synch/demod PCA) should be
flashing.
3. If incorrect power is suspected, check that the correct voltage and frequency is present at the line input
on the rear panel.
If the unit is set for 230 VAC and is plugged into 115VAC, or 100VAC the sample pump will not
start, and the heaters will not come up to temperature.
If the unit is set for 115 or 100 VAC and is plugged into a 230 VAC circuit, the circuit breaker
built into the ON/OFF Switch on the Front Panel will trip to the OFF position immediately after power
is switched on.
11.5.2. DC Power Supply
If you have determined that the analyzer’s AC mains power is working, but the unit is still not operating properly,
there may be a problem with one of the instrument’s switching power supplies. The supplies can have two
faults, namely no DC output, and noisy output.
To assist tracing DC Power Supply problems, the wiring used to connect the various printed circuit assemblies
and DC Powered components and the associated test points on the relay board follow a standard color-coding
scheme as defined in the following table.
Table 11-6: DC Power Test Point and Wiring Color Codes
NAME
Dgnd
+5V
TEST POINT#
TP AND WIRE COLOR
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Black
Red
Agnd
+15V
-15V
Green
Blue
Yellow
Purple
Orange
+12V
+12R
05232 Rev B3
209
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR PROCEDURES
Model 360E Instruction Manual
A voltmeter should be used to verify that the DC voltages are correct per the values in the table below, and an
oscilloscope, in AC mode, with band limiting turned on, can be used to evaluate if the supplies are producing
excessive noise (> 100 mV p-p).
Table 11-7: DC Power Supply Acceptable Levels
CHECK RELAY BOARD TEST POINTS
POWER
SUPPLY
ASSY
VOLTAG
MIN V
MAX V
FROM TEST POINT
TO TEST POINT
E
NAME
Dgnd
#
1
3
3
3
1
6
6
NAME
+5
#
2
PS1
PS1
PS1
PS1
PS1
PS2
PS2
+5
+15
4.8
5.25
16V
Agnd
+15
4
13.5
-15
Agnd
-15V
5
-14V
-0.05
-0.05
11.75
-0.05
-16V
0.05
0.05
12.5
0.05
Agnd
Chassis
+12
Agnd
Dgnd
Chassis
+12V
Dgnd
1
Dgnd
N/A
7
+12V Ret
+12V Ret
Dgnd
1
11.5.3. I2C Bus
Operation of the I2C buss can be verified by observing the behavior of D1 on the Relay Board in conjunction with
the performance of the front panel display. Assuming that the DC power supplies are operating properly and the
wiring from the motherboard to the Keyboard, and the wiring from the keyboard to the Relay board, is intact, the
I2C buss is operating properly if:
D1 on the relay board is flashing, or;
D1 is not flashing but pressing a key on the front panel results in a change to the display.
11.5.4. Keyboard/Display Interface
The front panel keyboard, display and Keyboard Display Interface PCA (03975 or 04258) can be verified by
observing the operation of the display when power is applied to the instrument and when a key is pressed on the
front panel. Assuming that there are no wiring problems and that the DC power supplies are operating properly:
1. The vacuum fluorescent display is good if on power-up a “-“ character is visible on the upper left hand
corner of the display.
2. The CPU Status LED, DS5, is flashing, See Section 11.1.4.1.
3. If there is a “-“ character on the display at power-up and D1 on the relay board is flashing then the
keyboard/display interface PCA is bad.
4. If the analyzer starts operation with a normal display but pressing a key on the front panel does not
change the display, then there are three possible problems:
One or more of the keys is bad,
The interrupt signal between the Keyboard Display interface and the motherboard is broken, or
The Keyboard Display Interface PCA is bad.
210
05232 Rev B3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR PROCEDURES
11.5.5. Relay Board
The relay board PCA (04135) can be most easily checked by observing the condition of the its status LEDs on
the relay board, as described in Section 11.1.4.3, and the associated output when toggled on and off through
1. If the front panel display responds to key presses and D1 on the relay board is NOT flashing then either
the wiring between the Keyboard and the relay board is bad, or the relay board is bad.
2. If D1 on the relay board is flashing and the status indicator for the output in question (heater power,
valve drive, etc.) toggles properly using the signal I/O function, then the associated control device on the
relay board is bad. Several of the control devices are in sockets and can be easily replaced. The table
below lists the control device associated with a particular function:
Table 11-8: Relay Board Control Devices
CONTROL
DEVICE
K1
FUNCTION
IN SOCKET
Wheel Heater
Bench Heater
Spare AC Control
IZS Valves
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
K2
K3
U4
IR Source Drive
U5
The IR source drive output can be verified by measuring the voltage at J16 with the IR source disconnected. It
should be 11.5± 0.5 VDC.
11.5.6. Sensor Assembly
11.5.6.1. Sync/Demodulator Assembly
To verify that the Sync/Demodulator Assembly is working follow the procedure below:
1. Verify that D1 and D2 are flashing (they flash at different rates, see Table 11-3).
If the wheel drive and opto pickup are working properly then verify that there is 2.4 ±0.1 VAC and
2.5 ±0.15 VDC between digital ground and TP 5 on the sync demod board. If not then check the
wiring between the sync/demod and opto pickup assembly (see interconnect drawing 04216). If
good then the sync/demod board is bad.
3. With the analyzer connected to zero air, measure between TP11 (measure) and analog ground, and
TP12 (reference) and analog ground.
If they are similar to values recorded on the factory data sheet then there is likely a problem with the
wiring or the A/D converter.
If they are not then either the sync demodulator board or the IR-photodetector are bad. See Section
11.4.1.4 for problems with the IR-photodetector TEC drive.
05232 Rev B3
211
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR PROCEDURES
Model 360E Instruction Manual
11.5.6.2. Opto Pickup Assembly
Operation of the opto pickup PCA (04088) can be verified with a voltmeter. Measure the AC and DC voltage
between digital ground on the relay board, or keyboard and TP1 and TP2 on the sync pickup PCA. For a
working board, with the GFC motor spinning, they should read 2.4 ±0.1 VAC and 2.5 ±0.15 VDC.
Further confirmation that the pickups and motor are operating properly can be obtained by measuring the
frequency at TP1 and TP2 using a frequency counter, a digital volt meter with a frequency counter, or an
oscilloscope per the table below.
Table 11-9: Opto Pickup Board Nominal Output Frequencies
NOMINAL MEASURED FREQUENCY
AC MAINS FREQ.
50 Hz
TP1
25
TP2
300
360
60 Hz
30
11.5.6.3. GFC Wheel Drive
If the D1 and D2 on the sync demodulator board are not flashing then:
1. Check for power to the motor by measuring between pins 1 and 3 on the connector feeding the motor.
For instruments configured for 120 or 220-240VAC there should be approximately 88 VAC for
instruments configured for 100VAC, it should be the voltage of the AC mains, approximately 100VAC.
2. Verify that the frequency select jumper, JP4, is properly set on the Relay Board. For 50 Hz operation it
should be installed. For 60 Hz operation may either be missing or installed in a vertical orientation.
3. If there is power to the motor and the frequency select jumper is properly set then the motor is likely bad.
bolted to.
11.5.6.4. IR Source
The IR source can be checked using the following procedure:
1. Disconnect the source and check its resistance when cold. When new, the source should have a cold
resistance of more than 1.5 Ohms but less than 3.5 Ohms. If not, then the source is bad.
2. With the source disconnected, energize the analyzer and wait for it to start operating. Measure the drive
Voltage between pins 1 and 2 on the jack that the source is normally connected to; it should be 11.5 ±
0.25 VDC. If not, then there is a problem with either the wiring, the Relay Board, or the +12V power
supply.
3. If the drive voltage is correct in step 2, then remove the source from the heat sink assembly (2 screws
on top) and connect to its mating connector. Observe the light being emitted from the source. It should
be centered at the bottom of the U-shaped element. If there is either no emission or a badly centered
emission then the source is bad.
11.5.6.5. Pressure/Flow Sensor Assembly
The pressure/flow sensor PCA, located on the top of the absorption bench, can be checked with a Voltmeter
using the following procedure which, assumes that the wiring is intact, and that the motherboard and the power
supplies are operating properly:
212
05232 Rev B3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR PROCEDURES
1. For Pressure related problems:
Measure the voltage across C1 it should be 5 ± 0.25 VDC. If not then the board is bad.
Measure the voltage across TP4 and TP1. With the sample pump disabled it should be 4500 mV
±250 mV. With the pump energized it should be approximately 200 mV less. If not, then S1, the
pressure transducer is bad, the board is bad, or there is a pneumatic failure preventing the pressure
transducer from sensing the absorption cell pressure properly.
For flow related problems:
Measure the voltage across TP2 and TP1 it should be 10 ±0.25 VDC. If not then the board is bad.
Measure the voltage across TP3 and TP1. With proper flow (800 sccm at the sample inlet) this
should be approximately 4.5V (this voltage will vary with altitude). With flow stopped (sample inlet
blocked) the voltage should be approximately 1V. If the voltage is incorrect, the flow sensor is bad,
the board is bad or there is a leak upstream of the sensor.
11.5.7. Motherboard
11.5.7.1. A/D Functions
The simplest method to check the operation of the A-to-D converter on the motherboard is to use the Signal I/O
function under the DIAG menu to check the two A/D reference voltages and input signals that can be easily
measured with a voltmeter.
and REF_GND. If both are within 3 mV of nominal (4096 and 0), and are stable, ±0.5 mV then the basic
A/D is functioning properly. If not then the motherboard is bad.
2. Choose a parameter in the Signal I/O function such as SAMPLE_PRESSURE, SAMPLE_FLOW,
CO2_MEASURE or CO2_REFERENCE. Compare these voltages at their origin (see interconnect
drawing 04215 and interconnect list 04216) with the voltage displayed through the signal I/O function. If
the wiring is intact but there is a large difference between the measured and displayed voltage (±10 mV)
then the motherboard is bad.
11.5.7.2. Analog Outputs: Voltage
To verify that the analog outputs are working properly, connect a voltmeter to the output in question and perform
an analog output step test as described in Section 6.9.3.
For each of the steps, taking into account any offset that may have been programmed into channel (See Section
6.9.4), the output should be within 1% of the nominal value listed in the table below except for the 0% step,
which should be within 2 to 3 mV. If one or more of the steps fails to be within this range then it is likely that
there has been a failure of the either or both of the DACs and their associated circuitry on the motherboard.
05232 Rev B3
213
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR PROCEDURES
Model 360E Instruction Manual
Table 11-10: Analog Output Test Function - Nominal Values Voltage Outputs
FULL SCALE OUTPUT VOLTAGE
1V 5V
NOMINAL OUTPUT VOLTAGE
100MV
10V
STEP
%
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
0
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
0
2
20
40
60
80
100
20 mV
40 mV
60 mV
80 mV
100 mV
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1.0
4
6
8
10
11.5.7.3. Analog Outputs: Current Loop
To verify that the analog outputs with the optional current mode output are working properly, connect a 250 ohm
resistor across the outputs and use a voltmeter to measure the output as described in Section 6.9.4.2 and then
perform an analog output step test as described in Section 6.9.3.
For each step the output should be within 1% of the nominal value listed in the table below.
Table 11-11: Analog Output Test Function - Nominal Values Current Outputs
OUTPUT RANGE
2 -20
4 -20
NOMINAL OUTPUT VALUES
STEP
%
0
CURRENT
2 mA
5.6
V(250 OHMS)
CURRENT
V(250 OHMS)
1
2
3
4
5
6
0.5V
1.4
2.3
3.2
4.1
5
4
1
20
40
60
80
100
7.2
1.8
2.6
3.4
4.2
5
9.2
10.4
13.6
16.8
20
12.8
16.4
20
214
05232 Rev B3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR PROCEDURES
11.5.7.4. Status Outputs
The procedure below can be used to test the Status outputs:
1. Connect a jumper between the “D“ pin and the “” pin on the status output connector.
2. Connect a 1000 ohm resistor between the “+” pin and the pin for the status output that is being tested.
3. Connect a voltmeter between the “” pin and the pin of the output being tested (see table below).
Under the DIAG SIGNAL I/O menu (See Section 11.1.3), scroll through the inputs and outputs until you get to
the output in question. Alternately turn on and off the output noting the voltage on the voltmeter, it should vary
between 0 volts for ON and 5 volts for OFF.
Table 11-12: Status Outputs Check
PIN (LEFT TO RIGHT)
STATUS
SYSTEM OK
CONC VALID
HIGH RANGE
ZERO CAL
SPAN CAL
DIAG MODE
ALRM1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
ALRM2
11.5.7.5. Control Inputs – Remote Zero, Span
The control input bits can be tested by the following procedure:
1. Connect a jumper from the +5 pin on the Status connector to the x5V on the Control In connector.
2. Connect a second jumper from the ‘-‘ pin on the Status connector to the A pin on the Control In
connector. The instrument should switch from SAMPLE mode to ZERO CAL R mode.
3. Connect a second jumper from the ‘-‘ pin on the Status connector to the B pin on the Control In
connector. The instrument should switch from SAMPLE mode to SPAN CAL R mode.
4. In each case, the M360E should return to SAMPLE mode when the jumper is removed.
05232 Rev B3
215
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR PROCEDURES
Model 360E Instruction Manual
11.5.8. CPU
There are two major types of failures associated with the CPU board: complete failure and a failure associated
with the Disk-On Chip on the CPU board. If either of these failures occur, contact the factory.
1. For complete failures, assuming that the power supplies are operating properly and the wiring is intact,
the CPU is bad if on powering the instrument:
The vacuum fluorescent display shows a dash in the upper left hand corner.
The CPU Status LED, DS5, is not flashing. (See Section 11.1.4.1.)
There is no activity from the primary RS-232 port on the rear panel even if “? <ret>” is pressed.
In some rare circumstances this failure may be caused by a bad IC on the motherboard, specifically
U57 the large, 44 pin device on the lower right hand side of the board. If this is true, removing U57
from its socket will allow the instrument to startup but the measurements will be incorrect.
2. If the analyzer stops part way through initialization (there are words on the vacuum fluorescent display)
then it is likely that the DOC has been corrupted.
11.5.9. RS-232 Communications
11.5.9.1. General RS-232 Troubleshooting
Teledyne Instruments analyzers use the RS-232 communications protocol to allow the instrument to be
connected to a variety of computer-based equipment. RS-232 has been used for many years and as equipment
has become more advanced, connections between various types of hardware have become increasingly difficult.
Generally, every manufacturer observes the signal and timing requirements of the protocol very carefully.
Problems with RS-232 connections usually center around 4 general areas:
1. Incorrect cabling and connectors. See Section 6.11.2 for connector and pin-out information.
2. The BAUD rate and protocol are incorrectly configured. See Section 6.10.7.
3. If a modem is being used, additional configuration and wiring rules must be observed. See Section
6.13.2.6
4. Incorrect setting of the DTE – DCE Switch is set correctly. See Section 6.10.5
5. Verify that cable (03596) that connects the serial COM ports of the CPU to J12 of the motherboard is
properly seated
216
05232 Rev B3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR PROCEDURES
11.5.9.2. Troubleshooting Analyzer/Modem or Terminal Operation
These are the general steps for troubleshooting problems with a modem connected to a Teledyne Instruments
analyzer.
1. Check cables for proper connection to the modem, terminal or computer.
2. Check to make sure the DTE-DCE is in the correct position as described in Section 6.10.5.
3. Check to make sure the set up command is correct (See Section 6.13.2.7)
4. Verify that the Ready to Send (RTS) signal is at logic high. The M360E sets pin 7 (RTS) to greater than
3 volts to enable modem transmission.
5. Make sure the BAUD rate, word length, and stop bit settings between modem and analyzer match, See
Section 6.10.7.
6. Use the RS-232 test function to send “w” characters to the modem, terminal or computer; See Section
6.10.8.
7. Get your terminal, modem or computer to transmit data to the analyzer (holding down the space bar is
one way); the green LED should flicker as the instrument is receiving data.
8. Make sure that the communications software or terminal emulation software is functioning properly.
Further help with serial communications is available in a separate manual “RS-232 Programming Notes”
Teledyne Instruments part number 013500000.
05232 Rev B3
217
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR PROCEDURES
Model 360E Instruction Manual
11.6. Repair Procedures
This contains procedures that might need to be performed on rare occasions when a major component of the
analyzer requires repair or replacement.
11.6.1. Repairing Sample Flow Control Assembly
The critical flow orifice is housed in the flow control assembly (Teledyne Instruments part number: 001760400)
located on the top of the optical bench. A sintered filter protects the jewel orifice so it is unusual for the orifice to
need replacing, but if it does, or the filter needs replacement please use the following procedure (see the Spare
Parts list in Appendix B for part numbers and kits):
1. Turn off power to the analyzer.
2. Locate the assembly attached to the sample pump, see Figure 3–3.
3. Disconnect the pneumatic connection from the flow assembly and the assembly from the pump.
4. Remove the fitting and the components as shown in the exploded view in Figure 11.6.
5. Replace the o-rings (p/n OR000001) and the sintered filter (p/n FL000001).
6. If replacing the critical flow orifice itself (P/N 00094100), make sure that the side with the colored window
(usually red) is facing upstream to the flow gas flow.
7. Apply new Teflon® tape to the male connector threads
8. Re-assemble in reverse order.
9. After reconnecting the power and pneumatic lines, flow check the instrument as described in the Section
9.3.4.
Pneumatic Connector, Male 1/8”
(P/N FT_70
Spring
(P/N HW_20)
Sintered Filter
(P/N FL_01)
Critical Flow Orifice
(P/N 00094100)
Make sure it is placed with the
jewel down)
O-Ring
(P/N OR_01)
Purge Housing
(P/N 000850000)
Figure 11-10: Critical Flow Restrictor Assembly Disassembly
218
05232 Rev B3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR PROCEDURES
11.6.2. Removing/Replacing the GFC Wheel
When removing or replacing the GFC Wheel it is important to perform the disassembly in the following order to
avoid damaging the components:
1. Turn off the analyzer.
2. Remove the top cover as described in “Getting Started” Section 3.1.
3. Open the instrument’s hinged front panel.
4. Locate the GFC wheel/motor assembly (see Figure 3-3).
5. unplug the following electronic components:
The GFC wheel housing temperature sensor;
GFC wheel heater
GFC wheel motor power supply
IR source
6. Unscrew the purge gas line hex nut and remove the 1/8 inch FEP purge gas line.
10
7
8
9
Figure 11-11: Opening the GFC Wheel Housing
7. Remove the two (2) screws holding the opto-pickup printed circuit assembly to the GFC wheel housing.
8. Carefully remove the opto-pickup printed circuit assembly.
9. Remove the four (4) screws holding the GFC wheel motor/heat sink assembly to the GFC wheel
housing.
10. Carefully remove the GFC wheel motor/heat sink assembly from the GFC wheel housing.
11. Remove the one (1) screw fastening the GFC wheel/mask assembly to the GFC motor hub.
05232 Rev B3
219
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR PROCEDURES
Model 360E Instruction Manual
11
12
Figure 11-12: Removing the GFC Wheel
12. Remove the GFC wheel/mask assembly.
13. Follow the previous steps in reverse order to put the GFC wheel/motor assembly back together.
11.6.3. Disk-On-Chip Replacement Procedure
Replacing the Disk-on-Chip, may be necessary in certain rare circumstances or to load new instrument software.
This will cause all of the instrument configuration parameters and iDAS data to be lost. However a backup copy
of the operating parameters are stored in a second non-volatile memory and will be loaded into the new the
Disk-on-Chip on power-up. To change the Disk-on-Chip, follow this procedure.
1. Turn off power to the instrument.
2. Fold down the rear panel by loosening the thumbscrews on each side
3. Locate the Disk-on-Chip in the rightmost socket near the right hand side of the CPU assembly. Remove
the IC by gently prying it up from the socket.
4. Reinstall the new Disk-on-Chip, making sure the notch in the end of the chip is facing upward.
5. Close the rear panel and turn on power to the machine.
User Notes
220
05232 Rev B3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
A Primer on Electro-Static Discharge
12. A PRIMER ON ELECTRO-STATIC DISCHARGE
Teledyne Instruments considers the prevention of damage caused by the discharge of static electricity to be
extremely important part of making sure that your analyzer continues to provide reliable service for a long time.
This section describes how static electricity occurs, why it is so dangerous to electronic components and
assemblies as well as how to prevent that damage from occurring.
12.1. How Static Charges are Created
Modern electronic devices such as the types used in the various electronic assemblies of your analyzer, are very
small, require very little power and operate very quickly. Unfortunately, the same characteristics that allow them
to do these things also make them very susceptible to damage from the discharge of static electricity. Controlling
electrostatic discharge begins with understanding how electro-static charges occur in the first place.
Static electricity is the result of something called triboelectric charging which happens whenever the atoms of the
surface layers of two materials rub against each other. As the atoms of the two surfaces move together and
separate, some electrons from one surface are retained by the other.
Materials
Makes
Contact
Materials
Separate
+
+
+
+
PROTONS = 3
ELECTRONS = 2
PROTONS = 3
ELECTRONS = 4
PROTONS = 3
ELECTRONS = 3
PROTONS = 3
ELECTRONS = 3
NET CHARGE = -1
NET CHARGE = +1
NET CHARGE = 0
NET CHARGE = 0
Figure 12-1: Triboelectric Charging
If one of the surfaces is a poor conductor or even a good conductor that is not grounded, the resulting positive or
negative charge cannot bleed off and becomes trapped in place, or static. The most common example of
triboelectric charging happens when someone wearing leather or rubber soled shoes walks across a nylon carpet
or linoleum tiled floor. With each step, electrons change places and the resulting electro-static charge builds up,
quickly reaching significant levels. Pushing an epoxy printed circuit board across a workbench, using a plastic
handled screwdriver or even the constant jostling of StyrofoamTM pellets during shipment can also build hefty
static charges
Table 12-1: Static Generation Voltages for Typical Activities
MEANS OF GENERATION
Walking across nylon carpet
Walking across vinyl tile
Worker at bench
65-90% RH
1,500V
250V
10-25% RH
35,000V
12,000V
6,000V
100V
Poly bag picked up from bench
1,200V
20,000V
Moving around in a chair padded
with urethane foam
1,500V
18,000V
05232 Rev B3
221
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A Primer on Electro-Static Discharge
Model 360E Instruction Manual
12.2. How Electro-Static Charges Cause Damage
Damage to components occurs when these static charges come into contact with an electronic device. Current
flows as the charge moves along the conductive circuitry of the device and the typically very high voltage levels of
the charge overheat the delicate traces of the integrated circuits, melting them or even vaporizing parts of them.
When examined by microscope the damage caused by electro-static discharge looks a lot like tiny bomb craters
littered across the landscape of the component’s circuitry.
A quick comparison of the values in Table 12-1 with the those shown in the Table 12-2, listing device
susceptibility levels, shows why Semiconductor Reliability News estimates that approximately 60% of device
failures are the result of damage due to electro-static discharge.
Table 12-2: Sensitivity of Electronic Devices to Damage by ESD
DAMAGE SUSCEPTIBILITY VOLTAGE
RANGE
DEVICE
DAMAGE BEGINS
OCCURRING AT
CATASTROPHIC
DAMAGE AT
MOSFET
VMOS
10
100
30
1800
100
NMOS
60
GaAsFET
EPROM
60
2000
100
100
140
150
190
200
300
300
300
500
500
500
JFET
7000
500
SAW
Op-AMP
CMOS
2500
3000
2500
3000
7000
500
Schottky Diodes
Film Resistors
This Film Resistors
ECL
SCR
1000
2500
Schottky TTL
Potentially damaging electro-static discharges can occur:
Any time a charged surface (including the human body) discharges to a device. Even simple contact of a
finger to the leads of a sensitive device or assembly can allow enough discharge to cause damage. A
similar discharge can occur from a charged conductive object, such as a metallic tool or fixture.
When static charges accumulated on a sensitive device discharges from the device to another surface
such as packaging materials, work surfaces, machine surfaces or other device. In some cases, charged
device discharges can be the most destructive.
A typical example of this is the simple act of installing an electronic assembly into the connector or wiring
harness of the equipment in which it is to function. If the assembly is carrying a static charge, as it is
connected to ground a discharge will occur.
Whenever a sensitive device is moved into the field of an existing electro-static field, a charge may be
induced on the device in effect discharging the field onto the device. If the device is then momentarily
grounded while within the electrostatic field or removed from the region of the electrostatic field and
grounded somewhere else, a second discharge will occur as the charge is transferred from the device to
ground.
222
05232 Rev B3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
A Primer on Electro-Static Discharge
12.3. Common Myths About ESD Damage
I didn’t feel a shock so there was no electro-static discharge: The human nervous system isn’t able
to feel a static discharge of less than 3500 volts. Most devices are damaged by discharge levels much
lower than that.
I didn’t touch it so there was no electro-static discharge: Electro-static charges are fields whose lines
of force can extend several inches or sometimes even feet away from the surface bearing the charge.
It still works so there was no damage: Sometimes the damaged caused by electro-static discharge can
completely sever a circuit trace causing the device to fail immediately. More likely, the trace will be only
partially occluded by the damage causing degraded performance of the device or worse, weakening the
trace. This weakened circuit may seem to function fine for a short time, but even the very low voltage and
current levels of the device’s normal operating levels will eat away at the defect over time causing the
device to fail well before its designed lifetime is reached.
These latent failures are often the most costly since the failure of the equipment in which the damaged
device is installed causes down time, lost data, lost productivity, as well as possible failure and damage to
other pieces of equipment or property.
Static Charges can’t build up on a conductive surface: There are two errors in this statement.
Conductive devices can build static charges if they are not grounded. The charge will be equalized
across the entire device, but without access to earth ground, they are still trapped and can still build to
high enough levels to cause damage when they are discharged.
A charge can be induced onto the conductive surface and/or discharge triggered in the presence of a
charged field such as a large static charge clinging to the surface of a nylon jacket of someone walking up
to a workbench.
As long as my analyzer is properly installed, it is safe from damage caused by static discharges:
It is true that when properly installed the chassis ground of your analyzer is tied to earth ground and its
electronic components are prevented from building static electric charges themselves. This does not
prevent discharges from static fields built up on other things, like you and your clothing, from discharging
through the instrument and damaging it.
12.4. Basic Principles of Static Control
It is impossible to stop the creation of instantaneous static electric charges. It is not, however difficult to prevent
those charges from building to dangerous levels or prevent damage due to electro-static discharge from
occurring.
12.4.1. General Rules
Only handle or work on all electronic assemblies at a properly set up ESD station. Setting up an ESD safe
workstation need not be complicated. A protective mat properly tied to ground and a wrist strap are all that is
needed to create a basic anti-ESD workstation (see figure 12-2).
W ris t S tra p
P ro te c tiv e M a t
G ro u n d P o in t
Figure 12-2: Basic anti-ESD Work Station
05232 Rev B3
223
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A Primer on Electro-Static Discharge
Model 360E Instruction Manual
For technicians that work in the field, special lightweight and portable anti-ESD kits are available from most
suppliers of ESD protection gear. These include everything needed to create a temporary anti-ESD work area
anywhere.
Always wear an Anti-ESD wrist strap when working on the electronic assemblies of your analyzer.
An anti-ESD wrist strap keeps the person wearing it at or near the same potential as other grounded
objects in the work area and allows static charges to dissipate before they can build to dangerous levels.
Anti-ESD wrist straps terminated with alligator clips are available for use in work areas where there is no
available grounded plug.
Also, anti-ESD wrist straps include a current limiting resistor (usually around one meg-ohm) that protects
you should you accidentally short yourself to the instrument’s power supply.
Simply touching a grounded piece of metal is insufficient. While this may temporarily bleed off static
charges present at the time, once you stop touching the grounded metal new static charges will
immediately begin to re-build. In some conditions, a charge large enough to damage a component can
rebuild in just a few seconds.
Always store sensitive components and assemblies in anti-ESD storage bags or bins: Even when
you are not working on them, store all devices and assemblies in a closed anti-Static bag or bin. This will
prevent induced charges from building up on the device or assembly and nearby static fields from
discharging through it.
Use metallic anti-ESD bags for storing and shipping ESD sensitive components and assemblies
rather than pink-poly bags. The famous, “pink-poly” bags are made of a plastic that is impregnated with
a liquid (similar to liquid laundry detergent) which very slowly sweats onto the surface of the plastic
creating a slightly conductive layer over the surface of the bag.
While this layer may equalizes any charges that occur across the whole bag, it does not prevent the build
up of static charges. If laying on a conductive, grounded surface, these bags will allow charges to bleed
away but the very charges that build up on the surface of the bag itself can be transferred through the bag
by induction onto the circuits of your ESD sensitive device. Also, the liquid impregnating the plastic is
eventually used up after which the bag is as useless for preventing damage from ESD as any ordinary
plastic bag.
Anti-Static bags made of plastic impregnated with metal (usually silvery in color) provide all of the charge
equalizing abilities of the pink-poly bags but also, when properly sealed, create a Faraday cage that
completely isolates the contents from discharges and the inductive transfer of static charges.
Storage bins made of plastic impregnated with carbon (usually black in color) are also excellent at
dissipating static charges and isolating their contents from field effects and discharges.
Never use ordinary plastic adhesive tape near an ESD sensitive device or to close an anti-ESD
bag. The act of pulling a piece of standard plastic adhesive tape, such as Scotch® tape, from its roll will
generate a static charge of several thousand or even tens of thousands of volts on the tape itself and an
associated field effect that can discharge through or be induced upon items up to a foot away.
224
05232 Rev B3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
A Primer on Electro-Static Discharge
12.4.2. Basic anti-ESD Procedures for Analyzer Repair and Maintenance
12.4.2.1. Working at the Instrument Rack
When working on the analyzer while it is in the instrument rack and plugged into a properly grounded power
supply.
1. Attach your anti-ESD wrist strap to ground before doing anything else.
Use a wrist strap terminated with an alligator clip and attach it to a bare metal portion of the instrument
chassis. This will safely connect you to the same ground level to which the instrument and all of its
components are connected.
2. Pause for a second or two to allow any static charges to bleed away.
3. Open the casing of the analyzer and begin work. Up to this point, the closed metal casing of your
analyzer has isolated the components and assemblies inside from any conducted or induced static
charges.
4. If you must remove a component from the instrument, do not lay it down on a non-ESD preventative
surface where static charges may lie in wait.
5. Only disconnect your wrist strap after you have finished work and closed the case of the analyzer.
12.4.2.2. Working at an Anti-ESD Work Bench.
When working on an instrument of an electronic assembly while it is resting on an anti-ESD work bench:
1. Plug your anti-ESD wrist strap into the grounded receptacle of the work station before touching any items
on the work station and while standing at least a foot or so away. This will allow any charges you are
carrying to bleed away through the ground connection of the workstation and prevent discharges due to
field effects and induction from occurring.
2. Pause for a second or two to allow any static charges to bleed away.
3. Only open any anti-ESD storage bins or bags containing sensitive devices or assemblies after you have
plugged your wrist strap into the workstation.
Lay the bag or bin on the workbench surface.
Before opening the container, wait several seconds for any static charges on the outside surface of the
container to be bled away by the workstation’s grounded protective mat.
4. Do not pick up tools that may be carrying static charges while also touching or holding an ESD Sensitive
Device.
Only lay tools or ESD-sensitive devices and assemblies on the conductive surface of your workstation.
Never lay them down on any non-ESD preventative surface.
5. Place any static sensitive devices or assemblies in anti-static storage bags or bins and close the bag or
bin before unplugging your wrist strap.
6. Disconnecting your wrist strap is always the last action taken before leaving the workbench.
05232 Rev B3
225
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A Primer on Electro-Static Discharge
Model 360E Instruction Manual
12.4.2.3. Transferring Components from Rack to Bench and Back
When transferring a sensitive device from an installed Teledyne Instruments analyzer to an Anti-ESD workbench
or back:
1. Follow the instructions listed above for working at the instrument rack and workstation.
2. Never carry the component or assembly without placing it in an anti-ESD bag or bin.
3. Before using the bag or container allow any surface charges on it to dissipate:
If you are at the instrument rack, hold the bag in one hand while your wrist strap is connected to a
ground point.
If you are at an anti-ESD workbench, lay the container down on the conductive work surface.
In either case wait several seconds.
4. Place the item in the container.
5. Seal the container. If using a bag, fold the end over and fastening it with anti-ESD tape.
Folding the open end over isolates the component(s) inside from the effects of static fields.
Leaving the bag open or simply stapling it shut without folding it closed prevents the bag from forming a
complete protective envelope around the device.
6. Once you have arrived at your destination, allow any surface charges that may have built up on the bag
or bin during travel to dissipate:
Connect your wrist strap to ground.
If you are at the instrument rack, hold the bag in one hand while your wrist strap is connected to a
ground point.
If you are at a anti-ESD work bench, lay the container down on the conductive work surface
In either case wait several seconds
7. Open the container.
12.4.2.4. Opening Shipments from Teledyne Instruments Customer Service.
Packing materials such as bubble pack and Styrofoam pellets are extremely efficient generators of static electric
charges. To prevent damage from ESD, Teledyne Instruments ships all electronic components and assemblies in
properly sealed anti-ESD containers.
Static charges will build up on the outer surface of the anti-ESD container during shipping as the packing
materials vibrate and rub against each other. To prevent these static charges from damaging the components or
assemblies being shipped make sure that you always unpack shipments from Teledyne Instruments Customer
Service by:
1. Opening the outer shipping box away from the anti-ESD work area.
2. Carry the still sealed ant-ESD bag, tube or bin to the anti-ESD work area.
3. Follow steps 6 and 7 of Section 12.4.2.3 above when opening the anti-ESD container at the work station.
4. Reserve the anti-ESD container or bag to use when packing electronic components or assemblies to be
returned to Teledyne Instruments.
226
05232 Rev B3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
A Primer on Electro-Static Discharge
12.4.2.5. Packing Components for Return to Teledyne Instruments Customer Service.
Always pack electronic components and assemblies to be sent to Teledyne Instruments Customer Service in anti-
ESD bins, tubes or bags.
WARNING
DO NOT use pink-poly bags.
NEVER allow any standard plastic packaging materials to touch the electronic
component/assembly directly
This includes, but is not limited to, plastic bubble-pack, Styrofoam peanuts,
open cell foam, closed cell foam, and adhesive tape
DO NOT use standard adhesive tape as a sealer. Use ONLY anti-ESD tape
1. Never carry the component or assembly without placing it in an anti-ESD bag or bin.
2. Before using the bag or container allow any surface charges on it to dissipate:
If you are at the instrument rack, hold the bag in one hand while your wrist strap is connected to a
ground point.
If you are at an anti-ESD workbench, lay the container down on the conductive work surface.
In either case wait several seconds.
3. Place the item in the container.
4. Seal the container. If using a bag, fold the end over and fastening it with anti-ESD tape.
Folding the open end over isolates the component(s) inside from the effects of static fields.
Leaving the bag open or simply stapling it shut without folding it closed prevents the bag from forming a
complete protective envelope around the device.
NOTE
If you do not already have an adequate supply of anti-ESD bags or containers available, Teledyne
Instruments’ Customer Service department will supply them. Follow the instructions listed above for
working at the instrument rack and workstation.
User Notes:
05232 Rev B3
227
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A Primer on Electro-Static Discharge
Model 360E Instruction Manual
USER NOTES:
228
05232 Rev B3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
APPENDIX A - Version Specific Software Documentation
APPENDIX A - Version Specific Software Documentation
APPENDIX A-1: Model 360E Software Menu Trees
APPENDIX A-2: Model 360E Setup Variables Available Via Serial I/O
APPENDIX A-3: Model 360E Warnings and Test Measurements Via Serial I/O
APPENDIX A-4: Model 360E Signal I/O Definitions
APPENDIX A-5: Model 360E iDAS Functions
05233 Rev G.4
A-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX A-2: Setup Variables For Serial I/O, Revision G.4
Model 360E Instruction Manual
APPENDIX A-2: Setup Variables For Serial I/O, Revision G.4
Table A-1: M360E Setup Variables, Revision G.4
SETUP VARIABLE
NUMERIC
UNITS
DEFAULT
VALUE
VALUE RANGE
DESCRIPTION
Low Access Level Setup Variables (818 password)
DAS_HOLD_OFF
Minutes
15
0.5–20
Duration of DAS hold off period.
Number of digits to display to the
right of the decimal point for
concentrations on the display.
CONC_PRECISION
—
3
AUTO, 0, 1, 2, 3, 4
ON enables remote dynamic zero
calibration; OFF disables it.
DYN_ZERO
DYN_SPAN
—
—
OFF
OFF
ON, OFF
ON, OFF
ON enables remote dynamic span
calibration; OFF disables it.
CLOCK_ADJ
Sec./Day
0
-60–60
Time-of-day clock speed adjustment.
Medium Access Level Setup Variables (929 password)
ENGL,SECD,
EXTN
Selects the language to use for the
user interface.
LANGUAGE_SELECT
MAINT_TIMEOUT
—
ENGL 1
2
Time until automatically switching out
of software-controlled maintenance
mode.
Hours
0.1–100
33 MS, 66 MS,
133 MS, 266 MS,
533 MS,1 SEC,
2 SEC
Conversion time for
measure/reference detector channel.
CONV_TIME
CO_DWELL
—
33 MS 1
Dwell time before taking measure or
reference sample.
Seconds
0.2
0.1–30
Number of samples to take in
measure or reference mode.
CO_SAMPLE
FILT_SIZE
Samples
Samples
Samples
1
1–30
750
48
1–1000
1–1000
Moving average filter size.
Moving average filter size in adaptive
mode.
FILT_ASIZE
Absolute change to trigger adaptive
filter.
FILT_DELTA
FILT_PCT
PPM
%
4
10
90
ON
1
1–1000
1–100
Percent change to trigger adaptive
filter.
Delay before leaving adaptive filter
mode.
FILT_DELAY
Seconds
—
0–180
ON enables adaptive filter; OFF
disables it.
FILT_ADAPT
ON, OFF
0.1–30
ON, OFF
1–500
Dwell time before taking each
sample.
O2_DWELL 5
Seconds
—
ON enables O2 adaptive filter; OFF
disables it.
O2_FILT_ADAPT 5
O2_FILT_SIZE 5
O2_FILT_ASIZE 5
O2_FILT_DELTA 5
O2_FILT_PCT 5
ON
60
10
2
O2 moving average filter size in
normal mode.
Samples
Samples
%
O2 moving average filter size in
adaptive mode.
1–500
Absolute change in O2 concentration
to shorten filter.
0.1–100
0.1–100
Relative change in O2 concentration
to shorten filter.
%
2
A-10
05233 Rev G.4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
APPENDIX A-2: Setup Variables For Serial I/O, Revision G.4
SETUP VARIABLE
NUMERIC
UNITS
DEFAULT
VALUE
VALUE RANGE
DESCRIPTION
Delay before leaving O2 adaptive
filter mode.
O2_FILT_DELAY 5
O2_DIL_FACTOR 5
Seconds
20
0–300
Dilution factor for O2. Used only if is
dilution enabled with
FACTORY_OPT variable.
—
—
—
1
0.1–1000
PPB,PPM,
UGM,MGM
Concentration units for user
interface.
USER_UNITS
DIL_FACTOR
PPM 1
1
Dilution factor. Used only if is dilution
enabled with FACTORY_OPT
variable.
0.1–1000
10–600
Duration of dark cal. First two-thirds
is stabilization period; final third is
measure period.
DARK_CAL_DURATION
Seconds
60
DARK_MEAS_MV
DARK_REF_MV
mV
mV
0
0
-1000–1000
-1000–1000
Dark offset for measure reading.
Dark offset for reference reading.
Target concentration during linearity
adjustment for range 1.
LIN_TARGET_CONC1
LIN_NORM_CONC1
Conc
PPM
300
300
1–10000
Target concentration during linearity
adjustment normalized for T/P for
range 1.
0.01–10000
Measure/reference ratio measured
LIN_RATIO1
—
1
0.01–100
during linearity adjustment for range
1.
LIN_CORRECT1
—
1
0.001–999.999
1–10000
Linearity correction factor for range 1.
Target concentration during linearity
adjustment for range 2.
LIN_TARGET_CONC2
Conc
300
Target concentration during linearity
adjustment normalized for T/P for
range 2.
LIN_NORM_CONC2
LIN_RATIO2
PPM
—
300
1
0.01–10000
0.01–100
Measure/reference ratio measured
during linearity adjustment for range
2.
LIN_CORRECT2
—
1
0.001–999.999
1–10000
Linearity correction factor for range 2.
Target concentration during linearity
adjustment.
LIN_TARGET_CONC
Conc
300
Target concentration during linearity
adjustment normalized for T/P.
LIN_NORM_CONC
PPM
300
0.01–10000
Measure/reference ratio measured
during linearity adjustment.
LIN_RATIO
LIN_CORRECT
—
—
—
1
1
0.01–100
0.001–999.999
ON, OFF
Linearity correction factor.
ON enables CO2 compensation; OFF
disables it.
CO2_COMP_ENABLE
OFF
CO2 concentration to compensate
for.
CO2_COMP_CONC
%
0
0–20
CO_CONST1
CO_CONST2
—
—
500
100–50000
0–10
CO calculation constant.
CO calculation constant.
1.448
Electrical test gain factor for measure
reading.
ET_MEAS_GAIN
ET_REF_GAIN
—
—
1
1
0.0001–9.9999
0.0001–9.9999
0–5000
Electrical test gain factor for
reference reading.
Target detector reading during
electrical test.
ET_TARGET_DET
ET_TARGET_CONC
ET_CONC_RANGE
mV
4375
40
Target concentration during electrical
test.
PPM
Conc.
1–10000
D/A concentration range during
electrical test.
50
0.1–50000
05233 Rev G.4
A-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX A-2: Setup Variables For Serial I/O, Revision G.4
Model 360E Instruction Manual
SETUP VARIABLE
NUMERIC
UNITS
DEFAULT
VALUE
VALUE RANGE
DESCRIPTION
Standard temperature for
temperature compensation.
STD_TEMP
ºK
321
1–500
1–50
Standard pressure for pressure
compensation.
STD_PRESS
"Hg
28.1
48
Optical bench temperature set point
and warning limits.
BENCH_SET
WHEEL_SET
ºC
ºC
ºC
0–100
0–100
30–70
Warnings:
43–53
68
Wheel temperature set point and
warning limits.
Warnings:
63–73
50
O2 sensor cell temperature set point
and warning limits.
O2_CELL_SET 5
Warnings:
45–55
Standard O2 cell temperature for
temperature compensation.
STD_O2_CELL_TEMP 5
CO_SPAN1
ºK
323
40
1–500
Target CO concentration during span
calibration of range 1.
Conc.
1–10000
CO_SLOPE1
CO_OFFSET1
—
—
1
0
0.001–999.999
-10–10
CO slope for range 1.
CO offset for range 1.
Target CO concentration during span
calibration of range 2.
CO_SPAN2
Conc.
40
1–10000
CO_SLOPE2
CO_OFFSET2
—
—
1
0
0.001–999.999
-10–10
CO slope for range 2.
CO offset for range 2.
Target O2 concentration during span
calibration.
O2_TARG_SPAN_CONC 5
%
20.95
0.1–100
O2_SLOPE 5
O2_OFFSET 5
—
%
1
0
0.5–2
-10–10
O2 slope.
O2 offset.
SNGL, DUAL,
AUTO
RANGE_MODE
—
SNGL 1
Range control mode.
CONC_RANGE1
O2_RANGE 5
Conc.
%
50
100
0
0.1–50000
0.1–500
D/A concentration range 1.
O2 concentration range.
RS232_MODE
BitFlag
0–65535
RS-232 COM1 mode flags. Add
values to combine flags.
1 = quiet mode
2 = computer mode
4 = enable security
8 = enable hardware handshaking
16 = enable Hessen protocol 4
32 = enable multi-drop
64 = enable modem
128 = ignore RS-232 line errors
256 = disable XON / XOFF support
512 = disable hardware FIFOs
1024 = enable RS-485 mode
2048 = even parity, 7 data bits, 1
stop bit
4096 = enable command prompt
A-12
05233 Rev G.4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
APPENDIX A-2: Setup Variables For Serial I/O, Revision G.4
SETUP VARIABLE
BAUD_RATE
NUMERIC
UNITS
DEFAULT
VALUE
VALUE RANGE
DESCRIPTION
300, 1200, 2400,
4800, 9600,
—
19200 1
RS-232 COM1 baud rate.
19200, 38400,
57600, 115200
Any character in the
allowed character set.
Up to 100 characters
long.
RS-232 COM1 modem initialization
string. Sent verbatim plus carriage
return to modem on power up or
manually.
“AT Y0 &D0 &H0
&I0 S0=2 &B0 &N6
&M0 E0 Q1 &W0” 1
MODEM_INIT
—
RS-232 COM2 mode flags.
RS232_MODE2
BitFlag
0
0–65535
(Same settings as RS232_MODE.)
300, 1200,
2400, 4800,
9600, 19200,
38400, 57600,
115200
BAUD_RATE2
—
19200 1
RS-232 COM2 baud rate.
Any character in the
allowed character set.
Up to 100 characters
long.
RS-232 COM2 modem initialization
string. Sent verbatim plus carriage
return to modem on power up or
manually.
“AT Y0 &D0 &H0
&I0 S0=2 &B0 &N6
&M0 E0 Q1 &W0” 1
MODEM_INIT2
—
RS232_PASS
MACHINE_ID
Password
ID
940331
320
0–999999
0–9999
RS-232 log on password.
Unique ID number for instrument.
Any character in the
allowed character set.
Up to 100 characters
long.
RS-232 interface command prompt.
Displayed only if enabled with
RS232_MODE variable.
COMMAND_PROMPT
—
“Cmd> ” 1
NONE,
CO MEASURE,
CO REFERENCE,
VACUUM PRESSURE,
SAMPLE PRESSURE,
SAMPLE FLOW,
SAMPLE TEMP,
BENCH TEMP,
WHEEL TEMP,
O2 CELL TEMP 5,
CHASSIS TEMP,
PHT DRIVE
TEST_CHAN_ID
—
NONE 1
Diagnostic analog output ID.
LOW,
Range to calibrate during contact
closure or Hessen calibration.
REMOTE_CAL_MODE
PASS_ENABLE
STABIL_GAS
—
—
—
LOW 1
OFF
CO 1
10
HIGH
ON enables passwords; OFF
disables them.
ON, OFF
CO,
O2 5
Selects gas for stability
measurement.
Stability measurement sampling
frequency.
STABIL_FREQ
Seconds
Samples
1–300
2–40
Number of samples in concentration
stability reading.
STABIL_SAMPLES
25
2500
Photometer temperature warning
limits. Set point is not used.
PHOTO_TEMP_SET
mV
0–5000
Warnings:
250–4750
05233 Rev G.4
A-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX A-2: Setup Variables For Serial I/O, Revision G.4
Model 360E Instruction Manual
SETUP VARIABLE
SAMP_PRESS_SET
NUMERIC
UNITS
DEFAULT
VALUE
VALUE RANGE
DESCRIPTION
29.92
Sample pressure warning limits. Set
point is not used.
In-Hg
cc/m
0–100
Warnings:
15–35
750
Sample flow warning limits. Set point
is not used.
SAMP_FLOW_SET
Warnings:
500–1000
0–5000
Slope term to correct sample flow
rate.
SAMP_FLOW_SLOPE
VAC_SAMP_RATIO
—
—
1
0.001–100
0.1–2
Maximum vacuum pressure / sample
pressure ratio for valid sample flow
calculation.
0.53
7.5
Purge pressure warning limits. Set
point is not used.
PURGE_PRESS_SET
SAMP_TEMP_SET
BOX_SET
PSIG
ºC
0–100
0–100
0–100
Warnings:
2.5–12.5
30
Sample temperature warning limits.
Set point is not used.
Warnings:
10.1–100
30
Internal box temperature warning
limits. Set point is not used.
ºC
Warnings:
5–48
Optical bench temperature control
cycle period.
BENCH_CYCLE
BENCH_PROP
Seconds
1/ºC
2
5
0.5–30
0–100
Optical bench temperature PID
proportional coefficient. Proportional
band is the reciprocal of this setting.
Optical bench temperature PID
integral coefficient.
BENCH_INTEG
BENCH_DERIV
WHEEL_CYCLE
—
—
0.5
2
0–100
0–100
0.5–30
Optical bench temperature PID
derivative coefficient.
Wheel temperature control cycle
period.
Seconds
2
Wheel temperature PID proportional
coefficient. Proportional band is the
reciprocal of this setting.
WHEEL_PROP
1/ºC
1
0–100
Wheel temperature PID integral
coefficient.
WHEEL_INTEG
WHEEL_DERIV
—
0.035
0–100
0–100
0.5–30
0–10
Wheel temperature PID derivative
coefficient.
—
2
O2 cell temperature control cycle
period.
O2_CELL_CYCLE 5
O2_CELL_PROP 5
O2_CELL_INTEG 5
O2_CELL_DERIV 5
TPC_ENABLE
Seconds
10
O2 cell PID temperature control
proportional coefficient.
—
—
—
—
—
1
0.1
O2 cell PID temperature control
integral coefficient.
0–10
O2 cell PID temperature control
derivative coefficient.
0 (disabled)
ON
0–10
ON enables temperature/ pressure
compensation; OFF disables it.
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
ON enables concentration
linearization; OFF disables it.
CONC_LIN_ENABLE
ON
Any character in the
allowed character set.
Up to 100 characters
long.
SERIAL_NUMBER
—
“00000000 ” 1
Unique serial number for instrument.
A-14
05233 Rev G.4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
APPENDIX A-2: Setup Variables For Serial I/O, Revision G.4
SETUP VARIABLE
DISP_INTENSITY
NUMERIC
UNITS
DEFAULT
VALUE
VALUE RANGE
DESCRIPTION
HIGH,
MED,
LOW,
DIM
—
HIGH 1
Front panel display intensity.
ON enables automatic reset of the
I2C bus in the event of
communication failures; OFF
disables automatic reset.
I2C_RESET_ENABLE
—
ON
OFF, ON
Time-of-day clock format flags.
Enclose value in double quotes (")
when setting from the RS-232
interface.
“%a” = Abbreviated weekday name.
“%b” = Abbreviated month name.
“%d” = Day of month as decimal
number (01 – 31).
“%H” = Hour in 24-hour format (00 –
23).
“%I” = Hour in 12-hour format (01 –
12).
“%j” = Day of year as decimal
number (001 – 366).
Any character in the
allowed character set.
Up to 100 characters
long.
“TIME=%H:%M:%S
”
CLOCK_FORMAT
—
“%m” = Month as decimal number
(01 – 12).
“%M” = Minute as decimal number
(00 – 59).
“%p” = A.M./P.M. indicator for 12-
hour clock.
“%S” = Second as decimal number
(00 – 59).
“%w” = Weekday as decimal number
(0 – 6; Sunday is 0).
“%y” = Year without century, as
decimal number (00 – 99).
“%Y” = Year with century, as decimal
number.
“%%” = Percent sign.
Concentration alarm trigger
sensitivity adjustment.
ALARM_TRIGGER
REF_SDEV_LIMIT
Cycles
mV
10
1–100
Reference detector standard
deviation must be below this limit to
switch out of startup mode.
50
0.1–500
Set Point not used
Reference source warning limits. Set
point is not used.
REF_SOURCE_LIMIT
mV
1–5000
Warnings:
25–4800
05233 Rev G.4
A-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX A-2: Setup Variables For Serial I/O, Revision G.4
Model 360E Instruction Manual
SETUP VARIABLE
NUMERIC
UNITS
DEFAULT
VALUE
VALUE RANGE
DESCRIPTION
Factory option flags. Add values to
combine flags.
1 = enable dilution factor
2 = zero/span valves installed
4 = conc. alarms routed to relays
8 = enable linearity adjustment factor
16 = display units in concentration
field
32 = enable software-controlled
maintenance mode
FACTORY_OPT
BitFlag
0
0–65535
64 = span valve installed
128 = enable switch-controlled
maintenance mode
256 = compute only offset during
zero calibration
512 = 220 V A/C power
2048 = enable Internet option 3
4096 = use “old” style numeric data
entry menus when editing conc. table
1
2
3
4
5
Enclose value in double quotes (") when setting from the RS-232 interface
Hessen protocol
iChip option
Must power-cycle instrument for these options to take effect
O2 option
SETUP VARIABLE
NUMERIC
UNITS
DEFAULT
VALUE
VALUE RANGE
DESCRIPTION
Low Access Level Setup Variables (818 password)
DAS_HOLD_OFF
Minutes
15
0.5–20
Duration of DAS hold off period.
Number of digits to display to the
right of the decimal point for
concentrations on the display.
CONC_PRECISION
—
3
AUTO, 0, 1, 2, 3, 4
ON enables remote dynamic zero
calibration; OFF disables it.
DYN_ZERO
DYN_SPAN
—
—
OFF
OFF
ON, OFF
ON, OFF
ON enables remote dynamic span
calibration; OFF disables it.
CLOCK_ADJ
Sec./Day
0
-60–60
Time-of-day clock speed adjustment.
Medium Access Level Setup Variables (929 password)
ENGL,SECD,
EXTN
Selects the language to use for the
user interface.
LANGUAGE_SELECT
MAINT_TIMEOUT
—
ENGL 1
2
Time until automatically switching out
of software-controlled maintenance
mode.
Hours
0.1–100
33 MS, 66 MS,
133 MS, 266 MS,
533 MS,1 SEC,
2 SEC
Conversion time for
measure/reference detector channel.
CONV_TIME
—
33 MS 1
A-16
05233 Rev G.4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
APPENDIX A-2: Setup Variables For Serial I/O, Revision G.4
SETUP VARIABLE
CO_DWELL
NUMERIC
UNITS
DEFAULT
VALUE
VALUE RANGE
DESCRIPTION
Dwell time before taking measure or
reference sample.
Seconds
0.2
0.1–30
Number of samples to take in
measure or reference mode.
CO_SAMPLE
FILT_SIZE
Samples
Samples
Samples
1
1–30
750
48
1–1000
1–1000
Moving average filter size.
Moving average filter size in adaptive
mode.
FILT_ASIZE
Absolute change to trigger adaptive
filter.
FILT_DELTA
FILT_PCT
PPM
%
4
10
90
ON
1
1–1000
1–100
Percent change to trigger adaptive
filter.
Delay before leaving adaptive filter
mode.
FILT_DELAY
Seconds
—
0–180
ON enables adaptive filter; OFF
disables it.
FILT_ADAPT
ON, OFF
0.1–30
ON, OFF
1–500
Dwell time before taking each
sample.
O2_DWELL 5
Seconds
—
ON enables O2 adaptive filter; OFF
disables it.
O2_FILT_ADAPT 5
O2_FILT_SIZE 5
O2_FILT_ASIZE 5
O2_FILT_DELTA 5
O2_FILT_PCT 5
O2_FILT_DELAY 5
ON
60
10
2
O2 moving average filter size in
normal mode.
Samples
Samples
%
O2 moving average filter size in
adaptive mode.
1–500
Absolute change in O2 concentration
to shorten filter.
0.1–100
0.1–100
0–300
Relative change in O2 concentration
to shorten filter.
%
2
Delay before leaving O2 adaptive
filter mode.
Seconds
20
Dilution factor for O2. Used only if is
dilution enabled with
FACTORY_OPT variable.
O2_DIL_FACTOR 5
USER_UNITS
—
—
—
1
PPM 1
1
0.1–1000
PPB,PPM,
UGM,MGM
Concentration units for user
interface.
Dilution factor. Used only if is dilution
enabled with FACTORY_OPT
variable.
DIL_FACTOR
0.1–1000
10–600
Duration of dark cal. First two-thirds
is stabilization period; final third is
measure period.
DARK_CAL_DURATION
Seconds
60
DARK_MEAS_MV
DARK_REF_MV
mV
mV
0
0
-1000–1000
-1000–1000
Dark offset for measure reading.
Dark offset for reference reading.
Target concentration during linearity
adjustment for range 1.
LIN_TARGET_CONC1
LIN_NORM_CONC1
Conc
PPM
300
300
1–10000
Target concentration during linearity
adjustment normalized for T/P for
range 1.
0.01–10000
Measure/reference ratio measured
LIN_RATIO1
—
1
0.01–100
during linearity adjustment for range
1.
LIN_CORRECT1
—
1
0.001–999.999
1–10000
Linearity correction factor for range 1.
Target concentration during linearity
adjustment for range 2.
LIN_TARGET_CONC2
Conc
300
Target concentration during linearity
adjustment normalized for T/P for
range 2.
LIN_NORM_CONC2
PPM
300
0.01–10000
05233 Rev G.4
A-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX A-2: Setup Variables For Serial I/O, Revision G.4
Model 360E Instruction Manual
SETUP VARIABLE
LIN_RATIO2
NUMERIC
UNITS
DEFAULT
VALUE
VALUE RANGE
DESCRIPTION
Measure/reference ratio measured
during linearity adjustment for range
2.
—
1
0.01–100
LIN_CORRECT2
—
1
0.001–999.999
1–10000
Linearity correction factor for range 2.
Target concentration during linearity
adjustment.
LIN_TARGET_CONC
Conc
300
Target concentration during linearity
adjustment normalized for T/P.
LIN_NORM_CONC
PPM
300
0.01–10000
Measure/reference ratio measured
during linearity adjustment.
LIN_RATIO
LIN_CORRECT
—
—
—
1
1
0.01–100
0.001–999.999
ON, OFF
Linearity correction factor.
ON enables CO2 compensation; OFF
disables it.
CO2_COMP_ENABLE
OFF
CO2 concentration to compensate
for.
CO2_COMP_CONC
%
0
0–20
CO_CONST1
CO_CONST2
—
—
500
100–50000
0–10
CO calculation constant.
CO calculation constant.
1.448
Electrical test gain factor for measure
reading.
ET_MEAS_GAIN
ET_REF_GAIN
—
—
1
1
0.0001–9.9999
0.0001–9.9999
0–5000
Electrical test gain factor for
reference reading.
Target detector reading during
electrical test.
ET_TARGET_DET
ET_TARGET_CONC
ET_CONC_RANGE
STD_TEMP
mV
4375
40
Target concentration during electrical
test.
PPM
Conc.
ºK
1–10000
D/A concentration range during
electrical test.
50
0.1–50000
1–500
Standard temperature for
temperature compensation.
321
Standard pressure for pressure
compensation.
STD_PRESS
"Hg
28.1
48
1–50
Optical bench temperature set point
and warning limits.
BENCH_SET
WHEEL_SET
ºC
ºC
ºC
0–100
0–100
30–70
Warnings:
43–53
68
Wheel temperature set point and
warning limits.
Warnings:
63–73
50
O2 sensor cell temperature set point
and warning limits.
O2_CELL_SET 5
Warnings:
45–55
Standard O2 cell temperature for
temperature compensation.
STD_O2_CELL_TEMP 5
CO_SPAN1
ºK
323
40
1–500
Target CO concentration during span
calibration of range 1.
Conc.
1–10000
CO_SLOPE1
CO_OFFSET1
—
—
1
0
0.001–999.999
-10–10
CO slope for range 1.
CO offset for range 1.
Target CO concentration during span
calibration of range 2.
CO_SPAN2
Conc.
40
1–10000
CO_SLOPE2
CO_OFFSET2
—
—
1
0
0.001–999.999
-10–10
CO slope for range 2.
CO offset for range 2.
Target O2 concentration during span
calibration.
O2_TARG_SPAN_CONC 5
%
20.95
0.1–100
A-18
05233 Rev G.4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
APPENDIX A-2: Setup Variables For Serial I/O, Revision G.4
SETUP VARIABLE
NUMERIC
UNITS
DEFAULT
VALUE
VALUE RANGE
DESCRIPTION
O2_SLOPE 5
O2_OFFSET 5
—
%
1
0
0.5–2
-10–10
O2 slope.
O2 offset.
SNGL, DUAL,
AUTO
RANGE_MODE
—
SNGL 1
Range control mode.
CONC_RANGE1
O2_RANGE 5
Conc.
%
50
100
0
0.1–50000
0.1–500
D/A concentration range 1.
O2 concentration range.
RS232_MODE
BitFlag
0–65535
RS-232 COM1 mode flags. Add
values to combine flags.
1 = quiet mode
2 = computer mode
4 = enable security
8 = enable hardware handshaking
16 = enable Hessen protocol 4
32 = enable multi-drop
64 = enable modem
128 = ignore RS-232 line errors
256 = disable XON / XOFF support
512 = disable hardware FIFOs
1024 = enable RS-485 mode
2048 = even parity, 7 data bits, 1
stop bit
4096 = enable command prompt
300, 1200, 2400,
4800, 9600,
BAUD_RATE
—
19200 1
RS-232 COM1 baud rate.
19200, 38400,
57600, 115200
Any character in the
allowed character set.
Up to 100 characters
long.
RS-232 COM1 modem initialization
string. Sent verbatim plus carriage
return to modem on power up or
manually.
“AT Y0 &D0 &H0
&I0 S0=2 &B0 &N6
&M0 E0 Q1 &W0” 1
MODEM_INIT
—
RS-232 COM2 mode flags.
RS232_MODE2
BitFlag
0
0–65535
(Same settings as RS232_MODE.)
300, 1200,
2400, 4800,
9600, 19200,
38400, 57600,
115200
BAUD_RATE2
—
19200 1
RS-232 COM2 baud rate.
Any character in the
allowed character set.
Up to 100 characters
long.
RS-232 COM2 modem initialization
string. Sent verbatim plus carriage
return to modem on power up or
manually.
“AT Y0 &D0 &H0
&I0 S0=2 &B0 &N6
&M0 E0 Q1 &W0” 1
MODEM_INIT2
—
RS232_PASS
MACHINE_ID
Password
ID
940331
320
0–999999
0–9999
RS-232 log on password.
Unique ID number for instrument.
Any character in the
allowed character set.
Up to 100 characters
long.
RS-232 interface command prompt.
Displayed only if enabled with
RS232_MODE variable.
COMMAND_PROMPT
—
“Cmd> ” 1
NONE,
CO MEASURE,
TEST_CHAN_ID
—
NONE 1
Diagnostic analog output ID.
CO REFERENCE,
VACUUM PRESSURE,
05233 Rev G.4
A-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX A-2: Setup Variables For Serial I/O, Revision G.4
Model 360E Instruction Manual
SETUP VARIABLE
NUMERIC
UNITS
DEFAULT
VALUE
VALUE RANGE
DESCRIPTION
SAMPLE PRESSURE,
SAMPLE FLOW,
SAMPLE TEMP,
BENCH TEMP,
WHEEL TEMP,
O2 CELL TEMP 5,
CHASSIS TEMP,
PHT DRIVE
LOW,
Range to calibrate during contact
closure or Hessen calibration.
REMOTE_CAL_MODE
PASS_ENABLE
STABIL_GAS
—
—
—
LOW 1
OFF
CO 1
10
HIGH
ON enables passwords; OFF
disables them.
ON, OFF
CO,
O2 5
Selects gas for stability
measurement.
Stability measurement sampling
frequency.
STABIL_FREQ
Seconds
Samples
1–300
2–40
Number of samples in concentration
stability reading.
STABIL_SAMPLES
25
2500
Photometer temperature warning
limits. Set point is not used.
PHOTO_TEMP_SET
SAMP_PRESS_SET
SAMP_FLOW_SET
mV
0–5000
0–100
Warnings:
250–4750
29.92
Sample pressure warning limits. Set
point is not used.
In-Hg
cc/m
Warnings:
15–35
750
Sample flow warning limits. Set point
is not used.
Warnings:
500–1000
0–5000
Slope term to correct sample flow
rate.
SAMP_FLOW_SLOPE
VAC_SAMP_RATIO
—
—
1
0.001–100
0.1–2
Maximum vacuum pressure / sample
pressure ratio for valid sample flow
calculation.
0.53
7.5
Purge pressure warning limits. Set
point is not used.
PURGE_PRESS_SET
SAMP_TEMP_SET
BOX_SET
PSIG
ºC
0–100
0–100
0–100
Warnings:
2.5–12.5
30
Sample temperature warning limits.
Set point is not used.
Warnings:
10.1–100
30
Internal box temperature warning
limits. Set point is not used.
ºC
Warnings:
5–48
Optical bench temperature control
cycle period.
BENCH_CYCLE
BENCH_PROP
BENCH_INTEG
Seconds
1/ºC
2
5
0.5–30
0–100
0–100
Optical bench temperature PID
proportional coefficient. Proportional
band is the reciprocal of this setting.
Optical bench temperature PID
integral coefficient.
—
0.5
Optical bench temperature PID
derivative coefficient.
BENCH_DERIV
WHEEL_CYCLE
—
2
2
0–100
Seconds
0.5–30
Wheel temperature control cycle
A-20
05233 Rev G.4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
APPENDIX A-2: Setup Variables For Serial I/O, Revision G.4
SETUP VARIABLE
NUMERIC
UNITS
DEFAULT
VALUE
VALUE RANGE
DESCRIPTION
period.
Wheel temperature PID proportional
coefficient. Proportional band is the
reciprocal of this setting.
WHEEL_PROP
1/ºC
1
0–100
Wheel temperature PID integral
coefficient.
WHEEL_INTEG
WHEEL_DERIV
—
0.035
0–100
0–100
0.5–30
0–10
Wheel temperature PID derivative
coefficient.
—
2
O2 cell temperature control cycle
period.
O2_CELL_CYCLE 5
O2_CELL_PROP 5
O2_CELL_INTEG 5
O2_CELL_DERIV 5
TPC_ENABLE
Seconds
10
O2 cell PID temperature control
proportional coefficient.
—
—
—
—
—
1
0.1
O2 cell PID temperature control
integral coefficient.
0–10
O2 cell PID temperature control
derivative coefficient.
0 (disabled)
ON
0–10
ON enables temperature/ pressure
compensation; OFF disables it.
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
ON enables concentration
linearization; OFF disables it.
CONC_LIN_ENABLE
ON
Any character in the
allowed character set.
Up to 100 characters
long.
SERIAL_NUMBER
DISP_INTENSITY
—
—
—
“00000000 ” 1
Unique serial number for instrument.
Front panel display intensity.
HIGH,
MED,
LOW,
DIM
HIGH 1
ON enables automatic reset of the
I2C bus in the event of
communication failures; OFF
disables automatic reset.
I2C_RESET_ENABLE
ON
OFF, ON
Time-of-day clock format flags.
Enclose value in double quotes (")
when setting from the RS-232
interface.
“%a” = Abbreviated weekday name.
“%b” = Abbreviated month name.
“%d” = Day of month as decimal
number (01 – 31).
“%H” = Hour in 24-hour format (00 –
23).
“%I” = Hour in 12-hour format (01 –
12).
Any character in the
allowed character set.
Up to 100 characters
long.
“TIME=%H:%M:%S
”
CLOCK_FORMAT
—
“%j” = Day of year as decimal
number (001 – 366).
“%m” = Month as decimal number
(01 – 12).
“%M” = Minute as decimal number
(00 – 59).
“%p” = A.M./P.M. indicator for 12-
hour clock.
“%S” = Second as decimal number
(00 – 59).
“%w” = Weekday as decimal number
(0 – 6; Sunday is 0).
“%y” = Year without century, as
05233 Rev G.4
A-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX A-2: Setup Variables For Serial I/O, Revision G.4
Model 360E Instruction Manual
SETUP VARIABLE
NUMERIC
UNITS
DEFAULT
VALUE
VALUE RANGE
DESCRIPTION
decimal number (00 – 99).
“%Y” = Year with century, as decimal
number.
“%%” = Percent sign.
Concentration alarm trigger
sensitivity adjustment.
ALARM_TRIGGER
REF_SDEV_LIMIT
Cycles
mV
10
1–100
Reference detector standard
deviation must be below this limit to
switch out of startup mode.
50
0.1–500
Set Point not used
Reference source warning limits. Set
point is not used.
REF_SOURCE_LIMIT
mV
1–5000
Warnings:
25–4800
Factory option flags. Add values to
combine flags.
1 = enable dilution factor
2 = zero/span valves installed
4 = conc. alarms routed to relays
8 = enable linearity adjustment factor
16 = display units in concentration
field
32 = enable software-controlled
maintenance mode
FACTORY_OPT
BitFlag
0
0–65535
64 = span valve installed
128 = enable switch-controlled
maintenance mode
256 = compute only offset during
zero calibration
512 = 220 V A/C power
2048 = enable Internet option 3
4096 = use “old” style numeric data
entry menus when editing conc. table
1
2
3
4
5
Enclose value in double quotes (") when setting from the RS-232 interface
Hessen protocol
iChip option
Must power-cycle instrument for these options to take effect
O2 option
A-22
05233 Rev G.4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
APPENDIX A-3: Warnings and Test Functions, Revision G.4
APPENDIX A-3: Warnings and Test Functions, Revision G.4
Table A-2: M360E Warning Messages, Revision G.4
NAME
MESSAGE TEXT
DESCRIPTION
WANALOGCAL
WBENCHTEMP
ANALOG CAL WARNING
BENCH TEMP WARNING
The A/D or at least one D/A channel has not been calibrated.
Bench temperature outside of warning limits specified by
BENCH_SET variable.
WBOXTEMP
WDYNSPAN
WDYNZERO
BOX TEMP WARNING
CANNOT DYN SPAN
CANNOT DYN ZERO
Chassis temperature outside of warning limits specified by
BOX_SET variable.
Contact closure span calibration failed while DYN_SPAN was set
to ON.
Contact closure zero calibration failed while DYN_ZERO was set
to ON.
WCONCALARM1
WCONCALARM2
WCONFIGINIT
WDATAINIT
CONC ALARM 1 WARN
CONC ALARM 2 WARN
CONFIG INITIALIZED
DATA INITIALIZED
Concentration limit 1 exceeded.
Concentration limit 2 exceeded.
Configuration storage was reset to factory configuration or erased.
Data storage was erased.
WFRONTPANEL
WO2CELLTEMP 1
FRONT PANEL WARN
O2 CELL TEMP WARN
Firmware is unable to communicate with the front panel.
O2 sensor cell temperature outside of warning limits specified by
O2_CELL_SET variable.
WPHOTOTEMP
PHOTO TEMP WARNING
Photometer temperature outside of warning limits specified by
PHOTO_TEMP_SET variable.
WREARBOARD
WRELAYBOARD
WSAMPFLOW
REAR BOARD NOT DET
RELAY BOARD WARN
SAMPLE FLOW WARN
Rear board was not detected during power up.
Firmware is unable to communicate with the relay board.
Sample flow outside of warning limits specified by
SAMP_FLOW_SET variable.
WSAMPPRESS
WSAMPTEMP
WSOURCE
SAMPLE PRESS WARN
SAMPLE TEMP WARN
SOURCE WARNING
Sample pressure outside of warning limits specified by
SAMP_PRESS_SET variable.
Sample temperature outside of warning limits specified by
SAMP_TEMP_SET variable.
Reference reading minus dark offset outside of warning limits
specified by
REF_SOURCE_LIMIT variable.
WSYSRES
SYSTEM RESET
Instrument was power-cycled or the CPU was reset.
WWHEELTEMP
WHEEL TEMP WARNING
Wheel temperature outside of warning limits specified by
WHEEL_SET variable.
1
O2 option
05233 Rev G.4
A-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX A-3: Warnings and Test Functions, Revision G.4
Model 360E Instruction Manual
Table A-3: M360E Test Functions, Revision G.4
TEST FUNCTION
NAME1
MESSAGE TEXT
RANGE=50.0 PPM 3
DESCRIPTION
RANGE
D/A range in single or auto-range modes.
RANGE1
RANGE2
O2RANGE1
RANGE1=50.0 PPM 3
RANGE2=50.0 PPM 3
O2 RANGE1=100 % 10
STABIL=0.0 PPM 3
CO2 STB=0.0 %
D/A #1 range in dual range mode.
D/A #2 range in dual range mode.
O2 sensor range setting.
STABILITY
Concentration stability (standard deviation based on setting of
STABIL_FREQ and STABIL_SAMPLES).
O2 STB=0.0 % 10
CO2MEAS
CO2REF
MEAS= 4000 mV
The demodulated, peak IR detector output during the measure
portion of the CFG Wheel cycle.
REF= 2000 mV
The demodulated, peak IR detector output during the reference
portion of the CFG wheel cycle.
MRRATIO
SAMPPRESS
PURGEPRESS
SAMPFLOW
SAMPTEMP
BENCHTEMP
WHEELTEMP
O2CELLTEMP 1
BOXTEMP
MR RATIO=1.100
PRES=29.9 IN-HG-A
PURGE=7.5 PSIG
SAMP FL=751 CC/M
SAMPLE TEMP=26.8 C
BENCH TEMP=48.1 C
WHEEL TEMP=68.1 C
O2 CELL TEMP=50.2 C
BOX TEMP=26.8 C
PHT DRIVE=2500.0 MV
SLOPE
Measure/reference ratio.
Sample pressure.
Purge pressure
Sample flow rate.
Sample temperature.
Bench temperature.
Wheel temperature.
O2 sensor cell temperature.
Internal chassis temperature.
Photometer temperature.
CO2 slope, computed during zero/span calibration.
PHOTOTEMP
CO2SLOPE
CO2 SLOPE=1.0001
CO2OFFSET
OFFSET
CO2 offset, computed during zero/span calibration.
CO2 OFFSET=0.0001
O2 SLOPE1=0.980
O2 OFFSET1=1.79 %
TEST=1751.4 MV
O2SLOPE 1
O2OFFSET 1
TESTCHAN
O2 slope, computed during zero/span calibration.
O2 offset, computed during zero/span calibration.
Value output to TEST_OUTPUT analog output, selected with
TEST_CHAN_ID variable.
CLOCKTIME
TIME=09:52:20
Current instrument time of day clock.
1
Only appears if O2 option is installed.
A-24
05233 Rev G.4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual APPENDIX A-4: Signal I/O Definitions for 300E Series Analyzers, Revision G.4
APPENDIX A-4: Signal I/O Definitions for 300E Series Analyzers, Revision G.4
Table A-4: Signal I/O Definitions for 300E Series Analyzers, Revision G.4
SIGNAL NAME
BIT OR CHANNEL
NUMBER
DESCRIPTION
SYNC_OK
0
1 = sync. OK
0 = sync. error
Spare
1–7
Internal outputs, U8, J108, pins 1–8 = bits 0–7, default I/O address 322 hex
ELEC_TEST
DARK_CAL
0
1 = electrical test on
0 = off
1
1 = dark calibration on
0 = off
2–5
6
Spare
I2C_RESET
1 = reset I2C peripherals
0 = normal
I2C_DRV_RST
7
0 = hardware reset 8584 chip
1 = normal
Control inputs, U11, J1004, pins 1–6 = bits 0–5, default I/O address 321 hex
EXT_ZERO_CAL
EXT_SPAN_CAL
0
1
2
0 = go into zero calibration
1 = exit zero calibration
0 = go into span calibration
1 = exit span calibration
0 = remote select high range
1 = default range
REMOTE_RANGE_HI
3–5
6–7
Spare
Always 1
Control inputs, U14, J1006, pins 1–6 = bits 0–5, default I/O address 325 hex
0–5
6–7
Spare
Always 1
Control outputs, U17, J1008, pins 1–8 = bits 0–7, default I/O address 321 hex
0–7 Spare
Control outputs, U21, J1008, pins 9–12 = bits 0–3, default I/O address 325 hex
0–3 Spare
Alarm outputs, U21, J1009, pins 1–12 = bits 4–7, default I/O address 325 hex
ST_SYSTEM_OK2
4
5
6
7
1 = system OK
0 = any alarm condition or in diagnostics mode
1 = conc. limit 1 exceeded
0 = conc. OK
ST_CONC_ALARM_1
2 + 8
ST_CONC_ALARM_2
1 = conc. limit 2 exceeded
0 = conc. OK
2 + 8
Spare
A status outputs, U24, J1017, pins 1–8 = bits 0–7, default I/O address 323 hex
ST_SYSTEM_OK
ST_CONC_VALID
ST_HIGH_RANGE
ST_ZERO_CAL
ST_SPAN_CAL
0
1
2
3
4
0 = system OK
1 = any alarm condition
0 = conc. valid
1 = hold off or other conditions
0 = high auto-range in use
1 = low auto-range
0 = in zero calibration
1 = not in zero
0 = in span calibration
05233 Rev G.4
A-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX A-4: Signal I/O Definitions for 300E Series Analyzers, Revision G.4
Model 360E Instruction Manual
SIGNAL NAME
BIT OR CHANNEL
NUMBER
DESCRIPTION
1 = not in span
ST_DIAG_MODE
5
6
0 = in diagnostic mode
1 = not in diagnostic mode
ST_CONC_ALARM_1
0 = conc. limit 1 exceeded
1 = conc. OK
2
ST_CONC_ALARM_2
7
0 = conc. limit 2 exceeded
1 = conc. OK
2
B status outputs, U27, J1018, pins 1–8 = bits 0–7, default I/O address 324 hex
ST_AUTO_REF 2, 3
0
0 = in auto-reference mode
1 = not in auto-reference mode
1–7
Spare
Front panel I2C keyboard, default I2C address 4E hex
MAINT_MODE
LANG2_SELECT
SAMPLE_LED
CAL_LED
5 (input)
0 = maintenance mode
1 = normal mode
0 = select second language
1 = select first language (English)
0 = sample LED on
1 = off
6 (input)
8 (output)
9 (output)
10 (output)
14 (output)
0 = cal. LED on
1 = off
FAULT_LED
0 = fault LED on
1 = off
AUDIBLE_BEEPER
0 = beeper on (for diagnostic testing only)
1 = off
Relay board digital output (PCF8574), default I2C address 44 hex
RELAY_WATCHDOG
WHEEL_HTR
0
Alternate between 0 and 1 at least every 5 seconds to keep relay board
active
1
0 = wheel heater on
1 = off
BENCH_HTR
O2_CELL_HEATER 5
CAL_VALVE
2
3
4
5
6
6
7
0 = optical bench heater on
1 = off
0 = O2 sensor cell heater on
1 = off
0 = let cal. gas in
1 = let sample gas in
0 = let span gas in
1 = let zero gas in
0 = open zero scrubber valve
1 = close
SPAN_VALVE
ZERO_SCRUB_VALV
E 2
SHUTOFF_VALVE
0 = energize shutoff valve
1 = de-energize
IR_SOURCE_ON
0 = IR source on
1 = off
Rear board primary MUX analog inputs
Sample pressure
SAMPLE_PRESSURE
0
1
Vacuum pressure
VACUUM_PRESSURE
6
PURGE_PRESSURE 9,
1
Purge pressure
10
CO_MEASURE
2
3
Detector measure reading
Detector reference reading
CO_REFERENCE
A-26
05233 Rev G.4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual APPENDIX A-4: Signal I/O Definitions for 300E Series Analyzers, Revision G.4
SIGNAL NAME
BIT OR CHANNEL
NUMBER
DESCRIPTION
4
5
Temperature MUX
Sample flow
SAMPLE_FLOW
PHOTO_TEMP
TEST_INPUT_7
TEST_INPUT_8
REF_4096_MV
O2_SENSOR 5
6
Photometer detector temperature
Diagnostic test input
Diagnostic test input
4.096V reference from MAX6241
O2 concentration sensor
Spare
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
CO2_SENSOR 7
CO2 concentration sensor
Spare
DAC loopback MUX
Ground reference
REF_GND
Rear board temperature MUX analog inputs
Internal box temperature
Sample temperature
BOX_TEMP
SAMPLE_TEMP
BENCH_TEMP
WHEEL_TEMP
TEMP_INPUT_4
TEMP_INPUT_5
O2_CELL_TEMP
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Optical bench temperature
Wheel temperature
Diagnostic temperature input
Diagnostic temperature input
O2 sensor cell temperature
Spare
Rear board DAC MUX analog inputs
DAC channel 0 loopback
DAC channel 1 loopback
DAC channel 2 loopback
DAC channel 3 loopback
Rear board analog outputs
Concentration output #1
Concentration output #2
Test measurement output
Concentration output #3 (CO2)
DAC_CHAN_0
DAC_CHAN_1
DAC_CHAN_2
DAC_CHAN_3
0
1
2
3
CONC_OUT_1
CONC_OUT_2
TEST_OUTPUT
CONC_OUT_3 7
Hessen protocol.
M300EH.
M300ES.
M320E.
O2 option.
0
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
Sample pressure or differential pressure flow measurement option.
7
M306E.
8
Factory option enables concentration alarms on relay outputs.
9
M360E.
GFC7000E.
10
05233 Rev G.4
A-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX A-5: M360E iDAS Parameters Revision G.4
Model 360E Instruction Manual
APPENDIX A-5: M360E iDAS Parameters Revision G.4
Table A-5: M360E DAS Trigger Events, Revision G.4
NAME
ATIMER
EXITZR
DESCRIPTION
Automatic timer expired
Exit zero calibration mode
Exit span calibration mode
Exit multi-point calibration mode
Slope and offset recalculated
Exit diagnostic mode
EXITSP
EXITMP
SLPCHG
EXITDG
SOURCW
CONCW1
CONCW2
SYNCW
Source warning
Concentration limit 1 exceeded
Concentration limit 2 exceeded
Sync warning
BNTMPW
WTEMPW
STEMPW
SFLOWW
SPRESW
BTEMPW
PTEMPW
Bench temperature warning
Wheel temperature warning
Sample temperature warning
Sample flow warning
Sample pressure warning
Box temperature warning
Photometer detector temperature warning
A-28
05233 Rev G.4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
APPENDIX A-5: M360E iDAS Parameters Revision G.4
Table A-6: M360E iDAS Functions, Revision G.4
NAME
DETMES
DETREF
RATIO
DESCRIPTION
UNITS
mV
Detector measure reading
Detector reference reading
M/R ratio.
mV
None
None
None
None
None
PPM
SLOPE1
SLOPE2
OFSET1
OFSET2
ZSCNC1
Slope for range #1
Slope for range #2
Offset for range #1
Offset for range #2
Concentration for range #1 during zero/span calibration, just before computing
new slope and offset
ZSCNC2
Concentration for range #2 during zero/span calibration, just before computing
new slope and offset
PPM
CONC1
CONC2
STABIL
BNTEMP
WTEMP
SMPTMP
SMPFLW
SMPPRS
BOXTMP
PHTDRV
TEST7
Concentration for range #1
PPM
PPM
PPM
°C
Concentration for range #2
Concentration stability
Bench temperature
Wheel temperature
°C
Sample temperature
°C
Sample flow
cc/m
"Hg
°C
Sample pressure
Internal box temperature
Photometer detector temperature drive
Diagnostic test input (TEST_INPUT_7)
Diagnostic test input (TEST_INPUT_8)
Diagnostic temperature input (TEMP_INPUT_4)
Diagnostic temperature input (TEMP_INPUT_5)
Ground reference (REF_GND)
4096 mV reference (REF_4096_MV)
Bench temperature control duty cycle
mV
mV
mV
°C
TEST8
TEMP4
TEMP5
°C
REFGND
RF4096
BNCDTY
mV
mV
Fraction
0 = off,
1 = on
WHLDTY
Wheel temperature control duty cycle
Fraction
05233 Rev G.4
A-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX A-6: Terminal Command Designators, Revision G.4
Model 360E Instruction Manual
APPENDIX A-6: Terminal Command Designators, Revision G.4
Table A-7: Terminal Command Designators, Revision G.4
COMMAND
? [ID]
ADDITIONAL COMMAND SYNTAX
DESCRIPTION
Display help screen and commands list
Establish connection to instrument
Terminate connection to instrument
Display test(s)
LOGON [ID]
LOGOFF [ID]
password
SET ALL|name|hexmask
LIST [ALL|name|hexmask] [NAMES|HEX]
name
Print test(s) to screen
T [ID]
Print single test
CLEAR ALL|name|hexmask
SET ALL|name|hexmask
LIST [ALL|name|hexmask] [NAMES|HEX]
name
Disable test(s)
Display warning(s)
Print warning(s)
W [ID]
Clear single warning
CLEAR ALL|name|hexmask
ZERO|LOWSPAN|SPAN [1|2]
ASEQ number
Clear warning(s)
Enter calibration mode
Execute automatic sequence
Compute new slope/offset
Exit calibration mode
C [ID]
COMPUTE ZERO|SPAN
EXIT
ABORT
Abort calibration sequence
Print all I/O signals
LIST
name[=value]
Examine or set I/O signal
Print names of all diagnostic tests
Execute diagnostic test
Exit diagnostic test
LIST NAMES
ENTER name
EXIT
RESET [DATA] [CONFIG] [exitcode]
PRINT ["name"] [SCRIPT]
RECORDS ["name"]
Reset instrument
D [ID]
Print iDAS configuration
Print number of iDAS records
REPORT ["name"] [RECORDS=number] [FROM=<start
date>][TO=<end date>][VERBOSE|COMPACT|HEX]
(Print DAS records)(date format: MM/DD/YYYY(or YY)
[HH:MM:SS]
Print iDAS records
CANCEL
Halt printing iDAS records
Print setup variables
LIST
name[=value [warn_low [warn_high]]]
name="value"
Modify variable
Modify enumerated variable
Print instrument configuration
Enter/exit maintenance mode
Print current instrument mode
Upload iDAS configuration
Upload single iDAS channel
Delete iDAS channels
V [ID]
CONFIG
MAINT ON|OFF
MODE
DASBEGIN [<data channel definitions>] DASEND
CHANNELBEGIN propertylist CHANNELEND
CHANNELDELETE ["name"]
The command syntax follows the command type, separated by a space character. Strings in [brackets] are optional
designators. The following key assignments also apply.
A-30
05233 Rev G.4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
APPENDIX A-6: Terminal Command Designators, Revision G.4
Table A-8: Terminal Key Assignments, Revision G.4
TERMINAL KEY ASSIGNMENTS
ESC
Abort line
CR (ENTER)
Ctrl-C
Execute command
Switch to computer mode
COMPUTER MODE KEY ASSIGNMENTS
LF (line feed)
Ctrl-T
Execute command
Switch to terminal mode
USER NOTES:
05233 Rev G.4
A-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX A-6: Terminal Command Designators, Revision G.4
Model 360E Instruction Manual
USER NOTES:
A-32
05233 Rev G.4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model 360E Instruction Manual
APPENDIX B - M360E Spare Parts List
APPENDIX B - M360E Spare Parts List
NOTE
Use of replacement parts other than those supplied by API may result in non-compliance with
European standard EN 61010-1.
• 05390 - M360E Spare Parts List
• 04411 - M360E Recommended Spare Parts Stocking Levels
05234 Rev B
B-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX B - M360E Spare Parts List
Model 360E Instruction Manual
B-2
05234 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M360E Spare Parts List
Part Number
000941000
Description
ORIFICE, 13 MIL (SAMPLE FLOW)
001760400
001761300
003290500
003291500
006110200
006900000
009450300
009550500
009560201
009600400
009690000
009690100
009840300
010790000
010800000
016290000
016300600
019340200
026060000
026070000
035280000
036110300
037250100
037600000
037860000
040010000
040030100
041350000
041710000
042410100
042410200
042580000
042680000
042690000
042890100
042900100
043250100
043250300
043250400
043940000
045830000
045840000
045930000
048620200
050110000
ASSY, FLOW CTL, 800CC, 1/4" CONN-B
ASSY, SPAN GAS FLOW CONTROL
ASSY, THERMISTOR, M300 BENCH
ASSY, THERMISTOR, BENCH/WHEEL, M300E
ASSY, M300 MOTOR WHEEL HEATER
PAD, SCRUBBER RETAINER
ASSY, ZERO/SPAN VALVES, M300E (KB)
ASSY, SOURCE, M300E S/N>65
FILTER WHEEL, CO2
AKIT, EXPENDABLES, M300E
AKIT, TFE FLTR ELEM, 47MM, (FL6) (100)
AKIT, TFE FLTR, 47MM, (FL6) (30)
ASSY, SHUT-OFF VALVE, M300E (KB)
INPUT MIRROR, REPLICATED
OUTPUT MIRROR, REPLICATED
WINDOW, SAMPLE FILTER, 47MM (KB)
ASSY, SAMPLE FILTER, 47MM, ANG BKT, 5UM
ASSY, SAMPLE THERMISTOR, M300 BRASS
MIRROR, OBJECTIVE, 8 PASS,360E,320E,300E
MIRROR, FIELD, 8 PASS
ASSY, SCRUBBER, CO2, CH47, M360
PCA, SYNC DEMOD w/DETECTOR, M360E
ASSY, HEATER, OPTICAL BENCH
KIT, EXPENDABLE, CO2 SCRUBBER
ORING, TFE RETAINER, SAMPLE FILTER
ASSY, FAN REAR PANEL, E SERIES
PCA, FLOW/PRESSURE
PCA, RELAY BOARD, M300E
ASSY, CPU, CONFIGURATION, "E" SERIES
ASSY, PUMP W/FLOW CONTROL
ASSY, PUMP, INT, E SERIES
PCA, KEYBOARD, E-SERIES, W/V-DETECT
ASSY, VALVE, FOR SAMPLE/CAL VALVE ASSY
ASSY, VALVE , SHUT-OFF
ASSY, PUMP CONFIG PLUG, 100-115V/60 HZ
PROGRAMMED FLASH, E SERIES
ASSY, PWR CONF, 100-120V/60HZ, M3XXEX
OPTION, PWR CONF, 220-240V/50HZ, M3XXEX
OPTION, PWR CONF, 220-240V/60HZ, M3XXEX
PCA, INTERFACE, ETHERNET, E-SERIES
ASSY, CO2 SENSOR, M360E
MANUAL, OPERATORS, M360E
ASSY, PURGE REGULATOR, M360E
PCA, SERIAL INTERFACE, w/ MD, E SERIES
THERMAL PAD, DETECTOR HEATSINK
05390H - M360E SPL (DCN5220)
Page 1 of 2
12/10/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M360E Spare Parts List
Part Number
050320000
Description
PCA, OPTO-INTERRUPTER, M300E
052560000
052830200
053220100
053230000
055010000
055100200
058021100
CN0000458
PCA, OPTO-INTERRUPTER, M360EX/GFC7000E
ASSY, MOTOR HUB, MR7, "E", 115V
DOC, w/SOFTWARE, M360E
AKIT, EXPENDABLES, M360E IZS (w OPT 42C)
ASSY, MTR WHL HEATER w/THERM, 200W
OPTION, PUMP ASSY, 240V *
PCA, E-SERIES MOTHERBOARD, GEN 5-I
CONNECTOR, REAR PANEL, 12 PIN
CN0000520
DS0000025
FL0000001
FL0000003
FM0000004
HW0000020
HW0000036
HW0000090
HW0000101
HW0000379
KIT000219
OP0000009
OR0000001
OR0000002
OR0000025
OR0000034
OR0000039
OR0000041
OR0000047
OR0000077
OR0000088
OR0000094
OR0000096
OR0000097
PS0000011
PS0000024
PS0000025
PU0000022
RL0000015
SW0000051
SW0000059
VA0000014
WR0000008
CONNECTOR, REAR PANEL, 10 PIN
DISPLAY, E SERIES (KB)
FILTER, SS
FILTER, DFU
FLOWMETER (KB)
SPRING
TFE TAPE, 1/4" (48 FT/ROLL)
SPRING, PURGE ORIFICE
ISOLATOR
SEAL, PURGED MOTOR ASSY
KIT, 4-20MA CURRENT OUTPUT (E SERIES)
WINDOW, IR SOURCE
ORING, FLOW CONTROL
ORING, WHEEL HOUSING SEAL
ORING, CO2 SCRUBBER
ORING, INPUT & OUTPUT MIRRORS
ORING, IR SOURCE/BENCH
ORING, OBJECT & FIELD MIRRORS
ORING, WHEEL HOUSING SEAL
ORING, 2-018V
ORING, DETECTOR
ORING, SAMPLE FILTER
ORING, WHEEL HOUSING SEAL
ORING, PURGED MOTOR ASSY
PWR SUPPLY, SW, +5V, +/-15V, 40W (KB)
POWER SUPPLY COVER
PWR SUPPLY, SW, 12V, 40W (KB)
REBUILD KIT, FOR PU20 & 04241 (KB)
RELAY, DPDT, (KB)
SWITCH, POWER CIRC BREAK VDE/CE, w/RG(KB
PRESSURE SENSOR, 0-15 PSIA, ALL SEN
REGULATOR
POWER CORD, 10A, 6'
05390H - M360E SPL (DCN5220)
Page 2 of 2
12/10/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recommended Spare Parts Stocking Levels
Model 360E
Recommended Spare Parts Stocking Level: Standard
Units
6-10
1
Part Number
003290500
Description
1
1
2-5
1
11-20
1
21-30
2
ASSY, THERMISTOR, M300 BENCH
009550500
037250100
040010000
040030100
041710000
ASSY, SOURCE, M300E S/N>65
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
3
2
2
3
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
ASSY, BAND HEATER W/TC, M300EM/M3X0E
ASSY, FAN REAR PANEL, E SERIES
PCA, PRESS SENSORS (1X), w/FM4, E SERIES
ASSY, CPU, CONFIGURATION, "E" SERIES
ASSY, PUMP, INT, SOX/O3/IR
042410200 *
042580000
052560000
052840200
055010000
058021100
DS0000025
KIT000159
KIT000180
KIT000183
PS0000011
PS0000025
RL0000015
PCA, KEYBOARD, E-SERIES, W/V-DETECT
PCA, OPTO-INTERRUPTER, M360EX/GFC7000E
ASSY, MOTOR HUB, MR7, PURGED, "E", 115V
ASSY, MTR WHL HEATER w/THERM, 200W
PCA, E-SERIES MOTHERBOARD, GEN 5-I
DISPLAY, E SERIES (KB)
REPLACEMENT, RELAY BD, M300E, SN >= 100
RETROFIT, SYNC DMOD UPDATE, M360E
REPLACE, CO2 FILTER WHEEL ASSY, E-SERIES
PWR SUPPLY, SW, +5V, +/-15V, 40W (KB)
PWR SUPPLY, SW, 12V, 40W (KB)
1
1
1
1
RELAY, DPDT, (KB)
1
* Recommended Spare Parts Stocking Level: For Pump Assembly, 240V Option Installed
Units
6-10
1
Part Number
055100200
Description
1
2-5
11-20
21-30
OPTION, PUMP ASSY, 240V
2
2
Recommended Spare Parts Stocking Level: For IZS or ZS Option Installed
Units
6-10
Part Number
Description
ASSY, VALVE (SS), M300E
1
2-5
11-20
1
1
21-30
2
2
042680000
042690000
ASSY, VALVE , 2-WAY, 12V
04411M - M360E RSSL.xls (DCN 5289)
02/25/09
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE
Warranty/Repair
Questionnaire
Model 360E
Instruction Manual
INSTRUMENTS
Advanced Pollution Instrumentation
A Teledyne Technologies Company
CUSTOMER: ____________________________________
CONTACT NAME: ________________________________
PHONE: ______________________________________
FAX NO: ______________________________________
SITE ADDRESS: __________________________________________________________________________________
SERIAL NO.: ____________________________________ FIRMWARE REVISION: __________________________
1. Are there any failure messages? ____________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________________________
Please complete the following table:
PARAMETER
DISPLAYED AS
OBSERVED VALUE
UNITS
PPM
PPM
mV
NOMINAL RANGE
0 -10, 0 - 2000 Ppm
≤ 0.15 Ppm With Zero Air
3600 – 4800 Mv
1400 – 2000 Mv
2.5 ± 0.02 W/ Zero Air
-2”Ambient Absolute
800 ± 10%
Range
Stability
STABIL
CO2 MEAS
CO2 Measure
mV
CO2 Reference
Measure/Reference Ratio
Pressure
CO2 REF
MR RATIO
INHG
CC
ºC
PRES
Sample Flow
SAMP FL
48 ± 4
Sample Temp
SAMPLE TEMP
BENCH TEMP
WHEEL TEMP
BOX TEMP
ºC
48 ± 2
Bench Temp
ºC
68 ± 2
Wheel Temp
ºC
Ambient + 7 ± 10
250 Mv TO 4750 Mv
1.0 ± .3
Box Temp
mV
.
Photo Drive
PHT DRIVE
SLOPE
Slope
0 ± 0.3
Offset
OFFSET
O2 Sensor Temperature3
Slope of O2 Measurement3
Offset of O2 Measurement3
Dark Cal Reference signal
Dark Cal Measurement Signal
O2 CELL TEMP
O2 SLOPE
O2 OFFSET
REF DARK OFFSET
MEAS DARK OFFSET
mV
mV
125 ± 50 Mv.
125 ± 50 Mv
PPM
40 ± 2 Ppm
Electric Test
Values are in the Signal I/O
4096mv±2mv And Must Be
Stable
REF_4096_MV
REF_GND
0± 0.5 And Must Be Stable
2. Have you performed a leak check and flow check? ______________________________________________________
3. What is the sample flow & sample pressure with the sample in-let on rear of machine capped?
SAMPLE FLOW _________________________ CC
SAMPLE PRESSURE ______________________ IN-HG-A
TELEDYNE API CUSTOMER SERVICE
EMAIL: api-customerservice@teledyne.com
PHONE: (858) 657-9800 - TOLL FREE: (800) 324-5190 - FAX: (858) 657-9816
C-1
05235 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE
Warranty/Repair
Questionnaire
Model 360E
Instruction Manual
INSTRUMENTS
Advanced Pollution Instrumentation
A Teledyne Technologies Company
3. What are the failure symptoms? ____________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. What test have you done trying to solve the problem? ___________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. Please check these signals and verify the correctness. Look for the signals annotated on the diagram. What are the
peak-to-peak voltages?
TP 5
TP 5
TP 2
2v/DIV
10 mS
2v/DIV
.5 mS
5. If possible, please include a portion of a strip chart pertaining to the problem. Circle pertinent data.
THANK YOU FOR PROVIDING THIS INFORMATION. YOUR ASSISTANCE ENABLES TELEDYNE API TO RESPOND
FASTER TO THE PROBLEM THAT YOU ARE ENCOUNTERING.
OTHER INFORMATION: ____________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________________________
TELEDYNE API CUSTOMER SERVICE
EMAIL: api-customerservice@teledyne.com
PHONE: (858) 657-9800 - TOLL FREE: (800) 324-5190 - FAX: (858) 657-9816
C-2
05235 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model360E Instruction Manual
APPENDIX D - ELECTRONIC SCHEMATICS
APPENDIX D - ELECTRONIC SCHEMATICS
Table D-1: List of Included Electronic Schematics
DOCUMENT # DOCUMENT TITLE
03297
03632
03976
04003
05703
04089
04136
04216
04217
04259
04468
PCA, 03296, IR Photodetector Preamp and Sync Demodulator
PCA, 03631, 0-20mA driver
PCA, 03975, Keyboard & Display Driver
PCA, 04003, Pressure/Flow Transducer Interface
PCA, 05702, Motherboard, E-Series Gen 4
PCA, 04088, Opto Pickup Interface
PCA, 04135 Rev A, M300E Relay
Interconnect Drawing - M300E SNs >=100
Interconnect List - M300E SNs >=100
PCA, 04258, Keyboard & Display Driver
PCA, 04467, Analog Output Series Res
User Notes:
05236 Rev C
D-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX D - ELECTRONIC SCHEMATICS
Model 360E Instruction Manual
D-2
05236 Rev C
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|
Telex Musical Instrument FMR 500 User Manual
Toshiba Personal Computer SATELLITE PRO S200 User Manual
Toshiba Telephone CTX670 User Manual
Tote Vision Computer Monitor LCD 703HD1 User Manual
Tricity Bendix Oven SIE 250 User Manual
Turbosound Speaker TQ 308DP User Manual
Vanguard Heating Indoor Fireplace WMH26TNB User Manual
Vector Power Supply VEC020 User Manual
VocoPro DVD Player DVG 777K User Manual
Volvo MP3 Player Accessories 121 User Manual